176461 User Manual.book

176461 User Manual.book

Allen-Bradley

MicroLogix™ 1500

Programmable

Controllers

(Bulletin 1764 Controllers)

User

Manual

Important User Information

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.

The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in or included with this publication.

Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation

and Maintenance of Solid-State Control (available from your local Allen-Bradley office), describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication.

Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or part, without written permission of Allen-Bradley Company, Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations:

!

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss.

Attention statements help you to:

• identify a hazard

• avoid a hazard

• recognize the consequences

Note:

Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

MicroLogix, Compact, SLC, DTAM Micro, PanelView are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.

RSLogix 500 is a trademark of Rockwell Software, Inc.

Windows is a trademark of MicroSoft Corporation.

Belden is a trademark of Belden, Inc.

Preface

Preface

Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual. It provides information concerning:

• who should use this manual

• the purpose of this manual

• related documentation

• conventions used in this manual

• Allen-Bradley support

Who Should Use this Manual

Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing, programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1500 controllers.

You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic. If you do not, obtain the proper training before using this product.

Purpose of this Manual

This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1500 controllers. It describes the procedures you use to install, wire, program, and troubleshoot your controller. This manual:

• explains how to install and wire your controllers

• gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1500 controller system

• provides the instruction set for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers

• contains application examples to show the instruction set in use

Refer to your programming software user documentation for more information on programming your MicroLogix 1500 controller.

P-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Related Documentation

The following documents contain additional information concerning Allen-Bradley products. To obtain a copy, contact your local Allen-Bradley office or distributor.

For Read this Document

Document

Number

Information on understanding and applying micro controllers

.

Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1500

Base Units, including a mounting template for easy installation

A description on how to install and connect an AIC+. This manual also contains information on network wiring.

Information on how to install, configure, and commission a

DNI

Information on DF1 open protocol.

MicroMentor

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable

Controllers Installation Instructions

Advanced Interface Converter

(AIC+) User Manual

DeviceNet™ Interface User Manual

1761-MMB

1764-5.1

1761-6.4

1761-6.5

In-depth information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable controllers

DF1 Protocol and Command Set

Reference Manual

Allen-Bradley Programmable

Controller Grounding and Wiring

Guidelines

1770-6.5.16

1770-4.1

A description of important differences between solid-state programmable controller products and hard-wired electromechanical devices

An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment

Application Considerations for Solid-

State Controls

National Electrical Code - Published by the National

Fire Protection Association of Boston, MA.

A complete listing of current documentation, including ordering instructions. Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD-ROM or in multi-languages.

Allen-Bradley Publication Index

A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation

Glossary

SGI-1.1

SD499

AG-7.1

P-2

Preface

Common Techniques Used in this Manual

The following conventions are used throughout this manual:

• Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not procedural steps.

• Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information.

Italic type is used for emphasis.

Allen-Bradley Support

Allen-Bradley offers support services worldwide, with over 75 Sales/Support Offices,

512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone, plus Allen-Bradley representatives in every major country in the world.

Local Product Support

Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for:

• sales and order support

• product technical training

• warranty support

• support service agreements

Technical Product Assistance

If you need to contact Allen-Bradley for technical assistance, please review the information in the Troubleshooting appendix first. Then call your local Allen-Bradley representative.

P-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Your Questions or Comments on this Manual

If you find a problem with this manual, or you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful to you, please contact us at the address below:

Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.

Control and Information Group

Technical Communication, Dept. A602V

P.O. Box 2086

Milwaukee, WI 53201-2086 or visit our internet page at:

http://www.ab.com/micrologix

P-4

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

1

2

3

4

Hardware Overview

Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Installing Your Controller

Agency Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Compliance to European Union Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Preventing Excessive Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Master Control Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Base Unit Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Controller Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Mounting the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Installing Controller Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Wiring Your Controller

Wire Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Using Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Grounding the Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Sinking and Sourcing Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Controller I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Connecting the System

Default Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Using the Communications Toggle Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Connecting to the RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Connecting to a DH485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Connecting the AIC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

DeviceNet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

toc-i

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

5

6

7

8

9

Using Inputs and Outputs

Embedded I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

I/O Forcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Input Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

Latching Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6

Controller Memory and File Types

Controller Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5

Protecting Data Files During Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6

Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Clearing the Controller Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Allow Future Access Setting (OEM Lock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Function Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

Trim Pot Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

Data Access Tool (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3

DAT Keypad and Indicator Light Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3

Power-Up Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5

DAT Function File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

F1 and F2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Working Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Non-Existent Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Controller Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules

Real Time Clock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

Memory Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4

Using the High Speed Counter

High Speed Counter (HSC) Function File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

High Speed Counter Function File Sub-Elements Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4

HSC Function File Sub-Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

HSL - High Speed Counter Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

RAC - Reset Accumulated Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

toc-ii

11

12

10

13

14

Using High Speed Outputs

PTO - Pulse Train Output Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Pulse Train Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Pulse Train Outputs (PTO) Function File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Pulse Train Output Function File Sub-Elements Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

PWM - Pulse Width Modulation Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

PWM Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Function File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Programming Instructions Overview

Instruction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Using the Instruction Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions

XIC - Examine if Closed, XIO - Examine if Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

OTE - Output Energize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

OTL - Output Latch, OTU - Output Unlatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

ONS - One Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

OSR - One Shot Rising, OSF - One Shot Falling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Timer and Counter Instructions

Timer Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

TON - Timer, On-Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

TOF - Timer, Off-Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RTO - Retentive Timer On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

CTU - Count Up, CTD - Count Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

RES - Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Compare Instructions

Using the Compare Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

EQU - Equal, NEQ - Not Equal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

GRT - Greater Than, LES - Less Than . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

GEQ - Greater Than or Equal To, LEQ - Less Than or Equal To. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

MEQ - Mask Compare for Equal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

LIM - Limit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

toc-iii

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

15

16

17

18

19

Math Instructions

Using the Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2

Updates to Math Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3

ADD - Add, SUB - Subtract. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4

MUL - Multiply, DIV - Divide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5

NEG - Negate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6

CLR - Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6

SCL - Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7

SCP - Scale with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8

SQR - Square Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10

Conversion Instructions

Using Decode and Encode Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2

DCD - Decode 4 to 1-of-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-3

ENC - Encode 1-of-16 to 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-4

FRD - Convert from Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-6

TOD - Convert to Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-10

Logical Instructions

Using Logical Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-1

Updates to Math Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-2

AND - Bit-Wise AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-3

OR - Logical OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-4

XOR - Exclusive OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-5

NOT - Logical NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-6

Move Instructions

MOV - Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-2

MVM - Masked Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-4

File Instructions

COP - Copy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-2

FLL - Fill File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-3

BSL - Bit Shift Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-5

BSR - Bit Shift Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-7

FFL - First In, First Out (FIFO) Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-9

FFU - First In, First Out (FIFO) Unload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-12

LFL - Last In, First Out (LIFO) Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-15

LFU - Last In, First Out (LIFO) Unload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-18

toc-iv

20

21

22

23

24

Sequencer Instructions

SQC- Sequencer Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

SQO- Sequencer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6

SQL - Sequencer Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

Program Control Instructions

JMP - Jump to Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

LBL - Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

JSR - Jump to Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

SBR - Subroutine Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

RET - Return from Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4

SUS - Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4

TND - Temporary End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5

END - Program End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5

MCR - Master Control Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6

Input and Output Instructions

IIM - Immediate Input with Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

IOM - Immediate Output with Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4

REF- I/O Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6

Using Interrupts

Information About Using Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

User Interrupt Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7

INT - Interrupt Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7

STS - Selectable Timed Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8

UID - User Interrupt Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9

UIE - User Interrupt Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10

UIF - User Interrupt Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12

Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) Function File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13

Using the Event Input Interrupt (EII) Function File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-19

Process Control Instruction

The PID Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

The PID Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2

PD Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3

Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5

Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7

Tuning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10

Runtime Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-19

Analog I/O Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-21

Application Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-22

toc-v

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

25

A

B

C

D

E

Communications Instructions

MicroLogix 1500 Messaging Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-2

Remote Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-14

MSG Instruction Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-18

Timing Diagram for MicroLogix 1500 MSG Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-21

Service Communications (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-24

Examples: Ladder Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-27

Using Local Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-28

Using Remote Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-34

Example 2 - Passthru via DH485 Channel 0 of the SLC 5/04 Processor. . . . . . . . . . .25-37

Example - Passthu using Two 1785-KA5s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-40

Specifications

Controller Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Compact I/O Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

Transistor Output Transient Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

Replacement Parts

MicroLogix 1500 Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Lithium Battery (1747-BA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Replacement Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Replacement Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Troubleshooting Your System

Understanding the Controller LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Controller Error Recovery Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

Identifying Controller Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

Calling Allen-Bradley for Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

Understanding the Communication Protocols

RS-232 Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

DH485 Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

System Loading and Heat Dissipation

System Loading Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

System Loading Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

Calculating Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

toc-vi

F

G

Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time

Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Scan Time Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

System Status File

Status File Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1

Status File Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-3

Glossary

Index

toc-vii

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual toc-viii

Hardware Overview

1

Hardware Overview

Hardware Overview

The MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller contains a power supply, input circuits, output circuits, and a processor. The controller is available in 24 I/O and

28 I/O configurations.

The hardware features of the controller are:

10

RUN

REM

PROG

1

2

12

3

4

5

11

10 9 8 1

7

6

5

6

3

4

Feature

1

2

Description

Removable Terminal Blocks

Interface to Expansion I/O, Removable

ESD Barrier

Input LEDs

Output LEDs

Communication Port

Status LEDs

Feature

7

Description

Memory Module/Real-Time Clock

1

8

Replacement Battery

1

9

10

11

12

Battery

Terminal Doors and Label

Data Access Tool

1

Mode Switch, Trim Pots

1.Optional.

1-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Component Descriptions

A controller is composed of a standard processor (1764-LSP) and one of the base units listed below. The FET transistor and relay outputs are available on the

1764-28BXB base only.

Base Units

Catalog Number

1764-24AWA

1764-24BWA

1764-28BXB

Base Unit I/O and Power Supply

Twelve 120V ac inputs, twelve relay outputs and 120/240V ac power supply

Twelve 24V dc inputs, twelve relay outputs and 120/240V ac power supply

Sixteen 24V dc inputs, six FET and six relay outputs and 24V dc power supply

1-2

Processor (Catalog Number 1764-LSP)

Hardware Overview

Data Access Tool (Catalog Number 1764-DAT)

(Shown mounted on a Processor Unit.)

1-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Memory Modules/Real-Time Clock (Catalog Number 1764-MM1RTC,

1764-MM1, 1764-RTC)

(Shown mounted in a Processor Unit.)

Expansion I/O

Compact™ expansion I/O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1500 Controller. A

maximum of eight I/O modules may be connected to the base. See “System Loading and Heat Dissipation” on page E-1 for more information on system configurations.

End Cap

An end cap terminator (catalog number 1769-ECR) must be used at the end of the group of I/O modules attached to the MicroLogix 1500 Controller. The end cap terminator is not provided with the base and processor units. It is required when using expansion I/O.

1-4

Hardware Overview

Accessories

Cables

Use only the following communication cables in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations.

Environment Classification

Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Environment

Communication Cables

1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later

1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later

1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later

1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later

2707-NC8 Series B or later

2707-NC9 Series B or later

2707-NC10 Series B or later

2707-NC11 Series B or later

Programming

Programming the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller is done using RSLogix

500, Rev. 3.01.00 or later. Programming cables are not provided.

Communication Options

The MicroLogix 1500 can be connected to a personal computer using the DF1 protocol. It can also be connected to the DH485 network using an Advanced Interface

Converter (catalog number 1761-NET-AIC) and to the DeviceNet network using a

DeviceNet Interface (catalog number 1761-NET-DNI). See “Connecting the System” on page 4-1 for descriptions of these communication options.

1-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

1-6

Installing Your Controller

2

Installing Your Controller

This chapter shows you how to install your controller system. The only tools you require are a Flat or Phillips head screwdriver and drill. Topics include:

• agency certifications

• compliance to European Union Directives

• using in hazardous locations

• master control relay

• power considerations

• preventing excessive heat

• controller spacing

• mounting the controller

Agency Certifications

• UL 508

• C-UL under CSA C22.2 no. 142

• Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

(UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 no. 213)

• CE compliant for all applicable directives

2-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Compliance to European Union Directives

This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within the European

Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.

EMC Directive

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file:

• EN 50081-2

EMC - Generic Emission Standard, Part 2 - Industrial Environment

• EN 50082-2

EMC - Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 - Industrial Environment

This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.

Low Voltage Directive

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers, Part 2 -

Equipment Requirements and Tests.

For specific information required by EN 61131-2, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley publications:

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity, publication 1770-4.1

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries, publication AG-5.4

Automation Systems Catalog, publication B111

2-2

Installing Your Controller

General Considerations

Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure (Pollution Degree 2

1

) to reduce the effects of electrical interference (Over Voltage Category II

2

) and environmental exposure. Locate your controller as far as possible from power lines, load lines, and other sources of electrical noise such as hard-contact switches, relays, and AC motor drives. For more information on proper grounding guidelines, see the

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-4.1.

!

!

ATTENTION: Vertical mounting is not recommended due to heat build-up considerations.

ATTENTION: Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel.

Drilled fragments that fall into the base or processor unit could cause damage. Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris strips have been removed or the processor has been installed.

1 Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected.

2 Overvoltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation.

2-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Safety Considerations

Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation. Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others, as well as the condition of your equipment, is of primary importance. We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations.

Hazardous Location Considerations

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or nonhazardous locations only. The following ATTENTION statement applies to use in hazardous locations.

!

ATTENTION: EXPLOSION HAZARD

• Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,

Division 2.

• Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.

• Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.

• This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.

Use only the following communication cables in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations.

Environment Classification

Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Environment

Communication Cables

1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later

1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later

1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later

1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later

2707-NC8 Series B or later

2707-NC9 Series B or later

2707-NC10 Series B or later

2707-NC11 Series B or later

2-4

Installing Your Controller

Disconnecting Main Power

!

ATTENTION: Explosion Hazard - Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off and the area is known to be non-hazardous.

Safety Circuits

The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. In addition to disconnecting electrical power, all other sources of power (pneumatic and hydraulic) should be de-energized before working on a machine or process controlled by a controller.

!

ATTENTION: Explosion Hazard - Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live unless area is known to be nonhazardous.

Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons, like overtravel limit switches, stop push buttons, and interlocks, should always be hard-wired directly to the master control relay. These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens, the master control relay is de-energized thereby removing power to the machine. Never alter these circuits to defeat their function. Serious injury or machine damage could result.

Power Distribution

There are some points about power distribution that you should know:

• The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I/O devices when the relay is de-energized. It is recommended that the controller remain powered even when the master control relay is de-energized.

• If you are using a dc power supply, interrupt the load side rather than the ac line power. This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn-off. The dc power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer.

Power to the dc input and output circuits should be connected through a set of master control relay contacts.

2-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit

Any part can fail, including the switches in a master control relay circuit. The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit, which would be a safe power-off failure. However, if one of these switches shorts out, it no longer provides any safety protection. These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed.

Power Considerations

The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers.

Isolation Transformers

You may want to use an isolation transformer in the ac line to the controller. This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that enters the controller and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage. Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load. The power rating is expressed in volt-amperes (VA).

Power Supply Inrush

During power-up, the MicroLogix 1500 power supply allows a brief inrush current to charge internal capacitors. Many power lines and control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief time. If the power source cannot supply this inrush current, the source voltage may sag momentarily.

The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the MicroLogix 1500 is that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly. However, the effect of a voltage sag on other equipment should be considered. For example, a deep voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source. The following considerations determine whether the power source must be required to supply high inrush current:

• The power-up sequence of devices in a system.

• The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush current cannot be supplied.

• The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system.

If the entire system is powered-up at the same time, a brief sag in the power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment.

2-6

Installing Your Controller

Loss of Power Source

The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system. The time the system is operational during power loss is called

“program scan hold-up time after loss of power.” The duration of the power supply hold-up time depends on the type and state of the I/O, but is typically between 10 milliseconds and 3 seconds. When the duration of power loss reaches this limit, the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate dc power to the system. This is referred to as a power supply shutdown. The processor then performs an orderly shutdown of the controller.

Input States on Power Down

The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally longer than the turnon and turn-off times of the inputs. Because of this, the input state change from “On” to “Off” that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system. Understanding this concept is important.

The user program should be written to take this effect into account.

Other Types of Line Conditions

Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted. It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time. Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system.

2-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Preventing Excessive Heat

For most applications, normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range. Ensure that the specified temperature range is maintained.

Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation.

In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce “hot spots” near the controller.

Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered.

Note:

Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere. Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components. In extreme cases, you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat buildup within the enclosure.

Master Control Relay

A hard-wired master control relay (MCR) provides a reliable means for emergency machine shutdown. Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency-stop switches in different locations, its installation is important from a safety standpoint. Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens, the master control relay is de-energized.

This removes power to input and output device circuits. Refer to the figures on page

2-11 and 2-12.

!

ATTENTION: Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and/or machine damage could result.

2-8

Installing Your Controller

Note:

If you are using an external dc power supply, interrupt the dc output side rather than the ac line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn-off.

The ac line of the dc output power supply should be fused.

Connect a set of master control relays in series with the dc power supplying the input and output circuits.

Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure, place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure.

Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to input and output devices should be removed.

When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the controller’s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed.

The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller. It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on equipment within the enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system.

Note:

Do not control the master control relay with the controller. Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergencystop switch and the master control relay.

2-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using Emergency-Stop Switches

When using emergency-stop switches, adhere to the following points:

• Do not program emergency-stop switches in the controller program. Any emergency-stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay.

• Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency-stop switches.

• Install emergency-stop switches and the master control relay in your system.

Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application.

Emergency-stop switches must be easy to reach.

• In the following illustration, input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection. However, in most applications, only output circuits require MCR protection.

The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system.

Note:

In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection; however, if you need to remove power from all field devices, you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring.

2-10

Installing Your Controller

Schematic (Using IEC Symbols)

L1

230V ac

L2

Disconnect

Fuse

MCR

230V ac

I/O

Circuits

X1

Isolation

Transformer

115V ac

or 230V

Fuse

X2

Operation of either ofthese contacts will remove power from the external I/O circuits, stopping machine motion.

Emergency-Stop

Push Button

Overtravel

Limit Switch

Stop

(Lo) (Hi)

Line Terminals: Connect to terminals of Power Supply (1764-24AWA and

1764-24BWA).

Start

Master Control Relay (MCR)

Cat. No. 700-PK400A1

Suppressor

Cat. No. 700-N24

MCR

Suppr.

MCR

MCR dc Power Supply.

Use IEC 950/EN 60950

_

+

MCR

115V ac or

230V ac

I/O Circuits

24V dc

I/O

Circuits

Line Terminals: Connect to 24V dc terminals of Power Supply.

2-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols)

L1

230V ac

L2

Disconnect

MCR

Fuse

230V ac

Output

Circuits

X1

Isolation

Transformer

115V ac or

230V ac

Fuse

X2

Operation of either ofthese contacts will remove power from the external I/O circuits, stopping machine motion.

Emergency-Stop

Push Button

Overtravel

Limit Switch

Stop

(Lo)

(Hi)

Line Terminals:

Connect to 1764-24AWA or 1764-24BWA terminals.

Start

Master Control Relay (MCR)

Cat. No. 700-PK400A1

Suppressor

Cat. No. 700-N24

MCR

Suppr.

MCR

MCR dc Power Supply.

Use NEC Class 2 for UL Listing.

_

+

MCR

115V ac or

230V ac

I/O Circuits

24 V dc

I/O Circuits

Line Terminals: Connect to 24V dc terminals of Power Supply.

2-12

Installing Your Controller

Base Unit Mounting Dimensions

A

B

C

Dimension

Height (A)

Width (B)

Depth (C)

1764-24AWA 1764-24BWA 1764-28BXB

DIN latch open: 138 mm (5.43 in.), DIN latch closed: 118 mm (4.65 in.)

168 mm (6.62 in.)

87 mm (3.43 in.)

See “Controller Dimensions” on page A-9 for more dimensional information.

Controller Spacing

The base unit is designed to be mounted horizontally, with the Compact™ expansion

I/O extending to the right of the base unit. Allow 50 mm (2 in.) minimum of space on all sides for adequate ventilation, as shown below.

Top

Controller

Side Side

Bottom

2-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Mounting the Controller

!

ATTENTION: Do not remove protective debris strips until after the base and all other equipment in the panel near the base is mounted and wiring is complete. The debris strips are there to prevent drill fragments, wire strands and other dirt from getting into the controller.

Once wiring is complete, remove protective debris strips and install processor unit. Failure to remove strips before operating can cause overheating.

Protective

Debris Strips

ESD Barrier

!

!

ATTENTION: Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel.

Drilled fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage. Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris strips have been removed.

ATTENTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the base unit. Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas.

2-14

Installing Your Controller

Note: If additional I/O modules are required for the application, remove the ESD barrier to install expansion I/O modules. A maximum of 8 I/O modules may be connected to the base. The I/O module’s current requirements and power consumption may further limit the number of modules connected to the base.

See “System Loading and Heat Dissipation” on page E-1. An end cap

terminator (catalog number 1769-ECR) is required at the end of the group of

I/O modules attached to the base.

Using a DIN Rail

The base unit and expansion I/O DIN rail latches lock in the open position so that an entire system can be easily attached to or removed from the DIN rail. The maximum extension of the latch is 15 mm (0.67 in.) in the open position. A flat-blade screw driver is required for removal of the base unit. The base can be mounted to EN50022-

35x7.5 or EN50022-35x15 DIN rails. DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown below.

DIN Rail Latch

Dimension

A

B

C

B

A

C

Height

DIN latch open: 138 mm (5.43 in.), DIN latch closed: 118 mm (4.65 in.)

47.6 mm (1.875 in.)

47.6 mm (1.875 in) DIN latch closed

54.7 mm (2.16 in.) DIN latch open

2-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

To install your base unit on the DIN rail:

1. Mount your DIN rail. (Make sure that the placement of the base unit on the DIN

rail meets the recommended spacing requirements, see “Controller Spacing” on page 2-13. Refer to the mounting template from the inside back cover of the

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controller Base Units Installation Instructions, publication 1764-5.1.

2. Hook the top slot over the DIN rail.

3. While pressing the base unit down against the top of the rail, snap the bottom of the base unit into position. Ensure DIN latches are in the up (secured) position.

4. Leave the protective debris strip attached until you are finished wiring the base unit and any other devices.

To remove your base unit from the DIN rail:

1. Place a flat-blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom of the base unit.

2. Holding the base unit, pry downward on the latch until the latch locks in the open position. Repeat this procedure with the second latch. This releases the base unit from the DIN rail.

DIN Rail Latch

2-16

Base Unit Panel Mounting

Mount to panel using #8 or M4 screws.

Installing Your Controller

Mounting Template

To install your base unit using mounting screws:

1. Remove the mounting template from the inside back cover of the MicroLogix

1500 Programmable Controller Base Units Installation Instruction, publication

1764-5.1.

2. Secure the template to the mounting surface. (Make sure your base unit is spaced

properly, see “Controller Spacing” on page 2-13).

3. Drill holes through the template.

4. Remove the mounting template.

5. Mount the base unit.

6. Leave the protective debris strips attached until you are finished wiring the base unit and any other devices.

2-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Installing Controller Components

Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

!

ATTENTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch bus connector pins. Follow these guidelines when you handle any module:

• Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential.

• Wear an approved wrist-strap grounding device.

• Do not touch the bus connector or connector pins.

• Do not touch circuit components inside the module.

• If available, use a static-safe work station.

• When not in use, keep the module in its static-shield bag.

!

ATTENTION: Be sure the base unit is free of all metal fragments before removing protective debris strips and installing the processor unit. Failure to remove strips before operating can cause overheating.

2-18

Installing Your Controller

Processor

1. Be sure base unit power is off.

2. Slide the processor into the base unit using the guide rails for alignment.

3. Push until a click is heard.

Important:

It is critical that the processor is fully engaged and locked into place.

2-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

4. Make sure the actuator is pushed closed.

5. To remove the processor from the base unit, make sure base unit power is off.

Push the actuator to the open position until the processor is ejected slightly. Once the processor has been ejected, it can be removed from the base unit.

2-20

Installing Your Controller

Data Access Tool

1. Remove cover from processor.

2. Holding Data Access Tool (DAT) in the proper orientation (as shown), place DAT onto processor. Align DAT port on the processor with the plug on the DAT.

2-21

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

3. Firmly seat DAT on processor; make sure it seats into place.

4. To remove DAT, grasp using finger areas and pull upwards.

2-22

Installing Your Controller

Memory Module/Real-Time Clock

1. Remove the cover (or DAT if installed) from the processor as shown below.

!

ATTENTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the base and processor units. Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas.

2-23

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

2. Align connector on the memory module with the connector pins on the processor.

3. Firmly seat the memory module in the processor making sure the locking tabs click into place.

4. Replace the cover (or DAT if used).

2-24

Installing Your Controller

Compact I/O

Attach and Lock Module (Module-to-Controller or Module-to-Module)

A Compact I/O module can be attached to the controller or an adjacent I/O module before or after mounting to the panel or DIN rail. The module can be detached and replaced while the system is mounted to a panel or DIN rail.

!

ATTENTION: Remove power before removing or inserting an I/O module. When you remove or insert a module with power applied, an electrical arc may occur. An electrical arc can cause personal injury or property damage by:

• sending an erroneous signal to your system’s field devices, causing the controller to fault

• causing an explosion in a hazardous environment

Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector. Worn contacts may create electrical resistance, reducing product reliability.

!

ATTENTION: When attaching I/O modules, it is very important that they are securely locked together to ensure proper electrical connection.

2-25

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

3

4

1

2

6

1

To attach and lock modules:

5

Note:

Remove ESD barrier when attaching I/O modules to a MicroLogix 1500 base unit.

1. Disconnect power.

2. Check that the bus lever of the module to be installed is in the unlocked (fully right) position.

3. Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots (1) to secure the modules together (or to a controller).

4. Move the module back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the bus connectors (2) line up with each other.

5. Push the bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab (3). Use your fingers or a small screw driver.

6. To allow communication between the controller and module, move the bus lever fully to the left (4) until it clicks. Ensure it is locked firmly in place.

!

ATTENTION: When attaching I/O modules, it is very important that the bus connectors are securely locked together to ensure proper electrical connection.

7. Attach an end cap terminator (5) to the last module in the system by using the tongue-and-groove slots as before.

8. Lock the end cap bus terminator (6).

IMPORTANT: A 1769-ECR right end cap must be used to terminate the end of the serial communication bus.

See “Controller Dimensions” on page A-9 for mounting dimensions.

2-26

Wiring Your Controller

3

Wiring Your Controller

This chapter describes how to wire your controller. Topics include:

• wire requirements

• using surge suppressors

• grounding guidelines

• sinking and sourcing circuits

• wiring diagrams, input voltage ranges, and output voltage ranges

• minimizing noise

Wire Requirements

Solid

Stranded

Wire Type

Cu-90°C

(194°F)

Cu-90°C

(194°F)

!

Wire Size (2 wire maximum per terminal screw)

#14 to #22 AWG

#14 to #22 AWG

Wiring Torque

1.13 Nm (10 in-lb) rated

1.3 Nm (12 in-lb) maximum

ATTENTION: Be careful when stripping wires. Wire fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage. Once wiring is complete, be sure the base unit is free of all metal fragments before removing protective debris strips and installing the processor unit.

Failure to remove strips before operating can cause overheating.

3-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Wiring Recommendation

!

B

ATTENTION: Before you install and wire any device, disconnect power to the controller system.

!

ATTENTION: Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size. Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat, which can cause damage.

ATTENTION: United States Only: If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment, all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501-4

(b).

• Allow for at least 50 mm (2 in.) between I/O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller.

• Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring.

Where paths must cross, their intersection should be perpendicular.

Note:

Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit. Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths.

• Separate wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together.

• Separate input wiring from output wiring.

• Label wiring to all devices in the system. Use tape, shrink–tubing, or other dependable means for labeling purposes. In addition to labeling, use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics. For example, you may use blue for dc wiring and red for ac wiring.

3-2

Wiring Your Controller

When wiring without spade lugs, it is recommended to keep the finger-safe covers in place. Loosen the terminal screw and route the wires through the opening in the finger-safe cover. Tighten the terminal screw making sure the pressure plate secures the wire.

Finger-Safe Cover

Spade Lug Wiring

The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5.5 mm (0.220 in.). The input and output terminals of the MicroLogix 1500 base unit are designed to accept a 6.35mm

(0.25 in.) wide spade (standard for #6 screw for up to 14 AWG) or a 4 mm (metric #4) fork terminal.

When using spade lugs, use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to pry the finger-safe cover from the terminal blocks, then loosen the terminal screw.

Finger-Safe Cover

3-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using Surge Suppressors

Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output contacts. Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life expectancy of relay contacts. By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device, you will prolong the life of the output or relay contacts. You will also reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to that inductive device, and will reduce electrical noise from radiating into system wiring.

The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device. We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device.

VAC/DC

Out 0 ac or dc

Outputs

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

Out 4

Out 5

Out 6

Out 7

COM

+dc or L1

Suppression

Device dc COM or L2

If the outputs are dc, we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode for surge suppression, as shown in the illustration that follows.

+24V dc

Relay or Solid

State dc Outputs

VAC/DC

Out 0

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

Out 4

Out 5

Out 6

Out 7

COM

24V dc common

IN4004 Diode

3-4

Wiring Your Controller

Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices include a varistor, an RC network, or an Allen–Bradley surge suppressor, all shown below. These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient

characteristic of the particular inductive device. See the table on page 3-6 for

recommended suppressors.

Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices

Output Device

Output Device

Output Device

Surge

Suppressor

Varistor RC Network

If you connect an expansion I/O triac output to control an inductive load, we recommend that you use varistors to suppress noise. Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application. The suppressors we recommend for triac outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads are a Harris MOV, part number V175

LA10A, or an Allen–Bradley MOV, catalog number 599–K04 or 599–KA04. Consult the varistor manufacturer’s data sheet when selecting a varistor for your application

For inductive dc load devices, a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for

most applications. A surge suppressor can also be used. See the table on page 3-6 for

recommended suppressors.

As shown in the illustration below, these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device.

Surge Suppression for Inductive dc Load Devices

_

+

Output Device

Diode

(A surge suppressor can also be used.)

3-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Recommended Surge Suppressors

We recommend the Allen–Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with Allen–Bradley relays, contactors, and starters.

Device Coil Voltage

Bulletin 509 Motor Starter

Bulletin 509 Motor Starter

Bulletin 100 Contactor

Bulletin 100 Contactor

Bulletin 709 Motor Starter

Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

120V ac

240V ac

120V ac

240V ac

120V ac ac coil

12V dc

12V dc

24V dc

24V dc

48V dc

48V dc

115–125V dc

115–125V dc

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

230–250V dc

230–250V dc

700–N12

700–N15

Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay 150V max, ac or DC 700–N24

Miscellaneous electromagnetic devices limited to 35 sealed VA

150V max, ac or DC 700–N24

700–N22

700–N28

700–N10

700–N13

700–N16

700–N17

700–N11

700–N14

Suppressor Catalog

Number

599–K04

599–KA04

199–FSMA1

199–FSMA2

1401–N10

None Required

3-6

Wiring Your Controller

Grounding the Controller

In solid-state control systems, grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the base unit to the electrical panel’s ground bus prior to connecting any devices. Use AWG #14 wire. This connection must be made for safety purposes.

This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel. Refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional information. Additional grounding connections from the mounting tabs or DIN rail, if used, are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded. You must also provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your application.

Note:

For panel mounting installation: Be sure to use screws in the mounting positions where there are grounding stampings.

Grounding Stamping

Grounding Stamping

Note:

This symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immunity improvement. This connection must be made for safety purposes.

!

ATTENTION: Remove the protective debris strips before applying power to the controller. Failure to remove the strips may cause the controller to overheat.

3-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Wiring Diagrams

The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers. Controllers with dc inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing configuration. (Sinking and sourcing does not apply to ac inputs.)

Note:

This symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immunity improvement. This connection must be made for safety purposes.

Sinking and Sourcing Circuits

Any of the MicroLogix 1500 DC embedded input groups can be configured as sinking or sourcing depending on how the DC COM is wired on the group. See pages

3-10 through 3-13 for sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams.

Type

Sinking Input

Sourcing Input

Definition

The input energizes when high–level voltage is applied to the input terminal

(active high). Connect the power supply VDC (-) to the DC COM terminal.

The input energizes when low–level voltage is applied to the input terminal

(active low). Connect the power supply VDC (+) to the DC COM terminal.

!

ATTENTION: The 24V dc user power source should not be used to power output circuits. It should only be used to power input devices

(e.g. sensors, switches). See page 2-8 for information on MCR wiring

in output circuits.

3-8

1764-24AWA Wiring Diagram

1

Input Terminals

Wiring Your Controller

Output Terminals

1) “NOT USED” terminals are not intended for use as connection points.

3-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

1764-24BWA Sinking Wiring Diagram

Input Terminals

Output Terminals

3-10

1764-24BWA Sourcing Wiring Diagram

Input Terminals

Wiring Your Controller

Output Terminals

3-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

1764-28BXB Sinking Wiring Diagram

1

Input Terminals

Output Terminals

1)“NOT USED” terminals are not intended for use as connection points.

3-12

1764-28BXB Sourcing Wiring Diagram

1

Input Terminals

Wiring Your Controller

Output Terminals

1)“NOT USED” terminals are not intended for use as connection points.

3-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Controller I/O Wiring

Minimizing Electrical Noise

Because of the variety of applications and environments where controllers are installed and operating, it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by input filters. To help reduce the effects of environmental noise install the

MicroLogix 1500 system in a properly rated (i.e. NEMA) enclosure. Make sure that the MicroLogix 1500 system is properly grounded.

A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time. We recommend periodically checking system operation, particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the Micrologix 1500 system.

Transistor Output Transient Pulses

!

ATTENTION: A brief transient current pulse may flow through transistor outputs if the external supply voltage is suddenly applied at the V dc and V dc com terminals (e.g. via the master control relay).

It is a fast rate-of-change of voltage at the terminals that causes the pulse. This condition is inherent in transistor outputs and is common to solid state devices. The transient pulses may occur regardless of

whether the controller is powered or running. See chart on page 3-15.

The transient energy is dissipated in the load, and the pulse duration is longer for loads of high impedance (or low current). The graph below illustrates the relation between pulse duration and load current. Power-up transients do not exceed the times shown in the graph. For most applications the pulse energy is not sufficient to energize the load.

To reduce the possibility of inadvertent operation of devices connected to transistor outputs, adhere to the following guidelines:

• Either ensure that any programmable device connected to the transistor output is programmed to ignore all output signals until after the transient pulse has ended

(filtering),

• or add an external resistor in parallel to the load to increase the on-state load current. The duration of the transient pulse is reduced when the on-state load current is increased or the load impedance is decreased.

3-14

Wiring Your Controller

1.0

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

Transient Pulse Duration as a

Function of Load Current

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.0

1 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

On-State Load Current (mA)

800 900 1000

3-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

3-16

Connecting the System

4

Connecting the System

This chapter describes how to communicate to your control system. The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you are employing. This chapter also describes how the controller establishes communication with the appropriate network.

For information on:

DF1 protocol connections

DH485 network connections

See page:

4-3

4-8

Default Communication Configuration

The MicroLogix 1500 has the following default communication configuration. For

more information about communicating, see “Understanding the Communication

Protocols” on page D-1.

Table 4-1: DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters

Parameter

Baud Rate

Parity

Source ID (Node Address)

Control Line

Error Detection

Embedded Responses

Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect

ACK Timeout

NAK retries

ENQ retries

Stop Bits

Default

19.2K

none

1 no handshaking

CRC auto detect enabled

50 counts

3 retries

3 retries

1

4-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using the Communications Toggle Push Button

The Communications Toggle Push Button is located on the processor. You cannot access the button if the processor door or DAT is installed.

Use Communications Toggle Push Button to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back. The

Default Communications (DCOMM) LED operates to show when the controller is in

the default communications mode (settings shown on 4-1).

COMMS

DC INPUTS

24V SINK/SOURCE

DC/RELAY OUT

24V SOURCE

Note:

The Communications Toggle Push Button must be pressed and held for one second to activate.

4-2

Connecting the System

Connecting to the RS-232 Port

!

There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol: using a point-to-point connection, or using a modem. Descriptions of these methods follow.

ATTENTION: Chassis ground, internal 24V ground, and RS-232 ground are internally connected. You must connect the chassis ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any devices. It is important that you understand your personal computer’s grounding system before connecting to the controller. An optical isolator is recommended between the controller and your personal computer.

Making a DF1 Isolated Point-to-Point Connection

You can connect the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller to your personal computer using a serial cable from your personal computer’s serial port to the controller. The recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full-Duplex.

MicroLogix

Controller

Optical Isolator

(recommended)

1761-CBL-PM02

Personal Computer

4-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

We recommend using an Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+), catalog number

1761-NET-AIC, as your optical isolator. See page 4-13 for specific AIC+ cabling

information.

MicroLogix 1500

PC

1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02

24V dc

MicroLogix 1500 provides power to the AIC+ or an external power supply may be used.

1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00

Using a Modem

Personal

Computer

You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one MicroLogix 1500 controller (using DF1 Full-Duplex protocol) or to multiple controllers (using DF1

Half-Duplex protocol), as shown in the following illustration. Do not attempt to use

DH485 protocol through modems under any circumstance. (For information on types

of modems you can use with the micro controllers, see page D-8.)

Modem Cable

(straight-through)

Modem

MicroLogix

Controller

Protocol

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (to 1 controller)

DF1 Half-Duplex Master protocol (to multiple controllers which are using DF1 Half-Duplex Slave protocol)

Modem

Optical Isolator

(recommended)

We recommend using an AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as your optical

isolator. See page 4-13 for specific AIC+ cabling information.

4-4

Connecting the System

DF1 Isolated Modem Connection

MicroLogix 1500

1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02

User supplied modem cable

24V dc

MicroLogix 1500 provides power to the AIC+ or an external power supply may be used.

Modem

For additional information on connections using the AIC+, refer to the Advanced

Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual, publication 1761-6.4.

Constructing Your Own Modem Cable

If you construct your own modem cable, the maximum cable length is 15.24 m (50 ft) with a 25-pin or 9-pin connector. Refer to the following typical pinout for constructing a straight-through cable:

6

8

7

5

1

4

AIC+

Optical Isolator

9-Pin

3

2

TXD

RXD

GND

CD

DTR

DSR

CTS

RTS

Modem

TXD

RXD

GND

CD

DTR

DSR

CTS

RTS

25-Pin 9-Pin

2 3

3 2

7

8

20

6

5

4

6

8

7

5

1

4

4-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Constructing Your Own Null Modem Cable

If you construct your own null modem cable, the maximum cable length is 15.24 m

(50 ft) with a 25-pin or 9-pin connector. Refer to the following typical pinout:

4

6

5

1

Optical Isolator

9-Pin

3

2

TXD

RXD

8

7

CTS

RTS

GND

CD

DTR

DSR

DTR

DSR

CTS

RTS

TXD

RXD

GND

CD

Modem

25-Pin 9-Pin

2

3

3

2

7

8

5

1

20

6

5

4

8

7

4

6

4-6

Connecting to a DF1 Half-Duplex Network

Connecting the System

Note:

Use this diagram for DF1 Half-Duplex Master-Slave protocol without hardware handshaking.

Series B (or later) cables are required for hardware handshaking.



DB-9 RS-232 port



mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port

‘

RS-485 port

4-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Connecting to a DH485 Network

MicroLogix DH485 Network

MicroLogix 1500

PC

1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02

AIC+

3

2 connection from port 1 or port 2 to MicroLogix

1

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02

24V dc

(user supply needed if not connected to a controller)

PC to port 1 or port 2

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02

3

AIC+

2

1

24V dc

(user supplied)

1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00

DB-9 RS-232 port mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port

RS-485 port

Recommended Tools

To connect a DH485 network, you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable and terminators to the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter. We recommend the following equipment (or equivalent):

Table 4-2: Working with Cable for DH485 Network

Description Part Number

Shielded Twisted Pair Cable

Stripping Tool

1/8” Slotted Screwdriver

#3106A or #9842

45-164

Not Applicable

Manufacturer

Belden

Ideal Industries

Not Applicable

4-8

Connecting the System

DH485 Communication Cable

The suggested DH485 communication cable is either Belden #3106A or #9842. The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire.

One pair provides a balanced signal line, and one additional wire is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network. The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on network communication.

The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy-chained together. The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m (4000 ft).

When cutting cable segments, make them long enough to route them from one AIC+ to the next, with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector. Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable.

Use these instructions for wiring the Belden #3106A or #9842 cable. (If you are using standard Allen-Bradley cables, see the Cable Selection Guide on page 3-12.)

Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH485 Connector

Note:

A daisy-chained network is recommended. We do not recommend the following:

Belden #3106A or #9842

Belden #3106A or #9842

Belden #3106A or #9842

Connector

Connector

Incorrect

Connector

4-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Single Cable Connection

Orange with White Stripes

White with Orange Stripes

6 Termination

5 A

4 B

3 Common

Shrink Tubing Recommended Blue (#3106A)

Drain Wire or Blue with

2 Shield

1 Chassis Ground

White Stripes

(#9842)

Multiple Cable Connection

to Previous Device

to Next Device

Table 4-3: Connections using Belden #3106A Cable

For this Wire/Pair Connect this Wire

Shield/Drain Non-jacketed

Blue

White/Orange

Blue

White with Orange Stripe

Orange with White Stripe

To this Terminal

Terminal 2 - Shield

Terminal 3 - (Common)

Terminal 4 - (Data B)

Terminal 5 - (Data A)

Table 4-4: Connections using Belden #9842 Cable

For this Wire/Pair Connect this Wire

Shield/Drain

Blue/White

White/Orange

Non-jacketed

White with Blue Stripe

Blue with White Stripe

White with Orange Stripe

Orange with White Stripe

To this Terminal

Terminal 2 - Shield

Cut back - no connection

1

Terminal 3 - (Common)

Terminal 4 - (Data B)

Terminal 5 - (Data A)

1. To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable, cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the the insulation jacket is removed. This wire is not used by DH485.

4-10

Connecting the System

Grounding and Terminating the DH485 Network

Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together. This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable.

Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together. This connects the termination impedance (of 120

) that is built into each AIC+ as required by the DH485 specification.

End-of-Line Termination

Jumper

Jumper

Belden #3106A or #9842 Cable

1219 m (4000ft) Maximum

Jumper

4-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Connecting the AIC+

The AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, enables a MicroLogix 1500 to connect to a DH485 network. The AIC+ has two RS-232 ports and one isolated RS-485 port.

Typically, there is one AIC+ for each MicroLogix 1500. When two MicroLogix controllers are closely positioned, you can connect a controller to each of the RS-232 ports on the AIC+.

The AIC+ can also be used as an RS-232 isolator, providing an isolation barrier between the MicroLogix 1500 communications port and any equipment connected to it (i.e. personal computer, modem, etc.)

The following figure shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the

AIC+.

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter

(1761-NET-AIC)

4-12

Item

1

2

3

4

5

Description

Port 1 - DB-9 RS-232, DTE

Port 2 - mini-DIN 8 RS-232 DTE

Port 3 - RS-485 Phoenix plug

DC Power Source selector switch

(cable = port 2 power source, external = external power source connected to item 5)

Terminals for external 24V dc power supply and chassis ground

For additional information on connecting the AIC+, refer to the Advanced Interface

Converter (AIC+) User Manual, publication 1761-6.4.

Connecting the System

Cable Selection Guide

1747-CP3

1761-CBL-AC00

Cable Length

1747-CP3

1761-CBL-AC00

3m (9.8 ft)

45cm (17.7 in)

Connections from to

AIC+

SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processor, channel 0 port 1 yes

PC COM port port 1 yes

PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter

External

Power

Supply

Required

1

port 1 yes

DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro™

Port 1 on another AIC+ port 1 port 1 yes yes

Power

Selection

Switch Setting

external external external external external

1. External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch

2.

should be set to cable.

Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking.

2

1761-CBL-AS09

1761-CBL-AS03

Cable Length Connections from to

AIC+

External

Power

Supply

Required

1

port 3 yes 1761-CBL-AS03

1761-CBL-AS09

3m (9.8 ft)

9.5m (31.17 ft)

SLC 500 Fixed,

SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 processors

PanelView 550 RJ45 port port 3 yes

Power

Selection

Switch Setting

external external

1. External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

1

4-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

1761-CBL-HM02

1761-CBL-AM00

Cable

1761-CBL-AM00

1761-CBL-HM02

Length

45cm (17.7 in)

2m (6.5 ft)

Connections from

MicroLogix 1000 or 1500 to port 2 on another AIC+

to

AIC+

port 2 no port 2

External

Power

Supply

Required

1

yes

Power

Selection

Switch Setting

2

cable external

1. External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch

2.

should be set to cable.

Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking.

user supplied cable

Cable Length Connections from to

AIC+

port 1

External

Power

Supply

Required

1

yes

2

Power

Selection

Switch Setting

1

straight 9-25 pin — modem or other communication device external

2

1. External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

2.

Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking.

4-14

Connecting the System

1761-CBL-PM02

1761-CBL-AP00

Cable

1761-CBL-AP00

1761-CBL-PM02

Length

45cm (17.7 in)

2m (6.5 ft)

Connections from to

AIC+

External

Power

Supply

Required

1

SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, channel 0 port 2 yes

MicroLogix 1000 or 1500 port 1 yes

2

PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter port 2 yes

DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro

PC COM port port 2 port 2 yes yes

Power

Selection

Switch Setting

1

external external

2 external external external

1.

Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking.

2. External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

4-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

1761-CBL-PM02 Series B or later Cable

9

8

7

6

9-pin D-shell

3

2

5

4

1

1761-CBL-PM02 Series B (or equivalent) Cable Wiring Diagram

Controller

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

Programming

Device

9-Pin D-Shell

9 RI

8 CTS

RTS

DSR

GND

DTR

TXD

RXD

DCD

8-Pin Mini Din

24V 1

GND 2

RTS

RXD

DCD

CTS

TXD

GND

6

7

8

3

4

5

8-pin Mini Din

3

4

1 2

5

4-16

Connecting the System

Recommended User-Supplied Components

These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier.

Table 4-5: User Supplied Components

Component Recommended Model

external power supply and chassis ground power supply rated for 20.4-28.8V dc

NULL modem adapter straight 9-25 pin RS-232 cable standard AT see table below for port information if making own cables

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02

DB-9 RS-232 Port 1

RS-485 connector Port 3 cable straight D

Table 4-6: AIC+ Terminals

Pin Port 1: DB-9 RS-232

1 received line signal detector (DCD)

2 received data (RxD)

3 transmitted data (TxD)

4

DTE ready (DTR)

1

5 signal common (GND)

6

DCE ready (DSR)

2

7 request to send (RTS)

8 clear to send (CTS)

9 not applicable

Port 2

2

: (1761-CBL-PM02 cable)

same state as port 1’s DCD signal received data (RxD) transmitted data (TxD)

DTE ready (DTR)

3 signal common (GND)

DCE ready (DSR)

3 request to send (RTS) clear to send (CTS) not applicable

Port 3: RS-485 Connector

chassis ground cable shield signal ground

DH485 data B

DH485 data A termination not applicable not applicable not applicable

1.

On port 1, pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6. Whenever the AIC+ is powered on, pin 4 will match the state of pin 6.

2.

An 8-pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2. This connector is not commercially available. If you are making a cable to connect to port 2, you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen-Bradley cable shown

3.

above.

In the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable, pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB-9 connector.

4-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Safety Considerations

!

.

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or nonhazardous locations only.

ATTENTION: EXPLOSION HAZARD -

• AIC+ must be operated from an external power source.

• This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means.

See “Safety Considerations” on page 2-4 for additional information.

Installing and Attaching the AIC+

1. Take care when installing the AIC+ in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the MicroLogix 1500 controller to the AIC+ does not interfere with the enclosure door.

2. Carefully plug the terminal block into the RS-485 port on the AIC+ you are putting on the network. Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug.

3. Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block.

This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires.

Powering the AIC+

In normal operation with the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller connected to port 2 of the AIC+, the controller powers the AIC+. Any AIC+ not connected to a controller requires a 24V dc power supply. The AIC+ requires 120 mA at 24V dc.

If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC+, the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC+.

!

ATTENTION: If you use an external power supply, it must be 24V dc. Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wrong power source.

4-18

Connecting the System

Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting the power supply to the AIC+.

Bottom View

24VDC

DC

NEUT

CHS

GND

!

Power Options

ATTENTION: Always connect the CHS GND (chassis ground) terminal to the nearest earth ground. This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V dc supply is used.

!

Below are two options for powering the AIC+:

• Use the 24V dc user power supply built into the MicroLogix 1500 controller. The

AIC+ is powered through a hard-wired connection using a communication cable

(1761-CBL-HM02, or equivalent) connected to port 2.

• Use an external DC power supply with the following specifications:

™ operating voltage: 24V dc +20% / -15%

™ output current: 150 mA minimum

™ rated NEC Class 2

Make a hard-wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC+.

ATTENTION: If you use an external power supply, it must be 24V dc. Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wrong power source.

4-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

DeviceNet Communications

You can connect a MicroLogix 1500 to a DeviceNet network using the DeviceNet

Interface (DNI), catalog number 1761-NET-DNI. For additional information on using the DNI, refer to the DeviceNet Interface User Manual, publication 1761-6.5.

DeviceNet Node (Port 1)

(Replacement connector part no. 1761-RPL-0000)

V–

CAN_L

NET

SHIELD

CAN_H

V+

MOD

Use this write-on area to mark the

DeviceNet node address.

NODE

DANGER

TX/RX

GND

RS-232 (Port 2)

Cable Selection Guide

1761-CBL-HM02

1761-CBL-AM00

Cable

1761-CBL-AM00

1761-CBL-HM02

Length

45 cm (17.7 in)

2m (6.5 ft)

Connections from

MicroLogix 1000

MicroLogix 1500

to DNI

port 2 port 2

1761-CBL-PM02

1761-CBL-AP00

Cable

1761-CBL-AP00

1761-CBL-PM02

Length

45 cm (17.7 in)

2m (6.5 ft)

Connections from

SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, channel 0

PC COM port

to DNI

port 2 port 2

4-20

Using Inputs and Outputs

5

Using Inputs and Outputs

This section discusses the various aspects of Input and Output features of the

MicroLogix 1500 controller. The controller comes with a certain amount of

“embedded” I/O, which is physically located on the Base Unit. The controller also allows for adding Expansion I/O.

This section discusses the following I/O functions:

“Embedded I/O” on page 5-2

“Expansion I/O” on page 5-2

“I/O Configuration” on page 5-3

“I/O Forcing” on page 5-4

“Input Filtering” on page 5-5

“Latching Inputs” on page 5-6

5-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Embedded I/O

The MicroLogix 1500 provides discrete I/O that is built into the controller. These I/O points are referred to as Embedded I/O.

I/O Configuration

Controller

1764-24BWA

1764-24AWA

1764-28BXB

Quantity

12

12

16

Inputs

Type

24V dc

120V ac

24V dc

Quantity

12

12

12

Outputs

Type

relay relay

6 relay, 6 FET

DC embedded I/O can be configured for a number of special functions that can be used in your application. These are: selectable input filters, high speed counting, event interrupts, latching inputs, and high speed outputs (FET outputs only).

Expansion I/O

If the application requires more I/O than the controller provides, the user can attach up to eight additional I/O modules. Compact I/O (Bulletin 1769) is used to provide discrete inputs and outputs, analog inputs and outputs, and in the future, specialty modules. The number of Compact I/O that can be attached to the MicroLogix 1500 is dependent on the amount of current required by the I/O modules.

See “System Loading and Heat Dissipation” on page E-1 for more information on

valid configurations.

5-2

Using Inputs and Outputs

I/O Configuration

Embedded I/O

All embedded I/O is automatically configured to factory default settings and does not require setup. If you need to change the input filters for any DC input controller

(1764-24BWA, 1764-28BXB), open RSLogix 500:

1. Open the “Controller” folder.

2. Open the “I/O Configuration” folder.

3. Open slot 0 (MicroLogix 1500).

4. Select the “embedded I/O configuration” tab.

5. You can change the filter settings for any of the input groups and configure the latching inputs from this screen.

Expansion I/O

Expansion I/O must be configured for use with the MicroLogix 1500 controller.

Configuring expansion I/O can be done either manually, or automatically. Using

RSLogix 500:

1. Open the “Controller” folder.

2. Open the “I/O Configuration” folder.

3. For manual configuration, drag the Compact I/O module to the slot.

For automatic configuration, you must have the MicroLogix 1500 controller connected to the computer (either directly or over a network). Click the “Read I/O

Config” button on the I/O configuration screen. RSLogix 500 will read the existing configuration of the controllers I/O.

Some Compact I/O modules support or require configuration. To configure a specific module, double-click on the module, an I/O configuration screen will open that is specific to the module.

5-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

One of the advanced features of the MicroLogix 1500 controller is the ability to ignore a configuration error caused by an individual I/O module. This capability is configured in the programming software on an individual module (slot) basis in the

Advanced Configuration screen. If the user chooses to ignore a configuration error for a certain slot and that slot has a configuration error, the module will be ignored during input and output scanning.

I/O Forcing

I/O forcing is the ability to override the actual status of the I/O at the user’s discretion.

The MicroLogix 1500 and RSLogix 500 both support I/O forcing.

Input Forcing

Output Forcing

When an input is forced, the value in the input data file is set to a user-defined state.

For discrete inputs, you can force an input “on” or “off”. When an input is forced, it no longer reflects the state of the physical input. For embedded inputs, the controller reacts as if the force is applied to the physical input terminal.

Note:

When an input is forced in the controller, it has no effect on the input device connected to the controller.

When an output is forced, the controller overrides the status of the control program, and sets the output to the user-defined state. Discrete outputs can be forced “on” or

“off”. The value in the output file is unaffected by the force. It maintains the state determined by the logic in the control program. However, the state of the physical output will be set to the forced state.

Note:

If you force an output controlled by an executing PTO or PWM function, an instruction error is generated.

5-4

Using Inputs and Outputs

Input Filtering

The MicroLogix 1500 controller allows users to configure groups of inputs for highspeed or normal operation. Users can configure each input group’s filter response time. The filter response determines how long after the external input voltage reaches a valid “on” or “off” state to when the controller recognizes that change of state. The higher the value, the longer it takes for the input state to be recognized by the controller. Higher values provide more filtering, and are used in electrically noisy environments. Lower values provide less filtering, and are used to detect fast or narrow pulses. You typically set the filters to a lower value when using high speed counters and latching inputs.

Input filtering is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software. To configure the filters using RSLogix 500:

1. Open the “Controller” folder.

2. Open the “I/O Configuration” folder.

3. Open slot 0 (MicroLogix 1500)

4. Select the “embedded I/O configuration” tab.

The input groups are arranged. Simply select the filter time you require for each input group. You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of five input groups:

• 0 and 1

• 2 and 3

• 4 and 5

• 6 and 7

• 8 and above

The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting

can be found in the tables under “Specifications” in Appendix A.

5-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Latching Inputs

The MicroLogix 1500 controller provides the ability to individually configure inputs

0 to 7 to be pulse catching or latching inputs (hereafter referred to as latching inputs).

A latching input is an input that captures a very fast pulse, and holds it for a single controller scan. The pulse width that can be captured is dependent upon the input filtering selected for that input.

To enable this feature using RSLogix 500:

1. Open the “Controller” folder.

2. Open the “I/O Configuration” folder.

3. Open slot 0 (MicroLogix 1500).

4. Select the “embedded I/O configuration” tab.

5. Select the mask bits for the inputs that you want to operate as latching inputs.

6. Select the state for the latching inputs. The controller can detect both “on” (rising edge) and “off” (falling edge) pulses, depending upon the configuration selected in the programming software. Enter “1” for rising edge, or “0” for falling edge.

The following information is provided for a controller looking for an “on” pulse.

When an external signal is detected “on”, the controller “latches” this event. In general, at the next input scan following this event, the input image point is turned

“on” and remains “on” for the next controller scan. It is then set to “off” at the next input scan. The following figures help demonstrate this.

5-6

Using Inputs and Outputs

Rising Edge Behavior - Example 1

Scan Number (X)

Input

Scan

Scan Number (X+1)

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Scan Number (X+2)

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

External

Input

Latched

Status

Input File

Value

Rising Edge Behavior - Example 2

Scan Number (X)

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Scan Number (X+1) Scan Number (X+2)

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

External

Input

Latched

Status

Input File

Value

Note:

The “gray” area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay.

Important:

The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior. When configured for rising edge behavior, the input file value will normally be “off”

(“on” for 1 scan when a rising edge pulse is detected).

5-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The previous examples demonstrated rising edge behavior. Falling edge behavior operates exactly the same way with these exceptions:

• The detection is on the “falling edge” of the external input.

• The input image will normally be “on” (1), and changes to “off” (0) for one scan.

Falling Edge Behavior - Example 1

Scan Number (X) Scan Number (X+1) Scan Number (X+2) Scan Number (X+3)

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

External

Input

Latched

Status

Input File

Value

Falling Edge Behavior - Example 2

Scan Number (X) Scan Number (X+1) Scan Number (X+2)

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

Input

Scan

Ladder

Scan

Output

Scan

External

Input

Latched

Status

Input File

Value

Note:

The “gray” area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay.

Important:

The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior. When configured for falling edge behavior, the input file value will normally be “on”

(“off” for 1 scan when a falling edge pulse is detected).

5-8

Controller Memory and File Types

6

Controller Memory and File Types

This chapter describes controller memory and the types of files used by the

MicroLogix 1500 controller. The chapter is organized as follows:

“Controller Memory” on page 6-2

“Data Files” on page 6-5

“Protecting Data Files During Download” on page 6-6

“Password Protection” on page 6-9

“Clearing the Controller Memory” on page 6-10

“Allow Future Access Setting (OEM Lock)” on page 6-11

“Function Files” on page 6-12

6-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Controller Memory

File Structure

MicroLogix 1500 user memory is comprised of Data Files, Function Files, and

Program Files. Function Files are new and exclusive to the MicroLogix 1500 controller, and are not available in the MicroLogix 1000 or SLC controllers.

MicroLogix 1500

Memory

Data

Files

Function

Files

Program

Files

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

STI

7

8 - 255

B

T

C

R

N

Bit

Timer

Counter

Control

Integer

L Long Word

MG Message

PD PID

EII

HSC

PTO

PWM

BHI

MMI

DAT

TPI

RTC

CS0

IOS

6-2

Controller Memory and File Types

User Memory

User memory is the amount of storage available to a user for storing ladder logic, data table files, I/O configuration, etc., in the controller.

User data files consist of the system status file, I/O image files, and all other usercreatable data files (bit, timer, counter, control, integer, long word, MSG, and PID).

The user word is defined as a unit of memory consumption in the controller. The amount of memory available to the user for data files and program files is measured in user words. Memory consumption is allocated as follows:

For data files, a user word is the equivalent of 16 bits of a data file element. For example,

™

1 integer data file element = 1 user word

™

1 long word file element = 2 user words

™

1 timer data file element = 3 user words

For program files, a user word is the equivalent of a ladder instruction with one operand. For example,

™

1 XIC instruction, which has 1 operand, consumes 1 user word

™

1 EQU instruction, which has 2 operands, consumes 2 user words

™

1 ADD instruction, which has 3 operands, consumes 3 user words

6-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The controller supports over 7K of user words. Memory can be used in any combination of program files and data files as long as the total memory usage does not exceed 4K user data words as shown below.

User Memory

4.0K

Va lid

C om bin at io n

0.5K

0K

0K

Program Words

3.65K

4.35K

See “Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time” on page F-1 to find the

memory usage for specific instructions.

Note:

Although the controller allows up to 256 elements in a file, it may not actually be possible to create a file with that many elements due to the user memory size in the controller.

Note:

For each additional file created in a user program, the file consumes one user word of program space, plus the number of user words as determined by the file’s type and number of elements.

6-4

Controller Memory and File Types

Data Files

File Name

Output File

Input File

Status File

Bit File

Timer File

Counter File

Control File

Integer File

Long Word File

Message File

PID File

Data files contain status information associated with the controller, external I/O, and all other data associated with the instructions used in ladder subroutines. The data files can also be used to store look-up tables and “recipes”. Data files are organized by the type of information they contain. The data file types are:

File

Identifier

O

I

S

B

T

C

R

N

L

MG

PD

File

Number

0

1

2

3 to 255 default = 3

3 to 255 default = 4

3 to 255 default = 5

3 to 255 default = 6

3 to 255 default = 7

3 to 255

3 to 255

3 to 255

Words per

Element

1

1

1

1

3

3

3

1

2

25

23

File Description

The Output File stores the values that are written to the physical outputs during the Output Scan.

The Input File stores the values that are read from the physical inputs during the Input Scan.

The contents of the Status File are determined by the functions

which utilize the Status File. See “System Status File” on page

G-1 for a detailed description.

The Bit File is a general purpose file whose locations are referenced by ladder logic instructions.

The Timer File is used for maintaining timing information for

ladder logic timing instructions. See “Timer and Counter

Instructions” on page 13-1 for instruction information.

The Counter File is used for maintaining counting information

for ladder logic counting instructions. See “Timer and Counter

Instructions” on page 13-1 for instruction information.

The Control Data file is used for maintaining length and position information for various ladder logic instructions.

The Integer File is a general purpose file whose locations are referenced by ladder logic instructions.

The Long Word File is a general purpose file whose locations are referenced by ladder logic instructions.

The Message File is associated with the MSG instruction. See

“Communications Instructions” on page 25-1 for information on

the MSG instruction.

The PID File is associated with the PID instruction. See

“Process Control Instruction” on page 24-1 for more

information.

6-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Protecting Data Files During Download

Once a User Program is in the controller, there may be a need to update the ladder logic and download it to the controller without destroying the contents of one or more

Data Files in the controller. This situation can occur when an application needs to be updated, but the data that is relevant to the installation needs to remain intact.

This can be considered a form of file protection. The protection feature takes effect when:

• downloading a User Program via communications to the controller

• transferring a User Program from a Memory Module to the controller

Setting Download File Protection

Download File Protection can be applied to the following data file types:

• Output (O)

• Input (I)

• Binary (B)

• Timer (T)

• Counter (C)

• Control (R)

• Integer (N)

• Proportional Integral Derivative (PD)

• Message (MG)

• Long (L)

Note:

The data in the Status File cannot be protected.

6-6

Controller Memory and File Types

You can access the Download File Protect feature using your programming software.

For each file you want protected, check the Memory Module/Download protection box in the Data File Properties screen as shown below:

When a data file is Download File Protected, the values contained in it are preserved during a download/transfer to the controller, if certain requirements are met.

6-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

User Program Transfer Requirements

Download File Protection is in effect when the following conditions are met during a

User Program download or Memory Module transfer to the controller:

• The controller contains protected data files.

• The number of data files and executable files for the program currently in the controller matches that of the program being transferred to the controller.

• The file number, file type, and file size (number of elements) of the protected data for the program currently in the controller exactly match that of the program being transferred to the controller.

If all of the previous conditions are met, the controller will not write over any data file in the controller that is configured as Download Protected.

If any of the previous conditions are not met, the entire User Program is transferred to the controller. Additionally, if the program being transferred to the controller contains protected files, the Data Protection Lost indicator (S:36/10) is set to indicate that protected data has been lost. For example, a control program with protected files is transferred to the controller. The original program did not have protected files, or the files did not match. The data protection lost indicator (S:36/10) is then set. The data protection lost indicator represents that the protected files within the controller have default values, and the user application may need configuration/setup.

Note:

The controller will not clear the Data Protection Lost indicator. It is up to the user to clear this bit.

6-8

Controller Memory and File Types

Password Protection

MicroLogix controllers have a built-in security system, based on numeric passwords.

Controller passwords consist of up to 10 digits (0-9). Each controller program may contain two passwords, the Password and the Master Password.

Passwords restrict access to controllers. A Master Password essentially overrides the

Password. The idea is that all the controllers in a project would have different

Passwords, but the same Master Password, allowing access to all controllers for supervisory or maintenance purposes.

You can establish, change, or delete a password by using the Controller Properties dialog box. It is not necessary to use passwords, but if used, a master password is ignored unless a password is also used.

If the Memory Module User Program has the “Load Always” functionality enabled, and the controller User Program has a password specified, the controller will compare the passwords before transferring the User Program from the Memory Module to the controller. If the passwords do not match, the User Program is not transferred and the program mismatch bit is set (S:5/9).

6-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Clearing the Controller Memory

If you are locked out because you do not have the password for the controller, you can clear the controller memory and download a new User Program.

You can clear the memory when the programming software prompts you for a System or Master Password to go on-line with the controller. To do so:

1. Enter 65257636 (the telephone keypad equivalent of MLCLRMEM, MicroLogix

Clear Memory).

2. When the Programming Software detects this number has been entered, it asks if you want to clear the memory in the controller.

3. If you reply “yes” to this prompt, the programming software requests the controller to clear its User Program memory.

6-10

Controller Memory and File Types

Allow Future Access Setting (OEM Lock)

The controller supports a feature which allows you to select if future access to the

User Program should be allowed or disallowed after it has been transferred to the controller. The Allow Future Access setting is shown in the Controller Properties window. This setting corresponds to bit S:1/14 in the Status File where 0 means future access is allowed (Allow Future Access selected), and 1 means future access is disallowed (Allow Future Access deselected).

When deselected, the controller requires that the User Program in the controller is the same as the one in a programming device. If the programming device does not have a matching copy of the User Program, access to the User Program in the controller is denied.

Note:

Functions such as change mode, clear memory, restore program, and transfer memory module are allowed regardless of this selection.

This type of protection is particularly useful to an OEM (original equipment manufacturer) who develops an application and then distributes the application via a memory module or within a dedicated controller with the application installed in it.

6-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Function Files

Function Files are one of the three primary file structures within the MicroLogix 1500 controller (Program Files and Data Files are the others). Function Files were created to provide an efficient and logical interface to controller resources. Controller resources are resident (permanent) features such as the Real Time Clock and High

Speed Counter. The features are available to the control program through either instructions that are dedicated to a specific function file, or via standard instructions such as MOV and ADD. The Function File types are:

Table 6-1: Function Files

File Name File Identifier

HSC

High Speed

Counter

Pulse Train

Output

PTO

PWM

Pulse Width

Modulation

Selectable Timed

Interrupt

Event Input

Interrupt

Real Time Clock

STI

EII

RTC

Data Access Tool

Information

Trim Pot

Information

Memory Module

Information

Base Hardware

Information

Communications

Status File

I/O Status File

DAT

TPI

MMI

BHI

CS0

IOS

File Description

This file type is associated with the High Speed Counter Interrupt function. See page “Using the High Speed Counter” on page 9-1 for more information.

This file type is associated with the Pulse Train Output Instruction. See “PTO - Pulse Train

Output Instruction” on page 10-1 for more information.

This file type is associated with the Pulse Width Modulation instruction. See “Pulse Train

Output Function” on page 10-1 for more information.

This file type is associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function. See “Using the

Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information.

This file type is associated with the Event Input Interrupt instruction. See “Using the Event

Input Interrupt (EII) Function File” on page 23-19 for more information.

This file type is associated with the Real Time Clock (time of day) function. See“Real Time

Clock Operation” on page 8-1 for more information.

This file type contains information about the Data Access Terminal. See “DAT Function File” on page 7-6 for more information.

This file type contains information about the Trim Pots. See “Trim Pot Information Function

File” on page 7-2 for more information.

This file type contains information about the Memory Module. See “Memory Module

Information File” on page 8-5 for more information.

This file type contains information about the Base Unit hardware. See “Base Hardware

Information Function File” on page 6-13 for the file structure.

This file type contains information about the Communications with the controller. See

“Communications Status File” on page 6-13 for the file structure.

This file type contains information about the controller I/O. See “Input/Output Status File” on page 6-17 for the file structure.

6-12

Controller Memory and File Types

Base Hardware Information Function File

The base hardware information file is a read-only file. It contains a description of the

MicroLogix 1500 Base Unit.

Table 6-2: Base Hardware Information Function File (BHI)

Address

BHI:0.CN

BHI:0.SRS

BHI:0.REV

BHI:0.FT

Description

CN - Catalog Number

SRS - Series

REV - Revision

FT - Functionality Type

Communications Status File

The communications status file is a read-only file in the controller that contains information on how the controller communication parameters are configured, and status information on communications activity.

Note:

You can use the Communications Status File information as a troubleshooting tool for communications issues.

The data file is structured as:

Table 6-3: Communications Status File

Word

0 to 5

6 to 22

23 to 42

43

Description

General Channel Status Block

DLL Diagnostic Counters Block

DLL Active Node Table Block

End of List Category Identifier Code (always 0)

6-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table 6-4: Channel 0 General Channel Status Block

Word

0

1

2

3

4

5

Bit

-

-

-

-

0

Description

Communications Channel General Status Information Category Identifier Code

(always 1)

Length (always 8)

Format Code (always 0)

Communications Configuration Error Code

ICP – Incoming Command Pending Bit

This bit is set (1) when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller. Once the request has been satisfied, the bit is cleared (0).

1

2

3

4

MRP – Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit

This bit is set (1) when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this controller. When the appropriate MSG instruction is serviced (during end-of-scan, SVC, or REF), this bit is cleared (0).

MCP – Outgoing Message Command Pending Bit

This bit is set (1) when the controller has one or more MSG instructions enabled and in the communication queue. This bit is cleared (0) when the queue is empty.

SSB – Selection Status Bit

This bit indicates that the controller is in the System Mode. It is always set.

CAB – Communications Active Bit

This bit is set (1) when at least one other device is on the DH485 network. If no other devices are on the network, this bit is cleared (0).

5 to 13 Reserved

14 Reserved for MLB – Modem Lost Bit

15 Reserved

0 to 7 Node Address - This byte value contains the node address of your controller on the network.

8 to 15 Baud Rate - This byte value contains the baud rate of the controller on the network.

6-14

Controller Memory and File Types

Table 6-5: DH485 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block

Word

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14 to 22

Bit Description

-

-

-

-

-

DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2)

Length (always 30)

Format Code (always 0)

Total Message Packets Received

Total Message Packets Sent

0 to 7 Message Packet Retries

8 to 15 Retry Limit Exceeded (Non-Delivery)

0 to 7 NAK – No Memories Sent

8 to 15 NAK – No Memories Received

0 to 7 Total Bad Message Packets Received

8 to 15 Reserved

Reserved

18

19

20

21

22

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Table 6-6: DF1 Full-Duplex DLL Diagnostic Counters Block

Word

6

7

8

9

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

0

1

Bit Description

-

DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2)

Length (always 30)

Format Code (always 1)

CTS

RTS

2 to 15 Reserved for Modem Control Line States

Total Message Packets Sent

Total Message Packets Received

Undelivered Message Packets

ENQuiry Packets Sent

NAK Packets Received

ENQuiry Packets Received

Bad Message Packets Received and NAKed

No Buffer Space and Naked

Duplicate Message Packets Received

Reserved

Reserved for DCD Recover Field

Reserved for Lost Modem Field

Reserved

6-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

17

18

19

20

21

22

13

14

15

16

10

11

12

Table 6-7: DF1 Half-Duplex Slave DLL Diagnostic Counters Block

Word

6

7

8

9

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Bit Description

DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code (always 2)

-

Length (always 30)

Format Code (always 2)

0

1

Reserved for Modem Control Line States

RTS

2 to 15 CTS

Total Message Packets Sent

Total Message Packets Received

Undelivered Message Packets

Message Packets Retried

NAK Packets Received

Polls Received

Bad Message Packets Received

No Buffer Space

Duplicate Message Packets Received

Reserved

Reserved for DCD Recover Field

Reserved for Lost Modem Field

Reserved

Table 6-8: Active Node Table Block

Word Bit Description

23 DLL Active Node Table Category Identifier Code (always 3)

24

25

26

-

Length (always 13)

Format Code (always 0)

27

Number of Nodes (always 32 for DH485, always 0 for DF1 Full-Duplex and Half-

Duplex Slave)

Active Node Table – Nodes 0 to 15 (CS0:27/1 is node 1, CS0:27/2 is node 2, etc.) This is a bit-mapped register that displays the status of each node on the network. If a bit is set (1), the corresponding node is active on the network. If a bit is clear (0), the corresponding node is inactive.

28 Active Node Table – Nodes 15 to 31 (CS0:28/1 is node 15, CS0:28/2 is node 16, etc.)

This is a bit-mapped register that displays the status of each node on the network. If a bit is set (1), the corresponding node is active on the network. If a bit is clear (0), the corresponding node is inactive.

29 to 42 Reserved for Active Node Table – Nodes 32 - 255

6-16

Controller Memory and File Types

Input/Output Status File

The input/output status file is a read-only file in the controller that contains information on the status of the embedded and local expansion I/O. The data file is structured as:

Table 6-9: I/O Status File

Word Description

0 Embedded Module Error Code – Always zero

1-8 Expansion Module Error Code – The word number corresponds to the module’s slot number. Refer to the I/O module’s documentation for more information.

6-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

6-18

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

7

Using Trim Pots and the

Data Access Tool (DAT)

Trim Pot Operation

The processor has two trimming potentiometers (trim pots) which allow modification of data within the controller. Adjustments to the trim pots change the value in the corresponding Trim Pot Information (TPI) register. The data value of each trim pot can be used throughout the control program as timer, counter, or analog presets depending upon the requirements of the application.

The trim pots are located below the mode switch under the left access door of the processor.

Trim Pot 0

Trim Pot 1

RUN

REM

PROG

7-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Use a small flathead screwdriver to turn the trim pots. Adjusting their value causes data to change within a range of 0 to 250 (fully clockwise). The maximum rotation of each trim pot is three-quarters, as shown below. Trim pot stability over time and temperature is typically ±2 counts.

Minimum

(fully counterclockwise)

Maximum

(fully clockwise)

Trim pot file data is updated continuously whenever the controller is under power.

Trim Pot Information Function File

The composition of the Trim Pot Information (TPI) Function File is described below.

Data Address Data Format Range Type

User Program

Access

TPD Data O

TPD Data 1

TPI:0.POT0

TPI:0.POT1

TPD Error Code TPI:0.ER

Word (16-bit integer)

Word (16-bit integer)

Word (bits 0-7)

Word (bits 8-15)

0 - 250 Status Read Only

0 - 250 Status Read Only

0 - 3 Status Read Only

The data resident in TPI:0.POT0 represents the position of trim pot 0. The data resident in TPI:0.POT1 corresponds to the position of trim pot 1. The valid data range for both is from 0 (counterclockwise) to 250 (clockwise).

Error Conditions

If the controller detects a problem with either trim pot, the last values read remain in the data location, and an error code is put in the error code byte of the TPI file for whichever trim pot had the problem. Once the controller can access the trim pot hardware, the error code is cleared. The error codes are described in the table below.

Error Code

0

1

2

3

Description

Trim pot data is valid.

Trim pot subsystem detected, but data is invalid.

Trim pot subsystem did not initialize.

Trim pot subsystem failure.

7-2

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

Data Access Tool (DAT)

The DAT is a convenient and simple tool that provides an interface for editing and monitoring data. The DAT has five primary features:

• Direct access to 48 bit elements

• Direct access to 48 integer elements

• Two function keys

• Display of controller faults

• Removal/Insertion under power

DAT Keypad and Indicator Light Functions

The DAT has a digital display, 6 keys, an up/down key, and indicator lights. Their

functions are described in the table on page 7-4.

PROTECTED

F1

BIT

F2

INT

ESC

ENTER

7-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Feature Function

Digital Display Displays address elements and data values, faults and errors.

Up/Down Key

F1 Key and

Indicator Light

Scroll to select element numbers and change data values. The up/down key repeats when held.

Controls the F1 function key status bit. When the F1 key status bit is pressed or latched, the F1 indicator LED is lit.

F2 Key and

Indicator Light

ESC Key

BIT Key and

Indicator Light

INT Key and

Indicator Light

ENTER Key

PROTECTED

Indicator Light

Controls the F2 function key status bit. When the F2 key status bit is pressed or latched, the F2 indicator LED is lit.

Cancels an edit in progress.

Pressing the BIT key puts the DAT in bit monitoring mode. The bit indicator light is on when the DAT is in bit monitoring mode.

Pressing the INT key puts the DAT in integer monitoring mode. The integer indicator light is on when the DAT is in integer monitoring mode.

Press to select the flashing element number or data value.

Indicates protected data that cannot be changed using the DAT.

Note:

The F1, F2, ESC, BIT, INT, and ENTER keys do not repeat when held.

Holding down any one of these keys results in only one key press. The

Up/Down arrow key is the only key that repeats when held.

7-4

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

Power-Up Operation

The DAT receives power when it is plugged into the controller. Upon power-up, the

DAT performs a self-test.

If the test fails, the DAT displays an error code. All indicator lights are deactivated,

and the DAT does not respond to any key presses. See “DAT Error Codes” on page 7-

16.

PROTECTED

F1

BIT

F2

INT

ESC

ENTER

After a successful self-test, the DAT reads the DAT function file to determine its configuration.

Following a successful power-up sequence, the DAT enters the bit monitoring mode.

0 0

F1

BIT

PROTECTED

o f f

-

0

F2 ESC

INT ENTER

7-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

DAT Function File

DAT configuration is stored in the processor in a specialized configuration file called the DAT Function File. The DAT Function File, which is part of the user’s control program, is shown below.

The DAT function file contains the Target Integer File, the Target Bit File, and the

Power Save Timeout parameter. These three parameters are described in the table below.

Feature

Target Integer File

Target Bit File

Power Save Timeout

Address Data Format Type

DAT:0.TIF

Word (int) Control

DAT:0.TBF

Word (int) Control

DAT:0.PST

Word (int) Control

User Program Access

Read Only

Read Only

Read Only

Target Integer File (TIF)

The DAT can read or write to any valid integer file within the controller. The value stored in the TIF location identifies the integer file with which the DAT will interface.

Valid integer files are N3 through N255. When the DAT reads a valid integer file number, it can access the first 48 elements (0-47) of the specified file on its display screen. The next 48 bits (words 48-50) are used to define the read only or read/write privileges for the 48 elements.

7-6

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

The only integer file that DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TIF location.

The TIF location can only be changed by a program download.

Important:

Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify in the TIF location, as well as the appropriate number of elements, exist in the MicroLogix 1500 user program.

The example table below shows a DAT configured to use integer file number 50

(DAT:0.TIF = 50).

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

Element

Number

0

1

4

5

2

3

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

Data Address

N50:8

N50:9

N50:10

N50:11

N50:12

N50:13

N50:14

N50:15

N50:0

N50:1

N50:2

N50:3

N50:4

N50:5

N50:6

N50:7

N50:16

N50:17

N50:18

N50:19

N50:20

N50:21

N50:22

N50:23

Protection Bit

N50:48/0

N50:48/1

N50:48/2

N50:48/3

N50:48/4

N50:48/5

N50:48/6

N50:48/7

N50:48/8

N50:48/9

N50:48/10

N50:48/11

N50:48/12

N50:48/13

N50:48/14

N50:48/15

N50:49/0

N50:49/1

N50:49/2

N50:49/3

N50:49/4

N50:49/5

N50:49/6

N50:49/7

N50:32

N50:33

N50:34

N50:35

N50:36

N50:37

N50:38

N50:39

N50:24

N50:25

N50:26

N50:27

N50:28

N50:29

N50:30

N50:31

N50:40

N50:41

N50:42

N50:43

N50:44

N50:45

N50:46

N50:47

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33

Element

Number

24

25

26

27

28

29

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

46

47

Data Address Protection Bit

N50:49/8

N50:49/9

N50:49/10

N50:49/11

N50:49/12

N50:49/13

N50:49/14

N50:49/15

N50:50/0

N50:50/1

N50:50/2

N50:50/3

N50:50/4

N50:50/5

N50:50/6

N50:50/7

N50:50/8

N50:50/9

N50:50/10

N50:50/11

N50:50/12

N50:50/13

N50:50/14

N50:50/15

7-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The element number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data register as illustrated in the table. The protection bit defines whether the data is read/write or read only. When the protection bit is set (1), the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT. The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display. When the protection bit is clear (0) or the protection bit does not exist, the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad.

Important:

Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad, the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data. Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file. It is entirely the user’s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten.

Note:

• Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions (addresses N50:51 and above, in this example).

• The DAT always starts at word 0 of a data file. It cannot start at any other address within the file.

Target Bit File (TBF)

The DAT can read or write to any valid bit file within the controller. The value stored in the TBF location identifies the bit file with which the DAT will interface. Valid bit files are B3 through B255. When the DAT reads a valid bit file number, it can access the first 48 elements (0-47) of the specified file on its display screen. The next 48 bits

(48-95) are used to define the read only or read/write privileges for the first 48 elements.

The only bit file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TBF location.

The TBF location can only be changed by a program download.

Important:

Use your programming software to ensure that the bit file you specify in the TBF location, as well as the appropriate number of elements, exist in the MicroLogix 1500 user program.

7-8

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

The example table below shows how the DAT uses the configuration information with bit file number 51 (DAT:0.TBF=51).

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

Element

Number

0

1

4

5

2

3

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

Data Address

B51/8

B51/9

B51/10

B51/11

B51/12

B51/13

B51/14

B51/15

B51/0

B51/1

B51/2

B51/3

B51/4

B51/5

B51/6

B51/7

B51/16

B51/17

B51/18

B51/19

B51/20

B51/21

B51/22

B51/23

Protection Bit

B51/56

B51/57

B51/58

B51/59

B51/60

B51/61

B51/62

B51/63

B51/48

B51/49

B51/50

B51/51

B51/52

B51/53

B51/54

B51/55

B51/64

B51/65

B51/66

B51/67

B51/68

B51/69

B51/70

B51/71

B51/32

B51/33

B51/34

B51/35

B51/36

B51/37

B51/38

B51/39

B51/24

B51/25

B51/26

B51/27

B51/28

B51/29

B51/30

B51/31

B51/40

B51/41

B51/42

B51/43

B51/44

B51/45

B51/46

B51/47

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33

Element

Number

24

25

26

27

28

29

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

46

47

Data Address Protection Bit

B51/80

B51/81

B51/82

B51/83

B51/84

B51/85

B51/86

B51/87

B51/72

B51/73

B51/74

B51/75

B51/76

B51/77

B51/78

B51/79

B51/88

B51/89

B51/90

B51/91

B51/92

B51/93

B51/94

B51/95

7-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The element number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data bit as illustrated in the table. The protection bit defines whether the data is editable or read only. When the protection bit is set (1), the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT. The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display. When the protection bit is clear (0) or the protection bit does not exist, the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad.

Important:

Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad, the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data. Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target bit file. It is entirely the user’s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten.

Note:

• Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions (addresses B51/96 and above, in this example).

• The DAT always starts at bit 0 of a data file. It cannot start at any other address within the file.

Power Save Timeout (PST) Parameter

The power save timeout turns off the DAT display after keypad activity has stopped for a user-defined period of time.

1

The power-save (DAT:0.PST) value is set in the

DAT Function File. The valid range is 0 to 255 minutes. The power-save feature can be disabled by setting the PST value to 0, which keeps the display on continuously.

The default value is 0.

In power-save mode, a dash flashes in the left of the display. Press any key, except F1 or F2, to return the DAT to its previous mode. If F1 or F2 is pressed, the DAT will change the value of the F1 or F2 status bits, but the display remains in power-save mode.

1.

F1 and F2 keys do not apply.

7-10

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

Understanding the DAT Display

When the DAT enters either the integer or bit mode, the element number and a data value are displayed, as shown below.

Integer Mode Display Bit Mode Display

PROTECTED

1 2

-

3 2 7 6 8

F1 F2 ESC

BIT INT ENTER

0 0

F1

BIT

PROTECTED

o f f

-

0

F2 ESC

INT ENTER

integer element number

• 0 to 47 integer data

• -32,768 to 32,767

• – – – (undefined) bit element number

• 0 to 47 bit data

• OFF - 0

• ON - 1

• – – – (undefined)

If the element is defined and is not protected, the element number flashes, indicating that it can be modified.

If the element is protected, the PROTECTED indicator light illuminates, and the element number does not flash, indicating that the element cannot be modified.

If the element is undefined, the data field displays three dashes. The element number does not flash because the element cannot be modified.

0 5

F1

BIT INT

F2

PROTECTED

- -

ESC

ENTER

7-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Entering Integer Monitoring Mode

Integer monitoring mode allows you to view and modify 16-bit integer data locations in the controller. To initiate integer monitoring mode, press the INT key. If the integer monitoring mode was previously invoked, the DAT displays the last integer element monitored. If the integer monitoring mode was not previously invoked, the DAT displays the first element of the list. However, there may be a brief delay while the

DAT requests information from the controller. If there is a delay, the working screen is

displayed. See “Working Screen Operation” on page 7-14.

Entering Bit Monitoring Mode

Bit monitoring allows you to view and modify bit locations in the controller. The DAT enters the bit monitoring mode automatically following a successful power-up. The bit monitoring mode can also be selected by pressing the BIT key. If the bit monitoring mode was previously invoked, the DAT displays the last bit element monitored. If the bit monitoring mode was not previously invoked, the DAT displays the first element of the list. However, there may be a brief delay while the DAT requests information from the controller. During the delay, the working screen will

display. See “Working Screen Operation” on page 7-14.

Monitoring and Editing

1. Press the INT or BIT key to enter the desired mode. The element number flashes

(if not protected).

2. Use the up/down key to scroll through the list of elements.

3. Press ENTER to select the element you want to edit. The element number becomes steady and the data flashes if it is not protected.

Note:

If the element is protected, the enter key is ignored.

4. Use the up/down key to change the data. Bit values toggle between “ON” and

“OFF”. Integer values increment or decrement. Holding down the up/down key causes the integer value to increment or decrement quickly.

Note:

If the data is protected or undefined, pressing the up/down key scrolls to the next element in the list.

5. Press ENTER to accept the new data. Press ESC or INT/BIT to discard the new data.

7-12

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

F1 and F2 Functions

The function keys, F1 and F2, correspond to bits and can be used throughout the control program as desired. They have no effect on bit or integer monitoring.

Each key has two corresponding bits in the DAT function file. The bits within the

DAT function file are shown in the table below.

Key

F1 Key

F2 Key

Bits Address

Pressed DAT:0/F1P

Latched DAT:0/F1L

Pressed DAT:0/F2P

Latched DAT:0/F2L

Data Format

Binary

Binary

Binary

Binary

Type

Status

Status

Status

Status

User Program Access

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

F1 or F2 Key Pressed

The pressed bits (DAT:0/F1P and DAT:0/F2P) function as push-buttons and provide current state of either the F1 or F2 key on the keypad. When the F1 or F2 key is pressed, the DAT sets (1) the corresponding pressed key bit. When the F1 or F2 key is not pressed, the DAT clears (0) the corresponding pressed key bit.

F1 or F2 Key Latched

The latched bits (DAT:0/F1L and DAT:0/F2L) function as latched push-buttons and provide latched/toggle key functionality. When the F1 or F2 key is pressed, the DAT sets (1) the corresponding latched key bit within the DAT Function File. When the F1 or F2 key is pressed a second time, the DAT clears (0) the corresponding latched key bit.

7-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Working Screen Operation

Because the DAT is a communications device, its performance is affected by the scan time of the controller. Occasionally, when there is a long scan time and the DAT is waiting for information from the controller, the working screen is displayed. The working screen consists of three dashes that move across the display from left to right.

While the working screen is displayed, key presses will not be recognized. Once the

DAT receives the data, it returns to its normal mode of operation.

You can minimize the effect of the working screen by adding an SVC instruction to

the control program. See “Service Communications (SVC)” on page 25-24.

Non-Existent Elements

When the DAT determines that an element number does not exist in the controller, the element value displays as three dashes. If the protection bit for an element is undefined, the DAT will assume that the element is unprotected.

Controller Faults

The DAT checks for controller faults every 10 seconds. When the DAT detects a controller fault, the display shows “FL” in the element number field and the value of the controller’s major fault word (S2:6) is displayed in the value field, as shown below.

Note:

PROTECTED

f l

0 0 0

F1 F2 ESC

BIT INT ENTER

If an element value is being modified when the fault is detected, the fault is stored until the modification is accepted or discarded. Then, the fault will be displayed.

7-14

Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool (DAT)

Pressing ESC while the fault is being displayed returns the DAT to its previous mode.

The fault is not removed from the controller, just from the DAT display screen. The fault that was on screen will not display again and cannot be “recalled”. If a new fault is detected, it will be displayed. If the initial fault is cleared and returns at a later time, the DAT will display the fault at that time.

Error Conditions

When the DAT detects an error in its own operation, it displays the error screen. The error screen consists of “Err” and a two-digit error code, as shown below.

PROTECTED

F1

BIT

F2

INT

ESC

ENTER

The DAT can experience two different types of errors, internal errors and communication errors. They are described in the following sections.

Internal DAT Errors

Internal DAT errors are non-recoverable. When the DAT experiences an internal error, it displays the error screen, and the tool will not respond to any key presses. Remove and re-install the DAT. If this does not clear the error, the DAT must be replaced.

Communication Errors

If the DAT experiences a communication error, the error message screen displays.

During these error conditions, the tool will respond to the up/down arrow key, the bit and integer keys, and the ESC key. Pressing any of those keys clears the error message. Any on-going element modifications are discarded.

7-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The DAT continually monitors the interface between the DAT and the controller to ensure a good communication path. If the DAT loses communication with the controller for more than three seconds, it generates an interface time-out error. The

DAT continues to attempt to re-establish communications. The error screen displays until the DAT regains communications with the processor. All key presses are ignored until the display clears.

DAT Error Codes

Error Code

00

01-02

03 - 07

08

09

31-34

Description

Interface time-out

Power-up test failure internal error processor owned access denied internal error

1

Communication traffic

Internal failure

Internal failure

Caused by Recommended Action

Add SVC instructions to ladder program

Remove and re-insert the DAT. If failure persists, replace the unit.

Remove and re-insert the DAT. If failure persists, replace the unit.

Release ownership by the other device Another device has ownership of the controller

Cannot access that file because another device has ownership

Internal failure

Release file ownership by the other device

Remove and re-insert the DAT. If failure persists, replace the unit.

1.

This error can occur after a download in which communications configurations are changed. This error can be cleared by removing and re-installing the DAT, or by cycling power to the controller.

7-16

Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules

8

Using Real Time Clock and Memory

Modules

Three modules with different levels of functionality are available for use with the

MicroLogix 1500 controller.

Catalog Number

1764-RTC

1764-MM1

1764-MM1RTC

Function

Real Time Clock

Memory Module

Memory Module and Real Time Clock

Real Time Clock Operation

Removal/Insertion Under Power

At power-up or on detection of a real time clock being inserted, the controller determines if a real time clock module is present. If a real time clock is present, its values are written to the RTC Function File in the controller.

The real time clock module can be installed or removed at any time without risk of damage to either the module or the controller. If a module is installed while the

MicroLogix 1500 is executing, the module will not be recognized until either a power cycle occurs, or until the controller is placed in a non-executing mode (program mode or fault condition).

Removal of the memory module is detected within one program scan. Removal of the real time clock under power causes the controller to write zeros to the (RTC) Function

File.

8-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Real Time Clock Function File

The real time clock provides year, month, day of month, day of week, hour, minute, and second information to the Real Time Clock (RTC) Function File in the controller.

The programming screen is shown below:

The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below.

Feature

YR - RTC Year

MON - RTC Month

DAY - RTC Day of Month

HR - RTC Hours

MIN - RTC Minutes

SEC - RTC Seconds

DOW - RTC Day of Week

DS - Disabled

BL - RTC Battery Low

Address

RTC:0.YR

RTC:0.MON

RTC:0.DAY

RTC:0.HR

RTC:0.MIN

RTC:0.SEC

RTC:0.DOW

RTC:0/DS

RTC:0/BL

Data Format

word word word word word word word binary binary

Range

1998 to 2097

1 to 12

1 to 31

0 to 23 (military time)

0 to 59

0 to 59

0 to 6 (Sunday to Saturday)

0 or 1

0 or 1

Type

status status status status status status status control status

User Program

Access

read only read only read only read only read only read only read only read/write read only

8-2

Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules

Writing Data to the Real Time Clock

When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device, the new values take effect immediately.

The real time clock does not allow you to write invalid date or time data.

Use the Disable Clock button in your programming device to disable the real time clock before storing a module. This will decrease the drain on the battery during storage.

RTC Battery Operation

The real time clock has an internal battery that is not replaceable. The RTC Function

File features a battery low indicator bit (RTC:0/BL), which shows the status of the

RTC battery. When the battery is low, the indicator bit is set (1). This means that the battery will fail in less than 14 days, and the real time clock module needs to be replaced. When the battery low indicator bit is clear (0), the battery level is acceptable, or a real time clock is not attached.

!

ATTENTION: Operating with a low battery indication for more than

14 days may result in invalid RTC data.

8-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Memory Module Operation

More than just user back-up, the memory module supports the following features:

• User Program and Data Back-up

• Program Compare

• Data File Protection

• Memory Module Write Protection

• Removal/Insertion Under Power

User Program and Data Back-up

The memory module provides a simple and flexible program/data transport mechanism, allowing the user to update the program in the controller without the use of a personal computer and programming software.

During transfers of a program to or from a memory module, the controller’s RUN

LED flashes.

Program Compare

The memory module also provides program security, allowing you to specify that if the program stored in the memory module does not match the program in the controller, the controller will not be able to enter an executing (run or test) mode. To

enable this feature, set the S:2/9 bit in the system status file. See “Memory Module

Program Compare” on page G-10 for more information.

Data File Protection

The memory module features the capability to specify which data files in the controller are protected from the download procedure.

Note:

File protection is only functional if the processor does not have a memory fault, and if the data file structure of the memory module

matches the data file structure within the controller. See“Protecting Data

Files During Download” on page 6-6.

8-4

Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules

Memory Module Write Protection

The memory module supports write-once, read-many behavior. Write protection is enabled using your programming software.

Important:

Once set, write protection cannot be removed. If a change needs to be made to the control program stored in the memory module, the same memory module cannot be re-used.

Removal/Insertion Under Power

The memory module can be installed or removed at any time without risk of damage to either the memory module or the controller. If a memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1500 is executing, the memory module will not be recognized until either a power cycle occurs, or until the controller is placed in a non-executing mode

(program mode or fault condition).

Removal of the memory module is detected within one program scan.

Memory Module Information File

The controller has a Memory Module Information (MMI) File which is updated with data from the attached memory module. At power-up or on detection of a memory module being inserted, the catalog number, series, revision, and type (memory module and/or real time clock) are identified and written to the MMI file in the user program. If a memory module and/or real time clock is not attached, zeros are written to the MMI file.

The memory module function file programming screen is shown below:

8-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below.

Feature Address

FT - Functionality Type

MP - Module Present

WP - Write Protect

FO - Fault Override

MMI:0.FT

MMI:0/MP

MMI:0/WP

MMI:0/FO

LPC - Program Compare MMI:0/LPC

LE - Load On Error MMI:0/LE

LA - Load Always

MB - Mode Behavior

MMI:0/LA

MMI:0/MB

Data Format

word (INT) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit)

Functionality Type

This bit identifies the type of memory module installed:

• 1 = 1764-MM1 Memory Module

• 2 = 1764-RTC Real Time Clock

• 3 = 1764-MM1RTC Memory Module and Real Time Clock

Type

status status control control control control control control

User Program

Access

read only read only read only read only read only read only read only read only

8-6

Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules

Module Present (MP)

The MP (Module Present) bit can be used throughout the user program to determine when a memory module is present on the processor. This bit is updated once per scan, provided the memory module is first recognized by the processor. To be recognized by the processor, the memory module must be installed on the processor prior to power-up or when it is in a non-executing mode. If a memory module is installed when the processor is in an executing mode, it is not recognized. If the memory module is removed during an executing mode, this bit will be cleared (0) at the end of the next ladder scan.

Write Protect (WP)

When the WP (Write Protect) bit is set (1), the module is write-protected and the user program and data within the memory module cannot be overwritten. When the WP bit is cleared (0), the module is read/write.

Fault Override

The FO (Fault Override) bit shows the status of the fault override selection in the memory module’s user program status file. It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module.

Important:

The memory module fault override selection in the Memory

Module Information (MMI) file does not determine the controller’s operation. It merely displays the setting of the Fault

Override bit (S:1/8) in the memory module’s user program.

See “Fault Override At Power-Up” on page G-5 for more information.

8-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Load Program Compare

The LPC (Load Program Compare) bit shows the status of the load program compare selection in the memory module’s user program status file. It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module.

Important:

The memory module load program compare selection in the

Memory Module Information (MMI) file does not determine the controller’s operation. It merely displays the setting of the Load

Program Compare bit (S:2/9) in the memory module’s user program.

See “Memory Module Program Compare” on page G-10 for more information.

Load on Error

The LE (Load on Error) bit shows the status of the load on error selection in the memory module’s user program status file. It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module.

See “Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program” on page G-6 for more

information.

Load Always

The LA (Load Always) bit shows the status of the load always selection in the memory module’s user program status file. It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module.

See “Load Memory Module Always” on page G-6 for more information.

Mode Behavior

The MB (Mode Behavior) bit shows the status of the mode behavior selection in the memory module’s user program status file. It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module.

See “Power-Up Mode Behavior” on page G-7 for more information.

8-8

Using the High Speed Counter

9

Using the High Speed Counter

The MicroLogix 1500 has two 20 kHz high speed counters. Each counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from other inputs on the base unit. HSC0 utilizes inputs 0 through 3, and HSC1 utilizes inputs 4 through 7. Each counter is completely independent and isolated from the other. HSC0 is used in this document to define how the HSC works in the MicroLogix 1500 system, HSC1 is identical in functionality.

This chapter describes how to use the HSC function and also contains sections on the

HSL and RAC instructions, as follows:

“High Speed Counter (HSC) Function File” on page 9-2.

“HSL - High Speed Counter Load” on page 9-29.

“RAC - Reset Accumulated Value” on page 9-31.

9-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

High Speed Counter (HSC) Function File

Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder, you see a HSC Function File with two elements, HSC0 and HSC1. These elements provide access to HSC configuration data, and also allows the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the High Speed Counters.

Note:

NOTE: If the controller mode is run, the data within sub-element fields may be changing.

9-2

Using the High Speed Counter

The HSC function, along with the PTO and PWM instructions, are different than most other controller instructions. Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor. This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions.

The HSC built into the MicroLogix 1500 is extremely versatile, the user can select or configure each HSC for any one of eight (8) modes of operation. (Operating Modes

are discussed later in this chapter, see section “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18).

Some of the enhanced capabilities of the MicroLogix 1500 High Speed Counters are:

• 20 kHz operation

• High speed direct control of outputs

• 32-bit signed integer data (count range of ± 2,147,483,647)

• Programmable High and Low presets, and Overflow and Underflow setpoints

• Automatic Interrupt processing based on accumulated count

• On-line/run-time editable parameters (from the user control program)

The High Speed Counter function operates as described in the following diagram.

Overflow

+2,147,483,647 maximum

High Preset

0

Low Preset

Underflow

-2,147,483,647 minimum

9-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

High Speed Counter Function File Sub-Elements Summary

Each HSC is comprised of 36 sub-elements. These sub-elements are either bit, word, or long word structures that are used to provide control over the HSC function, or provide HSC status information for use within the control program. Each of the subelements and their respective functions are described in this chapter. A summary of the sub-elements is provided in the following table. All examples illustrate HSC0.

Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical.

Table 9-1: High Speed Counter Function File (HSC:0 or HSC:1)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format

PFN - Program File Number

ER - Error Code

UIX - User Interrupt Executing

UIE - User Interrupt Enable

UIL - User Interrupt Lost

UIP - User Interrupt Pending

FE - Function Enabled

AS - Auto Start

ED - Error Detected

CE - Counting Enabled

SP - Set Parameters

LPM - Low Preset Mask

HPM - High Preset Mask

UFM - Underflow Mask

OFM - Overflow Mask

LPI - Low Preset Interrupt

HPI - High Preset Interrupt

UFI - Underflow Interrupt

OFI - Overflow Interrupt

LPR - Low Preset Reached

HPR - High Preset Reached

DIR - Count Direction

UF - Underflow

OF - Overflow

MD - Mode Done

CD - Count Down

HSC:0.PFN

word (INT)

HSC:0.ER

word (INT)

HSC:0/UIX

HSC:0/UIE

HSC:0/UIL bit bit bit

HSC:0/UIP

HSC:0/FE

HSC:0/AS

HSC:0/ED

HSC:0/CE

HSC:0/SP bit bit bit bit bit bit

HSC:0/LPM bit

HSC:0/HPM bit

HSC:0/UFM bit

HSC:0/OFM bit

HSC:0/LPI bit

HSC:0/HPI bit

HSC:0/UFI

HSC:0/OFI bit bit

HSC:0/LPR bit

HSC:0/HPR bit

HSC:0/DIR bit

HSC:0/UF bit

HSC:0/OF

HSC:0/MD

HSC:0/CD bit bit bit

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 or 1

2 to 7

HSC

Modes

1

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

Type User Program

Access

For More

Information

status status status status status status control control control control status status status status status control status status control status status control control status control control read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read only read only read only read/write read/write read/write read only read only read only read only read/write read/write read only read/write read only read only read/write read/write

9-14

9-16

9-11

9-13

9-16

9-13

9-10

9-12

9-14

9-15

9-11

9-12

9-15

9-17

9-17

9-9

9-6

9-7

9-7

9-7

9-8

9-5

9-6

9-9

9-8

9-10

9-4

Using the High Speed Counter

Table 9-1: High Speed Counter Function File (HSC:0 or HSC:1)

Sub-Element Description

CU - Count Up

MOD - HSC Mode

ACC - Accumulator

HIP - High Preset

LOP - Low Preset

OVF - Overflow

UNF - Underflow

OMB - Output Mask Bits

HPO - High Preset Output

LPO - Low Preset Output

Address Data Format

HSC:0/CU bit

HSC:0.MOD

word (INT)

HSC

Modes

1

0 to 7

0 to 7

HSC:0.ACC

long word (32-bit INT) 0 to 7

HSC:0.HIP

long word (32-bit INT) 0 to 7

HSC:0.LOP

long word (32-bit INT) 2 to 7

HSC:0.OVF

long word (32-bit INT) 0 to 7

HSC:0.UNF

long word (32-bit INT) 2 to 7

HSC:0.OMB

word (16-bit binary) 0 to 7

HSC:0.HPO

word (16-bit binary)

HSC:0.LPO

word (16-bit binary)

0 to 7

2 to 7

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

n/a = not applicable

Type User Program

Access

For More

Information

status control control control control control control control control control read only read only read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read only read/write read/write

9-26

9-26

9-27

9-28

9-28

9-17

9-18

9-24

9-25

9-25

HSC Function File Sub-Elements

All examples illustrate HSC0. Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical.

Program File Number (PFN)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format

PFN - Program File Number HSC:0.PFN

word (INT)

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read only

The PFN (Program File Number) variable defines which subroutine is called

(executed) when the HSC0 count to High Preset or Low Preset through Overflow or

Underflow. The integer value of this variable defines which program file will run at that time. A valid subroutine file is any program file (3 to 255).

The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller, it is programmed and operates the same as any other program file. From the control program perspective it is unique, in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the HSC.

See also: “Interrupt Latency” on page 23-5.

9-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Error Code (ER)

Sub-Element Description

ER - Error Code

Address

HSC:0.ER

Data Format

word (INT)

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The ERs (Error Codes) detected by the HSC sub-system will be displayed in this word. Errors include:

Table 9-2: HSC Error Codes

Error Code

1

Name

Invalid File Number

2

3

4

Invalid Mode

Invalid High Preset

Invalid Overflow

Mode

n/a n/a

0,1

2 to 7

0 to 7

Description

Interrupt (program) file identified in HSC:0.PFN is less than 3, greater than 255, or does not exist

Invalid Mode

High preset is less than or equal to zero (0)

High preset is less than or equal to low preset

High preset is greater than overflow

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

Function Enabled (FE)

Sub-Element Description

FE - Function Enabled

Address

HSC:0/FE bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The FE (Function Enabled) is a status/control bit that defines when the HSC interrupt is enabled, and that interrupts generated by the HSC will be processed based on their priority within the MicroLogix 1500 system.

This bit can be controlled by the user program, or will be automatically set by the

HSC sub-system if auto start is enabled.

See also: “Priority of User Interrupts” on page 23-4.

9-6

Using the High Speed Counter

Auto Start (AS)

Sub-Element Description

AS - Auto Start

Address

HSC:0/AS bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read only

The AS (Auto Start) is a control bit that can be used in the control program. The auto start bit is configured with the programming device, and stored as part of the user program. The auto start bit defines if the HSC function will automatically start whenever the MicroLogix 1500 controller enters any run or test mode.

Error Detected (ED)

Sub-Element Description

ED - Error Detected

Address

HSC:0/ED bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The ED (Error Detected) flag is a status bit that can be used in the control program to detect if an error is present in the HSC sub-system. The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error. When this bit is set (1) the user should look at the specific error code in parameter HSC:0.ER.

This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 system, and will be set and cleared automatically.

Counting Enabled (CE)

Sub-Element Description

CE - Counting Enabled

Address

HSC:0/CE bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The CE (Counting Enabled) control bit is used to enable or disable the High Speed

Counter. When set (1), counting is enabled, when clear (0, default) counting is disabled. If this bit is disabled while the counter is running, the accumulated value is held, if the bit is then set counting will resume.

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

9-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Set Parameters (SP)

Sub-Element Description

SP - Set Parameters

Address

HSC:0/SP bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The SP (Set Parameters) control bit is used to load new variables to the HSC subsystem. When an OTE instruction with the address of HSC:0/SP is solved true (off-toon rung transition), all configuration variables currently stored in the HSC function, will be checked, and loaded into the HSC sub-system. The HSC sub-system will then operate based on those newly loaded settings.

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit. SP can be toggled while the HSC is running and no counts will be lost.

User Interrupt Enable (UIE)

Sub-Element Description

UIE - User Interrupt Enable

Address

HSC:0/UIE bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The UIE (User Interrupt Enable) bit is used to enable or disable HSC subroutine processing. This bit must be set (1) if the user wants the controller to process the HSC subroutine when any of the following conditions exist:

• Low preset reached

• High preset reached

• Overflow condition - count up through the overflow value

• Underflow condition - count down through the underflow value

If this bit is cleared (0), the HSC sub-system will not automatically scan the HSC subroutine. This bit can be controlled from the user program (using the OTE, UIE, or

UID instructions).

!

ATTENTION: If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL, OTE, or UIE, this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung (last instruction on last branch). It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung.

9-8

Using the High Speed Counter

User Interrupt Executing (UIX)

Sub-Element Description

UIX - User Interrupt Executing

Address

HSC:0/UIX bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The UIX (User Interrupt Executing) bit is set (1) whenever the HSC sub-system begins processing the HSC subroutine due to any of the following conditions:

• Low preset reached

• High preset reached

• Overflow condition - count up through the overflow value

• Underflow condition - count down through the underflow value

The HSC sub-system will clear (0) the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine.

The HSC UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an HSC interrupt is executing.

User Interrupt Pending (UIP)

Sub-Element Description

UIP - User Interrupt Pending

Address

HSC:0/UIP bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The UIP (User Interrupt Pending) is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending. This status bit can be monitored, or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot be executed immediately.

This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 system, and will be set and cleared automatically.

9-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

User Interrupt Lost (UIL)

Sub-Element Description

UIL - User Interrupt Lost

Address

HSC:0/UIL bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The UIL (User Interrupt Lost) is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost. The MicroLogix 1500 can process 1 active, and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions.

This bit is set by the MicroLogix 1500. It is up to the control program to utilize, track if necessary, and clear the lost condition.

Low Preset Mask (LPM)

Sub-Element Description

LPM - Low Preset Mask

Address

HSC:0/LPM bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The LPM (Low Preset Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) a low preset interrupt from occurring. If this bit is clear (0), and a Low Preset

Reached condition is detected by the HSC, the HSC user interrupt will not be executed.

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit.

9-10

Using the High Speed Counter

Low Preset Interrupt (LPI)

Sub-Element Description

LPI - Low Preset Interrupt

Address

HSC:0/LPI bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The LPI (Low Preset Interrupt) status bit will be set (1) when the HSC accumulator reaches the low preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered. This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the low preset condition caused the HSC interrupt. If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the low preset, this bit would be used as conditional logic.

This bit can be cleared (0) by the control program, and will also be cleared by the

HSC sub-system whenever these conditions are detected:

• High Preset Interrupt executes

• Underflow Interrupt executes

• Overflow Interrupt executes

• Controller enters an executing mode

Low Preset Reached (LPR)

Sub-Element Description

LPR - Low Preset Reached

Address

HSC:0/LPR bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The LPR (Low Preset Reached) status flag is set (1) by the HSC sub-system whenever the accumulated value (HSC:0.ACC) is less than or equal to the low preset variable

(HSC:0.LOP).

This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub-system whenever the controller is in an executing mode.

9-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

High Preset Mask (HPM)

Sub-Element Description

HPM - High Preset Mask

Address

HSC:0/HPM bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The HPM (High Preset Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) a high preset interrupt from occurring. If this bit is clear (0), and a High Preset

Reached condition is detected by the HSC, the HSC user interrupt will not be executed.

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit.

High Preset Interrupt (HPI)

Sub-Element Description

HPI - High Preset Interrupt

Address

HSC:0/HPI bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The HPI (High Preset Interrupt) status bit will be set (1) when the HSC accumulator reaches the high preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered. This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the high preset condition caused the HSC interrupt. If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the high preset, this bit would be used as conditional logic.

This bit can be cleared (0) by the control program, and will also be cleared by the

HSC sub-system whenever these conditions are detected:

• Low Preset Interrupt executes

• Underflow Interrupt executes

• Overflow Interrupt executes

• Controller enters an executing mode

9-12

Using the High Speed Counter

High Preset Reached (HPR)

Sub-Element Description Address

HPR - High Preset Reached HSC:0/HPR bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The HPR (High Preset Reached) status flag is set (1) by the HSC sub-system whenever the accumulated value (HSC:0.ACC) is greater than or equal to the high preset variable (HSC:0.HIP).

This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub-system whenever the controller is in an executing mode.

Underflow (UF)

Sub-Element Description

UF - Underflow

Address

HSC:0/UF bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The UF (Underflow) status flag is set (1) by the HSC sub-system whenever the accumulated value (HSC:0.ACC) has counted through the underflow variable

(HSC:0.UNF).

This bit is transitional, and is set by the HSC sub-system. It is up to the control program to utilize, track if necessary, and clear (0) the underflow condition.

Underflow conditions will not generate a controller fault.

9-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Underflow Mask (UFM)

Sub-Element Description

UFM - Underflow Mask

Address

HSC:0/UFM bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The UFM (Underflow Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) a underflow interrupt from occurring. If this bit is clear (0), and a Underflow

Reached condition is detected by the HSC, the HSC user interrupt will not be executed.

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit.

Underflow Interrupt (UFI)

Sub-Element Description

UFI - Underflow Interrupt

Address

HSC:0/UFI bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The UFI (Underflow Interrupt) status bit will be set (1) when the HSC accumulator counts through the underflow value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered. This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the underflow condition caused the

HSC interrupt. If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the underflow, this bit would be used as conditional logic.

This bit can be cleared (0) by the control program, and will also be cleared by the

HSC sub-system whenever these conditions are detected:

• Low Preset Interrupt executes

• High Preset Interrupt executes

• Overflow Interrupt executes

• Controller enters an executing mode

9-14

Using the High Speed Counter

Overflow (OF)

Sub-Element Description

OF - Overflow

Address

HSC:0/OF bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The OF (Overflow) status flag is set (1) by the HSC sub-system whenever the accumulated value (HSC:0.ACC) has counted through the overflow variable

(HSC:0.OF).

This bit is transitional, and is set by the HSC sub-system. It is up to the control program to utilize, track if necessary, and clear (0) the overflow condition.

Overflow conditions will not generate a controller fault.

Overflow Mask (OFM)

Sub-Element Description

OFM - Overflow Mask

Address

HSC:0/OFM bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The OFM (Overflow Mask) control bit is used to enable (allow) or disable (not allow) an overflow interrupt from occurring. If this bit is clear (0), and an overflow reached condition is detected by the HSC, the HSC user interrupt will not be executed.

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit.

9-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Overflow Interrupt (OFI)

Sub-Element Description

OFI - Overflow Interrupt

Address

HSC:0/OFI bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The OFI (Overflow Interrupt) status bit will be set (1) when the HSC accumulator counts through the overflow value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered. This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the overflow variable caused the

HSC interrupt. If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the overflow, this bit would be used as conditional logic.

This bit can be cleared (0) by the control program, and will also be cleared by the

HSC sub-system whenever these conditions are detected:

• Low Preset Interrupt executes

• High Preset Interrupt executes

• Underflow Interrupt executes

• Controller enters an executing mode

Count Direction (DIR)

Sub-Element Description

DIR - Count Direction

Address

HSC:0/DIR bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The DIR (Count Direction) status flag is controlled by the HSC sub-system. When the

HSC accumulator counts up, the direction flag will be set (1). Whenever the HSC accumulator counts down, the direction flag will be cleared (0).

If the accumulated value stops, the direction bit will retain its value. The only time the direction flag will change is when the accumulated count reverses.

This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub-system whenever the controller is in a run mode.

9-16

Using the High Speed Counter

Mode Done (MD)

Sub-Element Description

MD - Mode Done

Address

HSC:0/MD bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 or 1

Type User Program Access

status read/write

The MD (Mode Done) status flag is set (1) by the HSC sub-system when the HSC is configured for Mode 0 or Mode 1 behavior, and the accumulator counts up to the

High Preset.

Count Down (CD)

Sub-Element Description

CD - Count Down

Address

HSC:0/CD bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

2 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The CD (Count Down) bit is used with the bidirectional counters (modes 2 to 7). If the CE bit is set, the CD bit is set (1). If the CE bit is clear, the CD bit is cleared (0).

Count Up (CU)

Sub-Element Description

CU - Count Up

Address

HSC:0/CU bit

Data Format

1.

For Mode descriptions, see “HSC Mode (MOD)” on page 9-18.

HSC Modes

1

0 to 7

Type User Program Access

status read only

The CU (Count Up) bit is used with all of the HSCs (modes 0 to 7). If the CE bit is set, the CU bit is set (1). If the CE bit is clear, the CU bit is cleared (0).

9-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

HSC Mode (MOD)

Sub-Element Description

MOD - HSC Mode

Address Data Format

HSC:0.MOD

word (INT)

Type User Program Access

control read only

The MOD (Mode) variable sets the High Speed Counter to one of 8 types of operation. This integer value is configured through the programming device, and is accessible in the control program as a read-only variable.

Table 9-3: HSC Operating Modes

Mode Number

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Type

Up Counter - The accumulator is immediately cleared (0) when it reaches the high preset. A low preset cannot be defined in this mode.

Up Counter with external reset and hold - The accumulator is immediately cleared (0) when it reaches the high preset. A low preset cannot be defined in this mode.

Counter with external direction

Counter with external direction, reset, and hold

Two input counter (up and down)

Two input counter (up and down) with external reset and hold

Quadrature counter (phased inputs A and B)

Quadrature counter (phased inputs A and B) with external reset and hold

HSC Mode 0 - Up Counter

Table 9-4: HSC Mode 0 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

Example 2

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count

®

® on (1)

° off (0)

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

Not Used

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Not Used

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Not Used

CE

Bit

Comments

on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count off (0) Hold accumulator value

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

9-18

Using the High Speed Counter

HSC Mode 1 - Up Counter with External Reset and Hold

Table 9-5: HSC Mode 1 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count

®

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

Not Used

Example 2

Example3

Example 4

on

(1)

° off

(0)

Example 5

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Reset

on

(1)

° off

(0) on

(1) on

(1) on

(1)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Hold

on

(1)

CE

Bit

Comments

off

(0) on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count

Hold accumulator value off (0) Hold accumulator value

Hold accumulator value

®

Clear accumulator (=0)

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

HSC Mode 2 - Counter with External Direction

Table 9-6: HSC Mode 2 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

Example 2

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count

®

®

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

Direction

off

(0)

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Not Used

on

(1)

Example3

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Not Used

CE

Bit

Comments

on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count on (1) HSC Accumulator - 1 count off (0) Hold accumulator value

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

9-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

HSC Mode 3 - Counter with External Direction, Reset, and Hold

Table 9-7: HSC Mode 3 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

Example 2

Example3

Example 4

Example 5

Example 6

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count

®

® on

(1)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

Direction

on

(1) off

(0)

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Reset

on

(1)

° off

(0) on

(1) on

(1) on

(1) on

(1)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Hold

on

(1)

CE

Bit

Comments

off

(0) on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count off

(0) on (1) HSC Accumulator - 1 count

Hold accumulator value off (0) Hold accumulator value

Hold accumulator value

®

Clear accumulator (0=)

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

HSC Mode 4 - Two Input Counter (up and down)

Table 9-8: HSC Mode 4 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

Example 2

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count Up

® on

(1)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

®

Count Down

on

(1)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Not Used

Example3

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Not Used

CE

Bit

Comments

on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count on (1) HSC Accumulator - 1 count off (0) Hold accumulator value

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

9-20

Using the High Speed Counter

HSC Mode 5 - Two Input Counter (up and down) with External Reset and Hold

Table 9-9: HSC Mode 5 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

Example 2

Example3

Example 4

Example 5

Example 6

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count

® on

(1) on

(1)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

®

Direction

on

(1)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Reset

on

(1)

° off

(0) on

(1) on

(1) on

(1) on

(1)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Hold

on

(1)

CE

Bit

Comments

off

(0) on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count off

(0) on (1) HSC Accumulator - 1 count

Hold accumulator value off (0) Hold accumulator value

Hold accumulator value

®

Clear accumulator (0=)

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

9-21

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using the Quadrature Encoder

The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating, such as a lathe. The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the

Quadrature Encoder.

The following figure shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0, 1, and 2. The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B. If A leads B, the counter increments. If B leads A, the counter decrements.

The counter can be reset using the Z input. The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution.

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

A

B

Count

1

A

B

Quadrature Encoder

Forward Rotation

Z

(Reset input)

2

3

2

Reverse Rotation

1

9-22

Using the High Speed Counter

HSC Mode 6 - Quadrature Counter (phased inputs A and B)

Table 9-10: HSC Mode 6 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

1

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count A

®

Example 2

2

Example3

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

Count B

off

(0) off

(0)

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Not Used

Example 4

on

(1)

Example 5

on

(1)

Example 6

1. Count input A leads count input B.

2. Count input B leads count input A.

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Not Used

CE

Bit

Comments

on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count on (1) HSC Accumulator - 1 count

Hold accumulator value

Hold accumulator value

Hold accumulator value off (0) Hold accumulator value

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

9-23

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

HSC Mode 7 - Quadrature Counter (phased inputs A and B) With External Reset and Hold

Table 9-11: HSC Mode 7 Examples

Input

Terminals

Function

Example 1

1

Example 2

2

Example3

Example 4

Example 5

Example 6

Example 7

I1:0.0/0 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/4 (HSC1)

Count A

®

°

° off

(0)

I1:0.0/1 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/5 (HSC1)

Count B

off

(0) off

(0) off

(0)

I1:0.0/2 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/6 (HSC1)

Z reset

on

(1) off

(0)

I1:0.0/3 (HSC0)

I1:0.0/7 (HSC1)

Hold

CE

Bit

Comments

off

(0) on (1) HSC Accumulator + 1 count off

(0) on (1) HSC Accumulator - 1 count

Reset accumulator to zero on

(1)

Hold accumulator value on

(1)

Hold accumulator value off

(0) off

(0) on

(1)

Hold accumulator value off (0) Hold accumulator value

1. Count input A leads count input B.

2. Count input B leads count input A.

Blank cells = don’t care.

®

= rising edge

°

= falling edge

Note:

Inputs I1:0.0/0 through I1:0.0/7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used.

Accumulator (ACC)

Sub-Element Description

ACC - Accumulator

Address Data Format Type User Program Access

HSC:0.ACC

long word (32-bit INT) control read/write

The ACC (Accumulator) contains the number of counts detected by the HSC subsystem. If either mode 0 or mode 1 is configured, the value of the software

accumulator will be cleared (0) when a high preset is reached, or when an overflow condition is detected.

9-24

Using the High Speed Counter

High Preset (HIP)

Sub-Element Description

HIP - High Preset

Address

HSC:0.HIP

Data Format Type User Program Access

long word (32-bit INT) control read/write

The HIP (High Preset) is the upper setpoint (in counts) that defines when the HSC sub-system will generate an interrupt. To load data into the high preset, the control program must do one of the following:

• Toggle (low to high) the Set Parameters (HSC:0/SP) control bit. When the SP bit is toggled high, the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred/ loaded into the HSC sub-system.

Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction. See “HSL - High Speed

Counter Load” on page 9-29.

The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow (HSC:0.OVF) parameter or an HSC error will be generated.

Low Preset (LOP)

Sub-Element Description

LOP - Low Preset

Address Data Format Type User Program Access

HSC:0.LOP

long word (32-bit INT) control read/write

The LOP (Low Preset) is the lower setpoint (in counts) that defines when the HSC sub-system will generate an interrupt. To load data into the low preset, the control program must do one of the following:

• Toggle (low to high) the Set Parameters (HSC:0/SP) control bit. When the SP bit is toggled high, the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred/ loaded into the HSC sub-system.

Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction. See “HSL - High Speed

Counter Load” on page 9-29.

The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow (HSC:0.UNF) parameter, or an HSC error will be generated. (If the underflow and low preset values are negative numbers, the low preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value.)

9-25

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Overflow (OVF)

Sub-Element Description

OVF - Overflow

Address Data Format Type User Program Access

HSC:0.OVF

long word (32-bit INT) control read/write

The OVF (Overflow) defines the upper count limit for the counter. If the counters accumulated value increments past the value specified in this variable, an overflow interrupt is generated, and the HSC sub-system rolls the accumulator over to the underflow value, the counter continues counting from the underflow value (counts are not lost in this transition). The user can specify any value for the overflow position, provided it is greater than the underflow value, and falls between

-2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.

To load data into the overflow variable, the control program must toggle (low to high) the Set Parameters (HSC:0.0/SP) control bit. When the SP bit is toggled high, the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred/loaded into the HSC subsystem.

Note:

Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset (HSC:0.HIP) or an HSC error will be generated.

Underflow (UNF)

Sub-Element Description

UNF - Underflow

Address Data Format Type User Program Access

HSC:0.UNF

long word (32-bit INT) control read/write

The UNF (Underflow) defines the lower count limit for the counter. If the counters accumulated value decrements past the value specified in this variable, an underflow interrupt is generated, and the HSC sub-system resets the accumulated value to the overflow value, the counter then begins counting from the overflow value (counts are not lost in this transition). The user can specify any value for the underflow position, provided it is less than the overflow value, and falls between

-2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.

To load data into the underflow variable, the control program must toggle (low to high) the Set Parameters (HSC:0.0/SP) control bit. When the SP bit is toggled high, the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred/loaded into the HSC sub-system.

Note:

Data loaded into the underflow variable must be less than the data resident in the low preset (HSC:0.LOP) or an HSC error will be generated?

9-26

Using the High Speed Counter

Output Mask Bits (OMB)

Sub-Element Description

OMB - Output Mask Bits

Address Data Format

HSC:0.OMB

word (16-bit binary)

Type User Program Access

control read only

The OMB (Output Mask Bits) define what outputs on the MicroLogix 1500 base can be directly controlled by the high speed counter. The HSC sub-system has the ability to directly (without control program interaction) turn outputs ON or OFF based on the

HSC accumulator reaching the High or Low presets. The bit pattern stored in the

OMB variable will define which outputs are controlled by the HSC, and which outputs are not controlled by the HSC.

The bit pattern of the OMB variable directly corresponds to the output bits on the

MicroLogix 1500 base unit. Bits that are set (1) are enabled and can be turned on or off by the HSC sub-system, bits that are clear (0) can not be turned on or off by the

HSC sub-system. The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup.

The table below illustrates this relationship:

Table 9-12: Affect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs

Output Address

HSC:0.HPO (high preset output)

16-Bit Signed Integer Data Word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

HSC:0.OMB (output mask)

O0:0.0 (MicroLogix 1500 Base Unit

Outputs)

1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 1 0 1

The outputs shown in the black boxes are the outputs under the control of the HSC sub-system. The mask defines which outputs can be controlled. The high preset output or low preset output values (HPO or LPO) define if each output is either ON

(1) or OFF (0). Another way to view this is that the high or low preset output is written through the output mask, with the output mask acting like a filter.

The bits in the gray boxes are unused. The first 12 bits of the mask word are used and the remaining mask bits are not functional because the do not correlate to any physical outputs on the base unit.

The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup.

9-27

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

High Preset Output (HPO)

Sub-Element Description

HPO - High Preset Output

Address Data Format

HSC:0.HPO

word (16-bit binary)

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The HPO (High Preset Output) defines the state (1 = ON or 0 = OFF) of the outputs

on the MicroLogix 1500 base when the high preset is reached. See “Output Mask Bits

(OMB)” on page 9-27 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off

based on the high preset being reached.

The high output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup, or while the controller is operating. Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating.

Low Preset Output (LPO)

Sub-Element Description

LPO - Low Preset Output

Address Data Format

HSC:0.LPO

word (16-bit binary)

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The LPO (Low Preset Output) defines the state (1 = “on”, 0 = “off”) of the outputs on

the MicroLogix 1500 base when the low preset is reached. See “Output Mask Bits

(OMB)” on page 9-27 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off

based on the low preset being reached.

The low output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup, or while the controller is operating. Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating.

9-28

Using the High Speed Counter

HSL - High Speed Counter Load

High Speed Counter Load

HSC Number HSC0

High Preset

Low Preset

N7:0

N7:1

Output High Source

Output Low Source

N7:2

N7:3

Instruction Type: output

Table 9-13: Execution Time for the HSL Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

41.85

µ s

42.95

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The HSL (High Speed Load) instruction allows the high and low presets, and high and low output source to be applied to a high speed counter. These parameters are described below:

• Counter Number - Specifies which high speed counter is being used; 0 = HSC0 and 1 = HSC1.

• High Preset - Specifies the value in the high preset register. The data ranges for the high preset are -32786 to 32767 (word) and -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

(long word).

• Low Preset - Specifies the value in the low preset register. The data ranges for the low preset are -32786 to 32767 (word) and -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word).

• Output High Source - Specifies the value in the output high register. The data range for the output high source is from 0 to FFFF.

• Output Low Source - Specifies the value in the output low register. The data range for the output low source is from 0 to FFFF.

9-29

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below:

Table 9-14: HSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Counter

Number

High Preset

Low Preset

Output High

Source

Output Low

Source

• •

• •

• •

• •

• • • •

• • • •

• • • •

• • • •

• • •

• • •

• • •

• • •

• •

• •

• •

• •

9-30

Using the High Speed Counter

RAC - Reset Accumulated Value

High Speed Counter Load

HSC Number HSC0

High Preset

Low Preset

Output High Source

Output Low Source

N7:0

N7:1

N7:2

N7:3

Instruction Type: output

Table 9-15: Execution Time for the RAC Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

17.61

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

The RAC instruction resets the high speed counter and allows a specific value to be written to the HSC accumulator. The RAC instruction uses the following parameters:

• Counter Number - Specifies which high speed counter is being used; 0 = HSC0 and 1 = HSC1.

• Source - Specifies the location of the data to be loaded into the HSC accumulator.

The data range is from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.

Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below:

Table 9-16: RAC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Counter Number

Source •

• • • •

9-31

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

9-32

10

Using High Speed Outputs

Using High Speed Outputs

The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans.

Instruction

PTO - Pulse Train Output

PWM - Pulse Width Modulation

Used To:

Generate stepper pulses

Generate PWM output

Page

10-1

10-20

PTO - Pulse Train Output Instruction

Instruction Type: output

Table 10-1: Execution Time for the PTO Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

75.11

µ s

False

21.4

µ s

Pulse Train Output Function

A controller utilizing a 1764-28BXB Base Unit supports two high speed outputs.

These outputs can be used as standard outputs (not high speed), or individually configured for PTO or PWM operation. The PTO functionality allows a simple motion profile or pulse profile to be generated directly from the controller. The pulse profile has three primary components:

• Total number of pulses to be generated

• Accelerate/decelerate intervals

• Run interval

10-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The PTO instruction, along with the HSC and PWM functions, are different than most other controller instructions. Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor. This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions.

In this implementation, the user defines the total number of pulses to be generated

(which corresponds to distance traveled), and how many pulses to use for each accel/ decel period. The number of pulses not used in the accel/decel period defines how many pulses will be generated during the run phase. In this implementation, the accel/ decel intervals are the same.

Within the PTO function file are two PTO elements. Each element can be set to control either output 2 (O0:0/2) or output 3 (O0:0/3).

The interface to the PTO sub-system is accomplished by scanning a PTO instruction in the main program file (file number 2), or by scanning a PTO instruction in any of the subroutine files. A typical operating sequence of a PTO instruction is as follows:

1. The rung that a PTO instruction is on is solved true.

2. The PTO instruction is started, and pulses are produced based on the accel/decel

(ACCEL) parameters, which define the number of ACCEL pulses and the type of profile: s-curve or trapezoid.

3. The ACCEL phase completes.

4. The RUN phase is entered, and the number of pulses defined for RUN are output.

5. The RUN phase completes.

6. Decelerate (DECEL) is entered, and pulses are produced based on the accel/decel parameters, which defines the number of DECEL pulses and the type of profile: scurve or trapezoid.

7. The DECEL phase completes.

8. The PTO instruction is DONE.

While the PTO instruction is being executed/processed, status bits and information are updated as the main controller continues to operate. Because the PTO instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system, the status bits and other information are updated each time the PTO instruction is scanned while it is running. This provides the control program access to PTO status while it is running.

10-2

Using High Speed Outputs

Note:

PTO status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller. Worst case latency will be the same as the maximum scan of the controller. This condition can be minimized by placing a PTO instruction in the STI

(selectable timed interrupt) file, or by adding PTO instructions to your program to increase how often a PTO instruction is scanned.

The charts in the following examples illustrate the typical timing sequence/behavior of a PTO instruction. The stages listed in each chart have nothing to do with controller scan time. They simply illustrate a sequence of events. In actuality, the controller may have hundreds or thousands of scans within each of the stages illustrated in the examples.

Conditions Required to Start the PTO

The following conditions must exist to start the PTO:

• The PTO instruction must be in an idle state.

• For idle state behavior, all of the following conditions must be met:

™

Jog Pulse (JP) bit must be off

™

Jog Continuous (JC) bit must be off

™

Enable Hardstop (EH) bit must be off

™

Normal Operation (NS) bit must be off

™

The output cannot be forced

• The rung it is on must transition from a False state (0) to a True state (1).

10-3

Sub-Elements:

Normal Operation

/NO

Accelerate Status

/AS

Run Status

/RS

Decelerate Status

/DS

Enable

/EN

Done

/DN

Idle

/ID

Jog Pulse

/JP

Jog Continuous

/JC

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Momentary Logic Enable Example

In this example, the rung state is a momentary or transitional type of input. This means that the false-to-true rung transition enables the PTO instruction, and then returns to a false state prior to the PTO instruction completing its operation.

If a transitional input to the PTO instruction is used, the Done (DN) bit turns on when the instruction completes, but will only remain on until the next time the PTO instruction is scanned in the user program. The structure of the control program determines when the DN bit goes off. So, to detect when the PTO instruction completes its output, you can monitor the Done (DN), Idle (ID), or Normal Operation

(NO) status bits.

Table 10-2: Chart 1 - Momentary (rung) Logic Enable

Stage

Rung State

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Relative Timing

Start of PTO Start of PTO

10-4

Using High Speed Outputs

Standard Logic Enable Example

In this example, the rung state is a maintained type of input. This means that it enables the PTO instruction Normal Operation (NO), and maintains its logic state until after the PTO instruction completes its operation. With this type of logic, status bit behavior is as follows:

The Done (DN) bit will becomes true (1) when the PTO completes, and remains set until the PTO rung logic is false. The false rung logic re-activates the PTO instruction.

To detect when the PTO instruction completes its output, you monitor the done (DN) bit.

Table 10-3: Chart 2 - Standard (rung) Logic Enable

Stage

Rung State

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Sub-Elements:

Normal Operation

/NO

Accelerate Status

/AS

Run Status

/RS

Decelerate Status

/DS

Enable

/EN

Done

/DN

Idle

/ID

Jog Pulse

/JP

Jog Continuous

/JC

Relative Timing

Start of PTO Start of PTO

10-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Pulse Train Outputs (PTO) Function File

Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder, you see a PTO Function File with two elements, PTO0 and PTO1. These elements provide access to PTO configuration data, and also allow the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the

Pulse Train Outputs.

Note:

If the controller mode is run, the data within sub-element fields may be changing.

10-6

Using High Speed Outputs

Pulse Train Output Function File Sub-Elements Summary

The variables within each PTO sub-element, along with what type of behavior and access the control program has to those variables, are listed individually below. All examples illustrate PTO 0. Terms and behavior for PTO 1 are identical.

Table 10-4: Pulse Train Output Function File (PTO:0)

Sub-Element Description Address

PTO:0.OUT

word (INT)

PTO:0/DN bit

PTO:0/DS bit

PTO:0/RS bit

PTO:0/AS bit

PTO:0/RP bit

Data

Format

OUT - Output

DN - Done

DS - Decelerating Status

RS - Run Status

AS - Accelerating Status

RP - Ramp Profile

IS - Idle Status

ED - Error Detected Status

NS - Normal Operation Status

JPS - Jog Pulse Status

JCS - Jog Continuous Status

JP - Jog Pulse

JC - Jog Continuous

PTO:0/IS bit

PTO:0/ED bit

PTO:0/NS

PTO:0/JPS

PTO:0/JCS

PTO:0/JP

PTO:0/JC bit bit bit bit bit

EH - Enable Hard Stop

EN - Enable Status (follows rung state)

ER - Error Code

OF - Output Frequency (Hz)

PTO:0/EH

PTO:0/EN bit bit

PTO:0.ER

word (INT)

PTO:0.OF

word (INT)

OFS - Operating Frequency Status

(Hz)

PTO:0.OFS

word (INT)

JF - Jog Frequency (Hz)

TOP - Total Output Pulses To Be

Generated

OPP - Output Pulses Produced

ADP - Accel/Decel Pulses

PTO:0.JF

word (INT)

PTO:0.TOP

long word

(32-bit INT)

PTO:0.OPP

long word

(32-bit INT)

PTO:0.ADP

long word

(32-bit INT)

Range

2 or 3

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

-2 to 7

0 to 20,000

0 to 20,000 status control status

0 to 20,000 control

0 to 2,147,483,647 control

0 to 2,147,483,647 status

see p. 10-15

Type

control status status status control control control status control status status status status control status status

User Program

Access

read only read only read only read only read only read/write read only read only read only read only read only read/write read/write read/write read only

For More

Information

10-8

10-8

10-9

10-9

10-10

10-10

10-11

10-11

10-17

10-17

10-18

10-16

10-12

10-12

10-13

read only read/write read only read/write read/write read only read/write

10-18

10-13

10-14

10-16

10-14

10-14

10-15

10-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PTO Output (OUT)

Sub-Element Description

OUT - Output

Address Data Format

PTO:0.OUT

word (INT)

Range

2 or 3

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

The PTO OUT (Output) variable defines the output (O0:0/2 or O0:0/3) that the PTO instruction controls. This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written, and cannot be set by the user program.

• When OUT = 2, PTO pulses output 2 (O0:0.0/2) of the embedded outputs

(1764-28BXB).

• When OUT = 3, PTO pulses output 3 (O0:0.0/3) of the embedded outputs

(1764-28BXB).

Note:

Forcing an output controlled by the PTO while it is running will cause a PTO error.

PTO Done (DN)

Sub-Element Description

DN - Done

Address

PTO:0/DN bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO DN (Done) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program. The DN bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction has completed its operation successfully.

• Cleared (0) - When the rung the PTO is on is false. If the rung is false when the

PTO instruction completes, the Done bit is set until the next scan of the PTO instruction.

10-8

Using High Speed Outputs

PTO Decelerating Status (DS)

Sub-Element Description

DS - Decelerating Status

Address

PTO:0/DS bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO DS (Decel) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program. The DS bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction is within the deceleration phase of the output profile.

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile.

PTO Run Status (RS)

Sub-Element Description

RS - Run Status

Address

PTO:0/RS bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO RS (Run Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program. The RS bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction is within the run phase of the output profile.

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile.

10-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PTO Accelerating Status (AS)

Sub-Element Description

AS - Accelerating Status

Address

PTO:0/AS bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO AS (Accelerating Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program. The AS bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction is within the acceleration phase of the output profile.

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile.

PTO Ramp Profile (RP)

Sub-Element Description

RP - Ramp Profile

Address

PTO:0/RP bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO RP (Ramp Profile) bit controls how the output pulses generated by the PTO sub-system accelerate to and decelerate from the Output Frequency that is set in the

PTO function file (PTO:0.OF). It can be used by an input or output instruction on any rung within the control program. The RP bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Configures the PTO instruction to produce an S-Curve profile.

• Cleared (0) - Configures the PTO instruction to produce a Trapezoid profile.

10-10

Using High Speed Outputs

PTO Idle Status (IS)

Sub-Element Description

IS - Idle Status

Address

PTO:0/IS bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO IS (Idle Status) is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used in the control program by an input instruction. The PTO sub-system must be in an idle state whenever any PTO operation needs to start.

The IS bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - PTO sub-system is in an idle state. The idle state is defined as the PTO is not running, and no errors are present.

• Cleared (0) - PTO sub-system is not in an idle state (it is running)

PTO Error Detected (ED)

Sub-Element Description

ED - Error Detected Status

Address

PTO:0/ED bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO ED (Error Detected Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO instruction is in an error state. If an error state is detected, the specific error is identified in the error code register (PTO:0.ER). The ED bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction is in an error state

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PTO instruction is not in an error state

10-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PTO Normal Operation Status (NS)

Sub-Element Description Address

NS - Normal Operation Status PTO:0/NS bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO NS (Normal Operation Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is in its normal state. A normal state is ACCEL, RUN, DECEL or

DONE, with no PTO errors. The NS bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction is in its normal state

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PTO instruction is not in its normal state

PTO Enable Hard Stop (EH)

Sub-Element Description

EH - Enable Hard Stop

Address

PTO:0/EH bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO EH (Enable Hard Stop) bit is used to stop the PTO sub-system immediately.

Once the PTO sub-system starts a pulse sequence, the only way to stop generating pulses is to set the enable hard stop bit. The enable hard stop aborts any PTO subsystem operation (idle, normal, jog continuous or jog pulse) and generates a PTO subsystem error. The EH bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Instructs the PTO sub-system to stop generating pulses immediately

(output off = 0)

• Cleared (0) - Normal operation

10-12

Using High Speed Outputs

PTO Enable Status (EN)

Sub-Element Description

EN - Enable Status (follows rung state)

Address

PTO:0/EN bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO EN (Enable Status) is controlled by the PTO sub-system. When the rung preceding the PTO instruction is solved true, the PTO instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set. If the rung preceding the PTO instruction transitions to a false state before the pulse sequence completes its operation, the enable status bit resets (0).

The EN bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - PTO is enabled

• Cleared (0) - PTO has completed, or the rung preceding the PTO is false

PTO Output Frequency (OF)

Sub-Element Description

OF - Output Frequency (Hz)

Address Data Format

PTO:0.OF

word (INT)

Range

0 to 20,000

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO OF (Output Frequency) variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during the RUN phase of the pulse profile. This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven, the mechanics of the application, or the device/ components being moved. Data less than zero and greater than 20,000 generates a

PTO error.

10-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PTO Operating Frequency Status (OFS)

Sub-Element Description

OFS - Operating Frequency

Status (Hz)

Address Data Format

PTO:0.OFS

word (INT)

Range

0 to 20,000

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO OFS (Output Frequency Status) is generated by the PTO sub-system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency being produced by the PTO sub-system.

Note:

The value displayed may not exactly match the value entered in the

PTO:0.OF. This is because the PTO sub-system may not be capable of reproducing an exact frequency at some of the higher frequencies. For PTO applications, this is typically not an issue because, in all cases, an exact number of pulses are produced.

PTO Total Output Pulses To Be Generated (TOP)

Sub-Element Description

TOP - Total Output Pulses To Be

Generated

Address Data Format Range Type

PTO:0.TOP

long word (32-bit INT) 0 to 2,147,483,647 control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO TOP (Total Output Pulses) defines the total number of pulses to be generated for the pulse profile (accel/run/decel inclusive).

PTO Output Pulses Produced (OPP)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Range Type

OPP - Output Pulses Produced PTO:0.OPP

long word (32-bit INT) 0 to 2,147,483,647 status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO OPP (Output Pulses Produced) is generated by the PTO sub-system and can be used in the control program to monitor how many pulses have been generated by the PTO sub-system.

10-14

Using High Speed Outputs

PTO Accel / Decel Pulses (ADP)

Sub-Element Description

ADP - Accel/Decel Pulses

Address Data Format

PTO:0.ADP

long word (32-bit INT)

Range

see below

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO ADP (Accel/Decel Pulses) defines how many of the total pulses (TOP variable) will be applied to each of the ACCEL and DECEL components. The illustration below shows the relationship, where:

• TOP (total output pulses) = 12,000

• ADP (accel/decel pulses)= 3,000

If you need to determine the ramp period (accel/decel ramp duration):

• 2 x ADP/OF = duration in seconds (OF = output frequency)

The following formulas can be used to calculate the maximum frequency limit for both profiles. The maximum frequency = the integer

the result found below

(OF = output frequency):

• For Trapezoid Profiles: OF x OF/4 + 0.5

• For S-Curve Profiles: 0.999 x OF x SQRT(OF/6)

Accel

3,000

12,000

Run

6,000

Decel

3,000

The ADP range is from 0 to the calculated value. The value in the ADP variable must be less than one-half the value in the TOP variable, or an error is generated. In this example, the maximum value that could be used for accel/decel is 6000, because if both accel and decel are 6000, the total number of pulses = 12,000. The run component would be zero. This profile would consist of an acceleration phase from 0 to 6000. At 6000, the output frequency (OF variable) would be generated and immediately enter the deceleration phase, 6000 to 12,000. At 12,000, the PTO operation would stop (output frequency = 0).

10-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PTO Jog Frequency (JF)

Sub-Element Description

JF - Jog Frequency (Hz)

Address Data Format

PTO:0.JF

word (INT)

Range

0 to 20,000

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO JF (Jog Frequency) variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during all Jog phases. This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven, the mechanics of the application, or the device/components being moved).

Data less than zero and greater than 20,000 generates a PTO error.

PTO Jog Pulse (JP)

Sub-Element Description

JP - Jog Pulse

Address

PTO:0/JP bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO JP (Jog Pulse) bit is used to instruct the PTO sub-system to generate a single pulse. The width is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file.

Jog Pulse operation is only possible under the following conditions:

• PTO sub-system in idle

• Jog continuous not active

• Enable not active

The JP bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Instructs the PTO sub-system to generate a single Jog Pulse

• Cleared (0) - Arms the PTO Jog Pulse sub-system

10-16

Using High Speed Outputs

PTO Jog Pulse Status (JPS)

Sub-Element Description

JPS - Jog Pulse Status

Address

PTO:0/JPS bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO JPS (Jog Pulse Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO has generated a Jog Pulse.

The JPS bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction outputs a Jog Pulse

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PTO instruction exits the Jog Pulse state

Note:

The output (jog) pulse is normally complete with the JP bit set. The JPS bit remains set until the JP bit is cleared (0 = off).

PTO Jog Continuous (JC)

Sub-Element Description

JC - Jog Continuous

Address

PTO:0/JC bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

The PTO JC (Jog Continuous) bit instructs the PTO sub-system to generate continuous pulses. The frequency generated is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file. Jog Continuous operation is only possible under the following conditions:

• PTO sub-system in idle

• Jog Pulse not active

• Enable not active

The JC bit operates as follows:

• Set (1) - Instructs the PTO sub-system to generate continuous Jog Pulses

• Cleared (0) - The PTO sub-system does not generate Jog Pulses

When the Jog Continuous bit is cleared, the current output pulse is truncated.

10-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PTO Jog Continuous Status (JCS)

Sub-Element Description

JCS - Jog Continuous Status

Address

PTO:0/JCS bit

Data Format Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

The PTO JCS (Jog Continuous Status) bit is controlled by the PTO sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is generating continuous Jog Pulses. The JCS bit operates as follows:

Set (1) - Whenever a PTO instruction is generating continuous Jog Pulses

Cleared (0) - Whenever a PTO instruction is not generating continuous Jog Pulses.

PTO Error Code (ER)

Sub-Element Description

ER - Error Code

Address Data Format

PTO:0.ER

word (INT)

Range

-2 to 7

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

PTO ER (Error Codes) detected by the PTO sub-system are displayed in this register.

The error codes are shown in the table below:

Table 10-5: Pulse Train Output Error Codes

Error

Code

-2

-1

0

1

2

Non-User

Fault

Yes

Yes

---

No

No

Recoverable

Fault

No

No

---

No

No

Instruction

Errors

No

No

Yes

Yes

Error Name Description

Overlap Error An output overlap is detected. Multiple functions are assigned to the same physical output. This is a configuration error. The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute.

Example: PTO0 and PTO1 are both attempting to use a single output.

Output Error An invalid output has been specified. Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid choices. This is a configuration error. The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute.

Normal Normal (0 = no error present)

Hardstop

Detected

This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected. This error does not fault the controller. It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed.

Output Forced

Error

The configured PTO output (2 or 3) is currently forced. The forced condition must be removed for the PTO to operate.

This error does not fault the controller. It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed.

10-18

Using High Speed Outputs

Table 10-5: Pulse Train Output Error Codes

Error

Code

3

4

5

6

7

Non-User

Fault

No

No

No

No

Yes

Recoverable

Fault

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Instruction

Errors

No

No

Yes

No

No

Error Name Description

Frequency

Error

Accel/Decel

Error

The operating frequency value (OFS) is less than 0 or greater than 20,000. This error faults the controller. It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine.

The accel/decel parameters (ADP) are:

• less than zero

• greater than half the total output pulses to be generated

(TOP)

Accel/Decel exceeds limit (See page 10-15.)

This error faults the controller. It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine.

Jog Error PTO is in the idle state and two or more of the following are set:

• Enable (EN) bit set

• Jog Pulse (JP) bit set

• Jog Continuous (JC) bit set

This error does not fault the controller. It is automatically cleared when the error condition is removed.

Jog

Frequency

Error

The jog frequency (JF) value is less than 0 or greater than

20,000. This error faults the controller. It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine.

Length Error The total output pulses to be generated (TOP) is less than zero. This error faults the controller. It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine.

10-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PWM - Pulse Width Modulation Instruction

Instruction Type: output

Table 10-6: Execution Time for the PWM Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

110.50

µ s

False

21.63

µ s

PWM Function

The PWM function allows a field device to be controlled by a PWM wave form. The

PWM profile has two primary components:

• Frequency to be generated

• Duty Cycle interval

The PWM instruction, along with the HSC and PTO functions, are different than all other controller instructions. Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor. This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these instructions.

The interface to the PWM sub-system is accomplished by scanning a PWM instruction in the main program file (file #2), or by scanning a PWM instruction in any of the subroutine files. A typical operating sequence of a PWM instruction is as follows:

1. The rung that a PWM instruction is on is solved true (the PWM is started).

2. A waveform at the specified frequency is produced.

3. The RUN phase is active. A waveform at the specified frequency with the specified duty cycle is output.

4. The rung that the PWM is on is solved false.

5. The PWM instruction is IDLE.

10-20

Using High Speed Outputs

While the PWM instruction is being executed, status bits and data are updated as the main controller continues to operate. Because the PWM instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system, the status bits and other information are updated each time the PWM instruction is scanned while it is running. This provides the control program access to PWM status while it is running.

Note:

PWM status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller. Worst case latency is the maximum scan of the controller. This condition can be minimized a by placing a PWM instruction in the STI (selectable timed interrupt) file, or by adding PWM instructions to your program to increase how often a PWM instruction is scanned.

Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Function File

Within the PWM function file are two PWM elements. Each element can be set to control either output 2 (O0:0/2) or output 3 (O0:0/3).

10-21

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary

The variables within each PWM element, along with what type of behavior and access the control program has to those variables, are listed individually below.

Table 10-7: Pulse Width Modulated Function File (PWM:0)

Element Description

OUT - PWM Output

RS - PWM Run Status

IS - PWM Idle Status

ED - PWM Error Detection

NS - PWM Normal Operation

EH - PWM Enable Hard Stop

ES - PWM Enable Status

Address Data

Format

PWM:0.OUT

word (INT)

PWM:0/RS

PWM:0/IS

PWM:0/ED

PWM:0/NS

PWM:0/EH

PWM:0/ES bit bit bit bit bit bit

Range

2 or 3

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

Type User

Program

Access

read only status status status status status read only read only read only read only control read/write status read only

OF - PWM Output Frequency PWM:0.OF

word (INT) 0 to 20,000 control read/write

OFS - PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM:0.OFS

word (INT) 0 to 20,000 status read only

DC - PWM Duty Cycle

DCS - PWM Duty Cycle Status

ER - PWM Error Codes

PWM:0.DC

PWM:0.DCS

PWM:0.ER

word (INT) word (INT) word (INT)

1 to 1000

1 to 1000

-2 to 5 control status status read/write read only read only

PWM Output (OUT)

For More

Information

10-22

10-23

10-23

10-23

10-24

10-24

10-24

10-25

10-25

10-25

10-26

10-26

Element Description

OUT - PWM Output

Address Data Format

PWM:0.OUT

word (INT)

Range

2 or 3

Type User Program Access

status read only

The PWM OUT (Output) variable defines the physical output (O0:0/2 or O0:0/3) that the PWM instruction controls. This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written, and cannot be set by the user program

• PWM modulates output 2 (O0:0.0/2) of the embedded outputs (1764-28BXB)

• PWM modulates output 3 (O0:0.0/3) of the embedded outputs (1764-28BXB)

10-22

Using High Speed Outputs

PWM Run Status (RS)

Element Description

RS - PWM Run Status

Address

PWM:0/RS

Data Format

bit

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program Access

status read only

The PWM RS (Run Status) bit is controlled by the PWM sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program.

• Set (1) - Whenever the PWM instruction is within the run phase of the output profile.

• Cleared (0) - Whenever the PWM instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile.

PWM Idle Status (IS)

Element Description

IS - PWM Idle Status

Address

PWM:0/IS

Data Format

bit

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program Access

status read only

The PWM IS (Idle Status) is controlled by the PWM sub-system and represents no

PWM activity. It can be used in the control program by an input instruction.

• Set (1) - PWM sub-system is in an idle state.

• Cleared (0) - PWM sub-system is not in an idle state (it is running).

PWM Error Detected (ED)

Element Description

ED - PWM Error Detection

Address

PWM:0/ED

Data Format

bit

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program Access

status read only

The PWM ED (Error Detected) bit is controlled by the PWM sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM instruction is in an error state. If an error state is detected, the specific error is identified in the error code register (PWM:0.ED).

• Set (1) - Whenever a PWM instruction is in an error state.

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PWM instruction is not in an error state.

10-23

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PWM Normal Operation (NS)

Element Description

NS - PWM Normal Operation

Address

PWM:0/NS

Data Format

bit

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program Access

status read only

The PWM NS (Normal Operation) bit is controlled by the PWM sub-system. It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM is in its normal state. A normal state is defined as ACCEL, RUN, or

DECEL with no PWM errors.

• Set (1) - Whenever a PWM instruction is in its normal state.

• Cleared (0) - Whenever a PWM instruction is not in its normal state.

PWM Enable Hardstop (EH)

Element Description

EH - PWM Enable Hard Stop

Address

PWM:0/EH

Data Format

bit

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The PWM EH (Enable Hard Stop) bit stops the PWM sub-system immediately. A

PWM hard stop generates a PWM sub-system error.

• Set (1) - Instructs the PWM sub-system to stop its output modulation immediately

(output off = 0).

• Cleared (0) - Normal operation.

PWM Enable Status (ES)

Element Description

ES - PWM Enable Status

Address

PWM:0/ES

Data Format

bit

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program Access

status read only

The PWM ES (Enable Status) is controlled by the PWM sub-system. When the rung preceding the PWM instruction is solved true, the PWM instruction is enabled, and the enable status bit is set. When the rung preceding the PWM instruction transitions to a false state, the enable status bit is reset (0) immediately.

• Set (1) - PWM is enabled.

• Cleared (0) - PWM has completed or the rung preceding the PWM is false.

10-24

Using High Speed Outputs

PWM Output Frequency (OF)

Element Description

OF - PWM Output Frequency

Address

PWM:0.OF

Data Format

word (INT)

Range Type User Program Access

0 to 20,000 control read/write

The PWM OF (Output Frequency) variable defines the frequency of the PWM function. This frequency can be changed at any time.

PWM Operating Frequency Status (OFS)

Element Description Address Data Format

OFS - PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM:0.OFS

word (INT)

Range Type User Program Access

0 to 20,000 status read only

The PWM OFS (Output Frequency Status) is generated by the PWM sub-system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency produced by the

PWM sub-system.

PWM Duty Cycle (DC)

Element Description

DC - PWM Duty Cycle

Address

PWM:0.DC

Data Format

word (INT)

Range

1 to 1000

Type User Program Access

control read/write

The PWM DC (Duty Cycle) variable controls the output signal produced by the PWM sub-system. Changing this variable in the control program changes the output waveform. Typical values and output waveform:

• DC = 1000: 100% Output ON (constant, no waveform)

• DC = 750: 75% Output ON, 25% output OFF

• DC = 500: 50% Output ON, 50% output OFF

• DC = 250: 25% Output ON, 75% output OFF

• DC = 0: 0% Output OFF (constant, no waveform)

10-25

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PWM Duty Cycle Status (DCS)

Element Description

DCS - PWM Duty Cycle Status

Address Data Format

PWM:0.DCS

word (INT)

Range

1 to 1000

Type User Program Access

status read only

The PWM DCS (Duty Cycle Status) provides feedback from the PWM sub-system.

The Duty Cycle Status variable can be used within an input instruction on a rung of logic to provide PWM system status to the remaining control program.

PWM Error Code (ER)

Element Description

ER - PWM Error Codes

Address

PWM:0.ER

Data Format

word (INT)

Range

-2 to 5

Type User Program Access

status read only

PWM ER (Error Codes) detected by the PWM sub-system are displayed in this register. The table identifies known errors.

Table 10-8: PWM Error Codes

Error

Code

-2

-1

4

5

0

1

2

3

Non-User

Fault

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Recoverable

Fault

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Instruction

Errors

Error Name

No Overlap

Error

No Output

Error

Description

An output overlap is detected. Multiple functions are assigned to the same physical output. This is a configuration error. The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute. Example: PWM0 and

PWM1 are both attempting to use a single output.

An invalid output has been specified. Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid choices. This is a configuration error. The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute.

Yes

Yes

Normal Normal (0 = no error present)

Hardstop

Error

This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected. This error does not fault the controller. It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed.

Output

Forced

Error

The configured PWM output (2 or 3) is currently forced. The forced condition must be removed for the PWM to operate.

This error does not fault the controller. It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed.

No

No

Frequency

Error

The frequency value is less than 0 or greater than 20,000. This error faults the controller. It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault

Routine.

Reserved

Duty Cycle

Error

The PWM duty cycle is either less than zero or greater than 1000.

This error faults the controller. It can be cleared by logic within the User

Fault Routine.

10-26

Programming Instructions Overview

11

Programming Instructions Overview

Instruction Set

The following table shows the MicroLogix 1500 programming instructions listed within their functional group.

Functional Group

Relay-Type (Bit)

Timer and Counter The timer and counter instructions control operations based on time or the number of events.

TON, TOF, RTO, CTU, CTD, RES

Compare The compare instructions compare values by using a specific compare operation.

EQU, NEQ, LES, LEQ, GRT, GEQ, MEQ, LIM

Math

Description

The relay-type (bit) instructions monitor and control the status of bits.

XIC, XIO, OTE, OTL, OTU, OSR, ONS, OSF

Conversion

The math instructions perform arithmetic operations.

ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, CLR, SQR, SCL, SCP

The conversion instructions multiplex and de-multiplex data and perform conversions between binary and decimal values. DCD, ENC, TOD, FRD

Logical

Move

File

Sequencer

Program Control

Input and Output

User Interrupt

Process Control

Communications

Page

12-1

13-1

14-1

15-1

16-1

The logical instructions perform bit-wise logical operations on words.

AND, OR, XOR, NOT

The move instructions modify and move words.

MOV, MVM

17-1

18-1

The file instructions perform operations on file data.

COP, FLL, BSL, BSR, FFL, FFU, LFL, LFU

19-1

Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines that have consistent and repeatable operations. SQC, SQO, SQL

20-1

21-1

The program flow instructions change the flow of ladder program execution.

JMP, LBL, JSR, SBR, RET, SUS, TND, MCR, END

The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans.

IIM, IOM, REF

22-1

23-1

The user interrupt instructions allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events.

STS, INT, UID, UIE, UIF

The process control instruction provides closed-loop control.

PID

The communication instructions read or write data to another station.

MSG, SVC

24-1

25-1

11-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using the Instruction Descriptions

Throughout this manual, each instruction (or group of similar instructions) has a table similar to the one shown below. This table provides information for all sub-elements

(or components) of an instruction or group of instructions. This table identifies the type of compatible address that can be used for each sub-element of an instruction or group of instructions in a data file or function file. The definitions of the terms used in these tables are listed below this example table.

Table 11-1: Valid Addressing Modes and File Types - Example Table

Data Files Function Files

Parameter

Address

Mode

1

Address

Level

Source A

Source B

Destination

• • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

• •

• •

• •

Important:

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DATI, TPI, CSF, and ISF files.

The terms used within the table are defined as follows:

• Parameter - The parameter is the information you supply to the instruction. It can be an address, a value, or an instruction-specific parameter such as a timebase.

Data Files - See “Data Files” on page 6-5.

Function Files - See “Function Files” on page 6-12.

CSF - See “Communications Status File” on page 6-13.

ISF - See “Input/Output Status File” on page 6-17.

• Addressing Level - Address levels describe the granularity at which an instruction will allow an operand to be used. For example, relay type instructions (XIC, XIO, etc.) must be programmed to the bit level, timer instructions (TON, TOF, etc.) must be programmed to the element level (timers have 3 words per element) and math instructions (ADD, SUB, etc.) must be programmed to the word or long word level.

11-2

Programming Instructions Overview

Addressing Modes

The MicroLogix 1500 supports three types of data addressing:

• Immediate

• Direct

• Indirect

The MicroLogix 1500 does not support indexed addressing.

How or when each type is used depends on the instruction being programmed, and the type of elements specified within the operands of the instructions. By supporting these three addressing methods, the MicroLogix 1500 allows incredible flexibility in how data can be monitored or manipulated. Each of the addressing modes are described below.

Immediate Addressing

Immediate addressing is primarily used to assign numeric constants within instructions. For example: You require a 10 second timer, so you program a timer with a 1 second time base, and a preset value of 10. The numbers 1 and 10 in this example are both forms of immediate addressing.

Direct Addressing

When you use direct addressing, you define a specific data location within the controller. Any data location that is supported by the elements of an operand within the instruction being programmed can be used. In this example we are illustrating a limit instruction, where.

• Low Limit = This is an immediate value entered from the programming software.

• Test Value = TPI:TP0 (This is the current position/value of trim pot 0.)

• High Limit = N7:17 (This is the data resident in Integer file 7, element 17.)

TPI:TP0 and N7:17 are direct addressing examples

11-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Indirect Addressing

Indirect addressing allows components within the address to be used as pointers to other data locations within the controller. This functionality can be especially useful for certain types of applications, recipe management, batch processing and many others. Indirect addressing can also be difficult to understand and troubleshoot. It is recommended that you only use indirect addressing when it is required by the application being developed.

The MicroLogix 1500 supports indirection (indirect addressing) for Files, Words and

Bits. To define which components of an address are to be indirected, a closed bracket

“[ ]” is used. The following examples illustrate how to use indirect addressing.

Indirect Addressing of a Word

0000

B3:0

0

Add

Source A N7:[N10:1]

Source B

0<

1234

Dest

1234<

N11:33

0<

• Address: N7:[N10:1]

• In this example, the element number to be used for source A in the ADD instruction is defined by the number located in N10:1. If the value of location

N10:1 = 15, the ADD instruction will operate as “N7:15 + Source B”. When the

ADD instruction is scanned, N10:1 specifies the element to be used in the ADD instruction.

• In this example, integer file 7 is the source A file. The element specified by N10:1 must be between 0 and 255, because all MicroLogix 1500 data files have a maximum size of 256 elements.

Note:

If a number larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in

N10:1 (in this example), data integrity cannot be guaranteed, because a file boundary will be crossed.

11-4

Programming Instructions Overview

Indirect Addressing of File

0001 Limit Test

Low Lim

Test

High Lim

10

10<

N50:100

10<

25

25<

B3:0

0

Copy File

Source #N[N50:100]:10

Dest

Length

#N7:0

15

• Address: N[N50:100]:10

• Description: In this example, the element to be used for the indirection is

N50:100. The data in N50:100 will define the data file number to be used in the instruction. In this example, the copy instruction source A is defined by

N[N50:100]:10. When the instruction is scanned, the data in N50:100 is used to define the data file to be used for the COP instruction. If the value of location

N50:100 = 27, this instruction will copy 15 elements of data from N27:10

(N27:10 – N27:24) to N7:0 (N7:0 – N7:14)

Note:

If a number larger than 255 is placed in N50:100 in this example, a controller fault will occur. This is because the controller has a maximum of 255 data files. In addition, the file defined by the indirection should match the file type defined by the instruction, in this example an integer file.

Note:

This example also illustrates how to perform a limit check on the indirect address. The limit instruction at the beginning of the rung is monitoring the indirect element. If the data at N50:100 is less than 10 or greater than 25, the copy instruction will not be processed. This procedure can be used to make sure an indirect address does not access data an unintended location.

11-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Indirect Addressing of Bit

0002

B3:0

[B25:0]

B3:0

10

• Address: B3/[B25:0]

• Description: In this example, the element to be used for the indirection is B25:0.

The data in B25:0 defines the bit within file B3. If the value of location B25:0 =

1017, the XIC instruction will be processed using B3/1017.

Note:

If a number larger than 4096 (or the number of elements in the data file) is placed in B25:0 in this example, data integrity cannot be guaranteed.

Exceeding the number of elements in the data file would cause the file boundary to be crossed.

These are only some of the examples that can be used, others include:

• File and Element Indirection: N[N10]:[N25:0]

• Input Slot Indirection: I[N7:0]:0

Each group of instructions may or may not allow indirection. Please review the compatibility table for each instruction to determine which elements within an instruction support indirection.

Important:

You must exercise extreme care when using indirect addressing.

Always be aware of the possibility of crossing file boundaries or pointing to data that was not intended to be used.

11-6

12

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions

Use relay-type (bit) instructions to monitor and/or control bits in a data file or function file, such as input bits or timer control-word bits. The following instructions are described in this chapter:

Instruction

XIC - Examine if Closed

XIO - Examine if Open

OTE - Output Enable

OTL - Output Latch

OTU - Output Unlatch

ONS - One Shot

OSR - One Shot Rising

OSF - One Shot Falling

Used To:

Examine a bit for an ON condition

Examine a bit for an OFF condition

Turn ON or OFF a bit (non-retentive)

Latch a bit ON (retentive)

Unlatch a bit OFF (retentive)

Detect an OFF to ON transition

Detect an OFF to ON transition

Detect an ON to OFF transition

Page

12-2

12-2

12-4

12-5

12-5

12-7

12-8

12-8

These instructions operate on a single bit of data. During operation, the processor may set or reset the bit, based on logical continuity of ladder rungs. You can address a bit as many times as your program requires.

12-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

XIC - Examine if Closed

XIO - Examine if Open

XIC

XIO

Instruction Type: input

Table 12-1: Execution Time for the XIC and XIO Instructions

Instruction

XIC and XIO

Data Size

word

When Instruction Is:

True

0.51

µ s

False

0.63

µ s

Use the XIC instruction to determine if the addressed bit is on. Use the XIO instruction to determine if the addressed bit is off.

When used on a rung, the bit address being examined can correspond to the status of real world input devices connected to the base unit or expansion I/O, or internal addresses (data or function files). Examples of devices that turn on or off:

• a push button wired to an input (addressed as I1:0/4)

• an output wired to a pilot light (addressed as O0:0/2)

• a timer controlling a light (addressed as T4:3/DN)

• a bit in the bit file (addressed as B3/16)

The instructions operate as follows:

Table 12-2: XIO and XIC Instruction Operation

Rung State

True

True

False

Addressed Bit

Off

On

--

XIC Instruction

Returns a False

Returns a True

XIO Instruction

Returns a True

Returns a False instruction is not evaluated instruction is not evaluated

12-2

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 12-3: XIC and XIO Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Operand Bit • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

Important:

• • •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

12-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

OTE - Output Energize

Instruction Type: output

Table 12-4: Execution Time for the OTE Instructions

True

1.49

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.98

µ s

Use an OTE instruction to turn a bit location on when rung conditions are evaluated as true and off when the rung is evaluated as false. An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light (addressed as O0:0/4). OTE instructions are reset (turned OFF) when:

• You enter or return to the program or remote program mode or power is restored.

• The OTE is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset (MCR) zone.

Note:

A bit that is set within a subroutine using an OTE instruction remains set until the OTE is scanned again.

!

ATTENTION: If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL, OTE, or UIE, this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung (last instruction on last branch). It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung.

!

ATTENTION: Never use an output address at more than one place in your logic program. Always be fully aware of the load represented by the output coil.

12-4

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 12-5: OTE Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Destination Bit

• • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

• • • •

Important:

• • • •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

OTL - Output Latch

OTU - Output Unlatch

Instruction Type: output

Table 12-6: Execution Time for the OTL and OTU Instructions

Instruction

OTL

OTU

True

1.06

µ s

1.02

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The OTL and OTU instructions are retentive output instructions. OTL turns on a bit, while OTU turns off a bit. These instructions are usually used in pairs, with both instructions addressing the same bit.

!

ATTENTION: If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL, OTE, or UIE, this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung (last instruction on last branch). It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung.

12-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Since these are latching outputs, once set (or reset), they remain set (or reset) regardless of the rung condition.

!

ATTENTION: In the event of a power loss, any OTL controlled bit

(including field devices) energizes with the return of power if the OTL bit was set when power was lost.

!

ATTENTION: Under fatal error conditions, physical outputs are turned off. Once the error conditions are cleared, the controller resumes operation using the data table value.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 12-7: OTL and OTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Operand Bit •

• • • • • •

• • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

Important:

• • • •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

12-6

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions

ONS - One Shot

N7:1

ONS

0

Instruction Type: input

Table 12-8: Execution Time for the ONS Instructions

True

1.38 µs

When Rung Is:

False

1.85 µs

The ONS instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time. After the false-to-true rung transition, the ONS instruction remains true for one program scan. The output then turns OFF and remains OFF until the logic preceding the ONS instruction is false (this re-activates the ONS instruction).

The ONS Storage Bit is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan. This bit is used to remember the false-to-true rung transition.

Table 12-9: ONS Instruction Operation

Rung Transition

false-to-true (one scan) true-to-true

Storage Bit

storage bit is set storage bit remains set true-to-false, false-to-false storage bit is cleared

Rung State after Execution

true false false

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 12-10: ONS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Storage Bit

• • • •

12-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

OSR - One Shot Rising

OSF - One Shot Falling

Instruction Type: output

Table 12-11: Execution Time for the OSR and OSF Instructions

Instruction

OSR

OSF

True

2.71 µs

1.88 µs

When Rung Is:

False

2.43 µs

3.01 µs

Use the OSR and OSF instructions to trigger an event to occur one time. These instructions trigger an event based on a change of rung state, as follows:

• Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the false-to-true

(rising edge) change of state of the rung.

• Use the OSF instruction when an event must start based on the true-to-false

(falling edge) change of state of the rung.

These instructions use two parameters, Storage Bit and Output Bit.

• Storage Bit - This is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan.

• Output Bit - This is the bit address which is set based on a false-to-true (OSR) or true-to-false (OSF) rung transition. The Output Bit is set for one program scan.

To re-activate the OSR, the rung must become false. To re-activate the OSF, the rung must become true.

Table 12-12: OSR Storage and Output Bit Operation

Rung State Transition

false-to-true (one scan) true-to-true true-to-false and false-to-false

Storage Bit

bit is set bit is set bit is reset

Table 12-13: OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation

Rung State Transition

true-to-false (one scan) false-to-false

Storage Bit

bit is reset bit is reset

Output Bit

bit is set bit is reset bit is reset

Output Bit

bit is set bit is reset

12-8

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions

Table 12-13: OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation

Rung State Transition

false-to-true and true-to-true

Storage Bit

bit is set

Output Bit

bit is reset

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 12-14: OSR and OSF Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Storage Bit

Output Bit • •

• •

• • • • •

12-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

12-10

Timer and Counter Instructions

13

Timer and Counter Instructions

Timers and counters are output instructions that let you control operations based on time or a number of events. The following Timer and Counter Instructions are described in this chapter:

Instruction

TON - Timer, On-Delay

TOF - Timer, Off-Delay

RTO - Retentive Timer On

CTU - Count Up

CTD - Count Down

RES - Reset

Used To:

Delay turning on an output on a true rung

Delay turning off an output on a false rung

Delay turning on an output from a true rung. The accumulator is retentive.

Count up

Count down

Reset the RTO and counter’s ACC and status bits (not used with TOF timers).

Page

13-4

13-5

13-6

13-10

13-10

13-11

See “HSL - High Speed Counter Load” on page 9-29 for information on the High

Speed Counter function.

Timer Instructions Overview

Timers in a MicroLogix 1500 reside in a timer file. A timer file can be assigned as any unused data file. When a data file is used as a timer file, each timer element within the file has three sub-elements. These sub-elements are:

• Status/Reserved

• Preset - This is the value that the timer must reach before the timer times out.

When the accumulator reaches this value, the DN status bit is set (TON and RTO only). The preset data range is from 0 to 32767. The minimum required update interval is 2.55 seconds regardless of the timebase.

• Accumulator - The accumulator counts the Timebase intervals. It represents elapsed time. The accumulator data range is from 0 to 32767.

13-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Timers can be set to any one of three time bases:

Table 13-1: Timer Base Settings

Time Base

0.001 seconds

0.01 seconds

1.00 seconds

Timing Range

0 - 32.767 seconds

0 - 327.67 seconds

0 - 32,767 seconds

Each timer address is made of a 3-word element. Word 0 is the control word, word 1 stores the preset value, and word 2 stores the accumulated value.

Table 13-2: Timer File

Word

Word 0

Word 1

Word 2

EN = Timer Enable Bit

TT = Timer Timing Bit

DN = Timer Done Bit

15

EN

Bit

14 13 12 11 10 9 8

7

6 5 4 3 2 1 0

TT DN Internal Use

Preset Value

Accumulated Value

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 13-3: Timer Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files

1

Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Timer

Timebase

Preset

Accumulator

1. Valid for Timer Files only.

Note:

Use an RES instruction to reset a timer’s accumulator and status bits.

13-2

Timer and Counter Instructions

Timer Accuracy

Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete.

Table 13-4: Timer Accuracy

Time Base

0.001 seconds

0.01 seconds

1.00 seconds

Accuracy

-0.001 to 0.00

-0.01 to 0.00

-1.00 to 0.00

If your program scan can exceed 2.5 seconds, repeat the timer instruction on a different rung (identical logic and 50% away from this rung) run so that the rung is scanned within these limits.

Using the enable bit (EN) of a timer is an easy way to repeat its complex conditional logic at another rung in your ladder program.

Note:

Timing could be inaccurate if Jump (JMP), Label (LBL), Jump to Subroutine

(JSR), or Subroutine (SBR) instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing. If the skip duration is within 2.5 seconds, no time will be lost; if the skip duration exceeds 2.5 seconds, an undetectable timing error occurs. When using subroutines, a timer must be scanned at least every 2.5 seconds to prevent a timing error.

13-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

TON - Timer, On-Delay

Instruction Type: output

Table 13-5: Execution Time for the TON Instructions

Instruction

TON

When Rung Is:

True

15.48

µ s

False

1.14

µ s

Use the TON instruction to delay turning on an output. The TON instruction begins to count timebase intervals when rung conditions become true. As long as rung conditions remain true, the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached. When the accumulator equals the preset, timing stops.

The accumulator is reset (0) when rung conditions go false, regardless of whether the timer has timed out. TON timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes.

Timer instructions use the following status bits:

Table 13-6: Timer Status Bits, Timer Word 0 (Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example.) bit 13 - T4:0/DN bit 14 - T4:0/TT bit15 - T4:0/EN

Bit

DN - timer done

TT - timer timing

EN - timer enable

Is Set When:

accumulated value

≥ preset value rung state goes false rung state is true and accumulated value < preset value rung state is true

And Remains Set Until One of the

Following Occurs:

rung state goes false

DN bit is set rung state goes false

13-4

Timer and Counter Instructions

TOF - Timer, Off-Delay

Instruction Type: output

Table 13-7: Execution Time for the TOF Instructions

Instruction

TOF

True

1.85

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

12.32

µ s

Use the TOF instruction to delay turning off an output. The TOF instruction begins to count timebase intervals when rung conditions become false. As long as rung conditions remain false, the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached.

The accumulator is reset (0) when rung conditions go true, regardless of whether the timer has timed out. TOF timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes.

Timer instructions use the following status bits:

Table 13-8: Timer Status Bits, Timer Word 0 (Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example.) bit 13 - T4:0/DN bit 14 - T4:0/TT bit15 - T4:0/EN

Bit

DN - timer done

TT - timer timing

EN - timer enable

Is Set When: And Remains Set Until One of the

Following Occurs:

rung conditions are true rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value rung conditions are false and the accumulated value is less than the preset value rung conditions go true or when the done bit is reset rung conditions are true rung conditions go false

!

ATTENTION: Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits, do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction. If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset, unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur.

13-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

RTO - Retentive Timer On

Instruction Type: output

Table 13-9: Execution Time for the RTO Instructions

Instruction

RTO

When Rung Is:

True

15.73

µ s

False

1.85

µ s

Use the RTO instruction to delay turning “on” an output. The RTO begins to count timebase intervals when the rung conditions become true. As long as the rung conditions remain true, the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached. The RTO retains the accumulated value when the following occur:

• rung conditions become false

• you change the processor mode from run or test to program

• the processor loses power

• a fault occurs

When you return the processor to the RUN or TEST mode, and/or the rung conditions go true, timing continues from the retained accumulated value. RTO timers are retained through power cycles and mode changes.

Timer instructions use the following status bits:

Table 13-10: Counter Status Bits, Timer Word 0 (Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example.) bit 13 - T4:0/DN bit 14 - T4:0/TT bit15 - T4:0/EN

Bit

DN - timer done

TT - timer timing

EN - timer enable

Is Set When:

accumulated value

≥ preset value the appropriate RES instruction is enabled rung state is true and accumulated value < preset value rung state is true

And Remains Set Until One of the

Following Occurs:

• rung state goes false, or

• DN bit is set rung state goes false

To reset the accumulator of a retentive timer, use an RES instruction see

“RES - Reset” on page 13-11.

13-6

Timer and Counter Instructions

How Counters Work

The figure below demonstrates how a counter works. The count value must remain in the range of -32,768 to +32,767. If the count value goes above +32,767, the counter status overflow bit (OV) is set (1). If the count goes below -32,768, the counter status underflow bit (UN) is set (1). A reset (RES) instruction is used to reset (0) the counter.

-32,768

Underflow

0

Count Up

Counter Accumulator Value

Count Down

+32,768

Overflow

Using the CTU and CTD Instructions

Counter instructions use the following parameters:

• Counter - This is the address of the counter within the data file. All counters are 3word data elements. Word 0 contains the Status Bits, Word 1 contains the Preset and Word 2 contains the Accumulated Value.

Word

Word 0

Word 1

Word 2

15

CU

CU = Count Up Enable Bit

CD = Count Down Enable Bit

DN = Count Done Bit

OV = Count Overflow Bit

UN = Count Underflow Bit

Bit

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CD DN OV UN Not

Preset Value

Accumulated Value

• Preset - When the accumulator reaches this value, the DN bit is set. The preset data range is from -32768 to 32767.

13-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

• Accumulator - The accumulator contains the current count. The accumulator data range is from -32768 to 32767.

The accumulated value is incremented (CTU) or decremented (CTD) on each false-to-true rung transition. The accumulated value is retained when the rung condition again becomes false, and when power is cycled on the controller. The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset (RES) instruction that has the same address as the counter.

Note:

The counter continues to count when the accumulator is greater than the

CTU preset and when the accumulator is less than the CTD preset.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 13-11: CTD and CTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files

1

Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Counter

Preset

Accumulator

1. Valid for Counter Files only.

• •

13-8

Timer and Counter Instructions

Using Counter File Status Bits

Like the accumulated value, the counter status bits are also retentive until reset.

Table 13-12: CTU Instruction Counter Status Bits, Counter Word 0 (Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example.) bit 12 - C5:0/OV bit 13 - C5:0/DN bit15 - C5:0/CU

Bit

OV - overflow indicator

DN - done indicator

CU - count up enable

Is Set When: And Remains Set Until One of the

Following Occurs:

the accumulated value wraps from

+32,767 to -32,768 and continues a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled to count up accumulated value

≥ preset value • accumulated value < preset value or,

• a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled rung state is true • rung state is false

• a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled

Table 13-13: CTD Instruction Counter Status Bits, Counter Word 0 (Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example.)

Bit Is Set When: bit 11 - C5:0/UN UN - underflow indicator

the accumulated value wraps from

bit 13 - C5:0/DN DN - done indicator

-32,768 to +32,767 and continues to count down a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled accumulated value

≥ preset value • accumulated value

< preset value or,

• a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled

bit 14 - C5:0/CD CD - count down enable

rung state is true

And Remains Set Until One of the

Following Occurs:

• rung state is false

• a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled

13-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

CTU - Count Up

CTD - Count Down

Instruction Type: output

Table 13-14: Execution Time for the CTU and CTD Instructions

Instruction

CTU

CTD

Data Size

word word

True

7.80

µ s

8.30

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

8.40

µ s

8.30

µ s

The CTU and CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false-to-true rung transition. When the CTU rung makes a false-to-true transition, the accumulated value is incremented by one count. The CTD instruction operates the same, except the count is decremented.

Note:

If the signal is coming from a field device wired to an input on the controller, the on and off duration of the incoming signal must not be more than twice the controller scan time (assuming 50% duty cycle). This condition is needed to enable the counter to detect false-to-true transitions from the incoming device.

13-10

Timer and Counter Instructions

RES - Reset

Instruction Type: output

Table 13-15: Execution Time for the RES Instructions

Instruction Data Size

RES word

True

4.94

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The RES instruction resets timers, counters, and control elements. When the RES instruction is executed, it resets the data defined by the RES instruction.

The RES instruction has no effect when the rung state is false. The following table shows which elements are modified:

Table 13-16: RES Instruction Operation

When using a RES instruction with a:

Timer Element

The controller resets the:

ACC value to 0

DN bit

TT bit

EN bit

Counter Element

The controller resets the:

ACC value to 0

OV bit

UN bit

DN bit

CU bit

CD bit

Control Element

The controller resets the:

POS value to 0

EN bit

EU bit

DN bit

EM bit

ER bit

UL bit

!

ATTENTION: Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits, do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction. If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset, unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur.

13-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 13-17: RES Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Structure • • •

13-12

Compare Instructions

14

Compare Instructions

Use these input instructions when you want to compare values of data.

Instruction

EQU - Equal

NEQ - Not Equal

LES - Less Than

LEQ - Less Than or Equal To

GRT - Greater Than

GEQ - Greater Than or Equal To

MEQ - Mask Compare for Equal

LIM - Limit Test

Used To:

Test whether two values are equal (=)

Test whether one value is not equal to a second value (

)

Test whether one value is less than a second value (<)

Test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value (

)

Test whether one value is greater than a second value (>)

Test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value (

)

Test portions of two values to see whether they are equal

Test whether one value is within the range of two other values

Page

14-3

14-3

14-4

14-5

14-4

14-5

14-6

14-8

14-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using the Compare Instructions

Most of the compare instructions use two parameters, Source A and Source B (MEQ and LIM have an additional parameter, and are described later in this chapter). Both sources cannot be immediate values. The valid data ranges for these instructions are:

• -32768 to 32767 (word)

• -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word)

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 14-1: Compare Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source A

Source B

• • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

Important:

• •

• •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

14-2

Compare Instructions

EQU - Equal

NEQ - Not Equal

Instruction Type: input

Table 14-2: Execution Time for the EQU and NEQ Instructions

Instruction

EQU

NEQ

Data Size

word long word word long word

True

1.30

µ s

2.27

µ s

1.30

µ s

1.80

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.94

µ s

1.41

µ s

0.94

µ s

2.20

µ s

The EQU instruction is used to test whether one value is equal to a second value. The

NEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is not equal to a second value.

Table 14-3: EQU and NEQ Instruction Operation

Instruction

EQU

NEQ

Relationship of Source Values

A = B

A

B

A = B

A

B

Resulting Rung State

true false false true

14-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

GRT - Greater Than

LES - Less Than

Instruction Type: input

Table 14-4: Execution Time for the GRT and LES Instructions

Instruction

GRT

LES

Data Size

word long word word long word

True

1.30

µ s

2.59

µ s

1.22

µ s

2.59

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.94

µ s

2.27

µ s

1.02

µ s

2.27

µ s

The GRT instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than a second value.

The LES instruction is used to test whether one value is less than a second value.

A

Table 14-5: GRT and LES Instruction Operation

Instruction

GRT

LES

Relationship of Source Values

A > B

A

B

A

<

B

B

Resulting Rung State

true false false true

14-4

Compare Instructions

GEQ - Greater Than or Equal To

LEQ - Less Than or Equal To

Instruction Type: input

Table 14-6: Execution Time for the GEQ and LEQ Instructions

Instruction

GEQ

LEQ

Data Size

word long word word long word

True

1.30

µ s

2.59

µ s

1.30

µ s

2.59

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.94

µ s

2.27

µ s

1.02

µ s

2.27

µ s

The GEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value. The LEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value.

Table 14-7: GEQ and LEQ Instruction Operation

Instruction

GEQ

LEQ

Relationship of Source Values

A

B

A < B

A > B

A

B

Resulting Rung State

true false false true

14-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MEQ - Mask Compare for Equal

Instruction Type: input

Table 14-8: Execution Time for the MEQ Instructions

Data Size

word long word

True

2.07

µ s

3.37

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

1.97

µ s

2.58

µ s

The MEQ instruction is used to compare whether one value (source) is equal to a second value (compare) through a mask. The source and the compare are logically

ANDed with the mask. Then, these results are compared to each other. If the resulting values are equal, the rung state is true. If the resulting values are not equal, the rung state is false. For example:

Source: Compare:

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Mask: Mask:

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Intermediate Result: Intermediate Result:

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Comparison of the Intermediate Results: not equal

The source, mask, and compare values must all be of the same data size (either word or long word). The data ranges for mask and compare are:

• -32768 to 32767 (word)

• -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word)

The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 to FFFF FFFF.

14-6

Compare Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 14-9: MEQ Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Mask

Compare

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

Important:

• •

• •

• •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

14-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

LIM - Limit Test

Instruction Type: input

Table 14-10: Execution Time for the LIM Instructions

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

6.43

µ s

12.41

µ s

False

5.79

µ s

11.59

µ s

The LIM instruction is used to test for values within or outside of a specified range.

The LIM instruction is evaluated based on the Low Limit, Test, and High Limit values as shown in the following table.

Table 14-11: LIM Instruction Operation Based on Low Limit, Test, and High Limit Values

When: And: Rung State

Low Limit

High Limit

Low Limit

High Limit

Low Limit

Test

High Limit true false

High Limit < Low Limit

High Limit < Low Limit

Test < Low Limit or Test > High Limit

High Limit < Test

<

Low Limit

Test

High Limit or Test

Low Limit false true

The Low Limit, Test, and High Limit values can be word addresses or constants, restricted to the following combinations:

• If the Test parameter is a constant, both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word or long word addresses.

• If the Test parameter is a word or long word address, the Low Limit and High

Limit parameters can be either a constant, a word, or a long word address. But the

Low Limit and High Limit parameters cannot both be constants.

When mixed-sized parameters are used, all parameters are put into the format of the largest parameter. For instance, if a word and a long word are used, the word is converted to a long word.

The data ranges are:

• -32768 to 32767 (word)

• -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word)

14-8

Compare Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 14-12: LIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Low Limit

Test

High Limit

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

Important:

• •

• •

• •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

14-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

14-10

Math Instructions

15

Math Instructions

Use these output instructions to perform computations using an expression or a specific arithmetic instruction.

Instruction

ADD - Add

SUB - Subtract

MUL - Multiply

DIV - Divide

NEG - Negate

CLR - Clear

SQR - Square Root

SCL - Scale

SCP - Scale with Parameters

Used To:

Add two values

Subtract two values

Multiply two values

Divide one value by another

Change the sign of the source value and place it in the destination

Set all bits of a word to zero

Find the square root of a value

Scale a value

Scale a value to a range determined by creating a linear relationship

Page

15-4

15-4

15-5

15-5

15-6

15-6

15-10

15-7

15-8

15-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using the Math Instructions

Most math instructions use three parameters, Source A, Source B, and Destination

(additional parameters are described where applicable, later in this chapter). The mathematical operation is performed using both Source values. The result is stored in the Destination.

When using math instructions, observe the following:

• Source and Destination can be different data sizes. Sources are evaluated at the highest precision (word or long word) of the operands. Then the result is converted to the size of the destination. If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination, the overflow shall be handled as follows:

™

If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear, a saturated result is stored in the

Destination. If the Source is positive, the Destination is +32767 (word) or

+2,147,483,647 (long word). If the result is negative, the Destination is -32768

(word) or -2,147,483,648 (long word).

™

If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set, the unsigned truncated value of the

Source is stored in the Destination.

• Sources can be constants or an address, but both sources cannot be constants.

• Valid constants are -32768 to 32767 (word) and -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

(long word).

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 15-1: Math Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Address

Level

Parameter

Source A

Source B

Destination

• • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

• •

Important:

• •

• •

• •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

15-2

Math Instructions

Updates to Math Status Bits

After a math instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated. The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 in the processor status file (S2).

Table 15-2: Math Status Bits

S:0/0

S:0/1

With this Bit:

Carry

Overflow

S:0/2

Zero Bit

S:0/3

Sign Bit

S:2/14

Math Overflow Selected

1

S:5/0

Overflow Trap

1

The Controller:

sets if carry is generated; otherwise resets sets when the result of a math instruction does not fit into the destination, otherwise resets sets if result is zero, otherwise resets sets if result is negative (MSB is set), otherwise resets examines the state of this bit to determine the value of the result when an overflow occurs sets if the Overflow Bit is set, otherwise resets

1. Control bits.

Overflow Trap Bit, S:5/0

Minor error bit (S:5/0) is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero. If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a Temporary End (TND) instruction, the recoverable major error code 0020 is declared.

In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs, you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch (OTU) instruction with address S:5/0 in your program. The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement.

15-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

ADD - Add

SUB - Subtract

Instruction Type: output

Table 15-3: Execution Time for the ADD and SUB Instructions

Instruction

ADD

SUB

Data Size

word long word word long word

When Rung Is:

True

2.12

µ s

10.82

µ s

3.06

µ s

11.22

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

Use the ADD instruction to add one value to another value (Source A + Source B) and place the sum in the Destination.

Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value from another value (Source A - Source

B) and place the result in the Destination.

15-4

Math Instructions

MUL - Multiply

DIV - Divide

Instruction Type: output

Table 15-4: Execution Time for the MUL and DIV Instructions

Instruction

MUL

DIV

Data Size

word long word word long word

When Rung Is:

True

5.88

µ s

28.55

µ s

9.95

µ s

32.92

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value by another value (Source A x Source

B) and place the result in the Destination.

Use the DIV instruction to divide one value by another value (Source A/Source B) and place the result in the Destination. If the Sources are single words and the

Destination is directly addressed to S:13 (math register), then the quotient is stored in

S:14 and the remainder is stored in S:13.

15-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

NEG - Negate

Instruction Type: output

Table 15-5: Execution Time for the NEG Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

2.35

µ s

10.18

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the Source and place the result in the

Destination.

CLR - Clear

Instruction Type: output

Table 15-6: Execution Time for the CLR Instruction

Data Size

word long word

True

1.18

µ s

5.49

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

Use the CLR instruction to set the Destination to a value of zero.

15-6

Math Instructions

SCL - Scale

Instruction Type: output

Table 15-7: Execution Time for the SCL Instruction

True

9.30

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The SCL instruction causes the value at the Source address to be multiplied by the

Rate (slope) value. The resulting value is added to the Offset and the rounded result is placed in the Destination.

The scaled value = [(rate x source)/10000] + offset.

Rate and Offset can both be immediate values. The data range for rate and offset is

-32768 to 32767.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 15-8: SCL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Rate

Offset

Destination

• •

• •

• •

• • •

• • •

• • •

• • •

• •

• • •

• • •

• •

15-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

SCP - Scale with Parameters

Instruction Type: output

Table 15-9: Execution Time for the SCP Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

28.44

µ s

45.59

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The SCP instruction produces a scaled output value that has a linear relationship between the input and scaled values.

This instruction solves the equation listed below to determine scaled output.

y = m(x - x

0

) + y

0

, where:

• y = scaled output

• x = input (Input)

• m = slope =

∆ y/

∆ x

∆ y = y

1

- y

0

∆ x = x

1

- x

0

• x

0

= input start (Input min)

• x

1

= input end (Input max)

• y

0

= scaled start (Scaled min)

• y

1

= scaled end (Scaled max)

The data ranges for Start and End values are:

• -32768 to 32767 (word)

• -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word).

15-8

Math Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 15-10: SCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Input (x)

Input Start (x

0

)

Input End (x

1

)

Scaled Start (y

0

)

Scaled End (y

1

)

Scaled Output (y)

• •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • •

• •

• • •

• •

• •

• •

• • • •

• • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

Important:

• •

• • •

• • •

• • •

• • •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

15-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

SQR - Square Root

Instruction Type: output

Table 15-11: Execution Time for the SQR Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

22.51

µ s

26.58

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The SQR instruction calculates the square root of the absolute value of the source and places the rounded result in the destination.

The data ranges for the source is -32768 to 32767 (word) and -2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647 (long word). The Carry Math Status Bit is set if the source is negative.

See “Updates to Math Status Bits” on page 15-3 for more information.

Table 15-12: SQR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Source •

Destination

• •

• • • • •

• • • •

• • •

• •

• •

• •

15-10

Conversion Instructions

16

Conversion Instructions

The conversion instructions multiplex and de-multiplex data and perform conversions between binary and decimal values.

Instruction

DCD - Decode 4 to 1-of-16

ENC - Encode 1-of-16 to 4

FRD - Convert From Binary Coded

Decimal

TOD - Convert to Binary Coded

Decimal

Used To:

Decodes a 4-bit value (0 to 15), turning on the corresponding bit in the 16-bit destination.

Encodes a 16-bit source to a 4-bit value.

Searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit, and looks for the first set bit. The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer.

Converts the BCD source value to an integer and stores it in the destination.

Converts the integer source value to BCD format and stores it in the destination.

Page

16-3

16-4

16-6

16-10

16-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using Decode and Encode Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 16-1: Conversion Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Destination

• •

• • • •

• • •

• •

• • •

16-2

Conversion Instructions

DCD - Decode 4 to 1-of-16

Instruction Type: output

Table 16-2: Execution Time for the DCD Instruction

True

1.68

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The DCD instruction uses the lower four bits of the source word to set one bit of the destination word. All other bits in the destination word are cleared. The DCD instruction converts the values as shown in the table below:

Table 16-3: Decode 4 to 1-of-16

x x x x x x

Source Bits Destination Bits

15 to 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 x x

x = not used

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

16-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

ENC - Encode 1-of-16 to 4

Instruction Type: output

Table 16-4: Execution Time for the CLR Instruction

True

6.90

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The ENC instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit, looking for the first bit set. The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer. The ENC instruction converts the values as shown in the table below:

Table 16-5: Encode 1-of-16 to 4

Source Bits Destination Bits

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15 to 04 03 02 01 00

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

1 x x

1

0 x

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 x 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 x x x x x x x x x

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

x = determines the state of the flag

0

0

0

0

0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

Note:

If source is zero, the destination is zero and the math status is zero, the flag is set to 1.

16-4

Conversion Instructions

Updates to Math Status Bits

Table 16-6: Math Status Bits

With this Bit:

S:0/0

Carry

S:0/1

Overflow

S:0/2

Zero Bit

S:0/3

Sign Bit

The Controller:

always resets sets if more than one bit in the source is set; otherwise resets.

The math overflow bit (S:5/0) is not set.

sets if result is zero, otherwise resets always resets

16-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

FRD - Convert from Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)

Instruction Type: output

Table 16-7: Execution Time for the FRD Instructions

Instruction

FRD

When Rung Is:

True

12.61

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

The FRD instruction is used to convert the BCD source value to an integer and place the result in the destination.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 16-8: FRD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Destination

• • • • • •

• • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

2. See “FRD Instruction Source Operand” on page 16-7.

Important:

• •

• • •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

2

16-6

Conversion Instructions

FRD Instruction Source Operand

The source can be either a word address or the math register.

The maximum BCD source values permissible are:

• 9999 if the source is a word address (allowing only a 4-digit BCD value)

• 32768 if the source is the math register (allowing a 5-digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S:13 and the high order digit in S:14).

If the source is the math register, it must be directly addressed as S:13. S:13 is the only status file element that can be used.

Updates to Math Status Bits

Table 16-9: Math Status Bits

With this Bit:

S:0/0

Carry

S:0/1

Overflow

S:0/2

Zero Bit

S:0/3

Sign Bit

The Controller:

always resets sets if non-BCD value is contained at the source or the value to be converted is greater than 32,767; otherwise resets. On overflow, the minor error flag is also set.

sets if result is zero, otherwise resets always resets

Note:

Always provide ladder logic filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction. The slightest difference in point-to-point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to the conversion of a non-BCD digit.

S:1

]/[

15

EQU

EQUAL

Source A

FRD

FROM BCD

Source

Source B

N7:1

0

I:0.0

0

Dest

I:0.0

0

N7:2

0

MOV

MOVE

Source

Dest

I:0.0

0

N7:1

0

16-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The two rungs shown cause the controller to verify that the value I:0 remains the same for two consecutive scans before it will execute the FRD. This prevents the FRD from converting a non–BCD value during an input value change.

Note:

To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD, the source must be the Math

Register (S:13). You must reset the Minor Error Bit (S:5.0) to prevent an error.

Example

The BCD value 32,760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7:0. The maximum source value is 32767, BCD.

MPS displays S:13 and

S:14 in BCD.

S:14

0000 0000 0000 0011

15

0 0 0

0

3

S:13

0010 0111 0110 0000

15 0

5-digit BCD

2 7 6 0

3 2 7 6 0

N7:0 Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000

You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your ladder program. If you do not convert the values, the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost.

Note:

If the math register (S:13 and S:14) is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed 4 digits, be sure to clear word

S:14 before executing the FRD instruction. If S:14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program, an incorrect decimal value will be placed in the destination word.

16-8

Conversion Instructions

Clearing S:14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below:

0001 0010 0011 0100

S:13 and S:14 are displayed in BCD format.

0000 0100 1101 0010

When the input condition I:0/1 is set (1), a BCD value (transferred from a 4–digit thumbwheel switch for example) is moved from word N7:2 into the math register.

Status word S:14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed.

16-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

TOD - Convert to Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)

Instruction Type: output

Table 16-10: Execution Time for the TOD Instructions

Instruction

TOD

When Rung Is:

True

14.64

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

The TOD instruction is used to convert the integer source value to BCD and place the result in the destination.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 16-11: TOD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Destination

• • • •

• • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

2. See “TOD Instruction Destination Operand” on page 16-11.

Important:

• •

• • •

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

2

16-10

Conversion Instructions

TOD Instruction Destination Operand

The destination can be either a word address or math register.

The maximum values permissible once converted to BCD are:

• 9999 if the destination is a word address (allowing only a 4-digit BCD value)

• 32768 if the destination is the math register (allowing a 5-digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S:13 and the high order digit in S:14).

If the destination is the math register, it must be directly addressed as S:13. S:13 is the only status file element that can be used.

Updates to Math Status Bits

Table 16-12: Math Status Bits

With this Bit:

S:0/0

Carry

S:0/1

Overflow

S:0/2

Zero Bit

S:0/3

Sign Bit

The Controller:

always resets sets if BCD result is larger than 9999. On overflow, the minor error flag is also set.

sets if result is zero, otherwise resets sets if the source word is negative; otherwise resets

Changes to the Math Register

Contains the 5–digit BCD result of the conversion. This result is valid at overflow.

Note:

To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal, the destination must be the

Math Register (S:13). You must reset the Minor Error Bit (S:5/0) to prevent an error.

16-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Example

The integer value 9760 stored at N7:3 is converted to BCD and the BCD equivalent is stored in N7:0. The maximum BCD value is 9999.

9 7 6 0 N7:3

MPS displays the destination value in

BCD format.

MSB

MSB

Decimal

0010 0110 0010 0000

9 7 6 0 N7:0 4-digit BCD

1001 0111 0110 0000

16-12

Logical Instructions

17

Logical Instructions

The logical instructions perform bit-wise logical operations on individual words.

Instruction

AND - Bit-Wise AND

OR - Logical OR

XOR - Exclusive OR

NOT - Logical NOT

Used To:

Perform an AND operation

Perform an inclusive OR operation

Perform an Exclusive Or operation

Perform a NOT operation

Page

17-3

17-4

17-5

17-6

Using Logical Instructions

When using logical instructions, observe the following:

• Source and Destination must be of the same data size (i.e. all words or all long words).

• Source A and Source B can be a constant or an address, but both cannot be constants.

• Valid constants are -32768 to 32767 (word) and -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

(long word).

17-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 17-1: Logical Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source A

Source B

2

Destination

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

2. Source B does not apply to the NOT instruction. The NOT instruction only has one source value.

• •

• •

• •

Important:

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

Updates to Math Status Bits

After a logical instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated. The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0-3 in the processor status file

(S2).

Table 17-2: Math Status Bits

With this Bit:

S:0/0

Carry

S:0/1

Overflow

S:0/2

Zero Bit

S:0/3

Sign Bit

The Controller:

always resets always resets sets if result is zero, otherwise resets sets if result is negative (MSB is set), otherwise resets

17-2

Logical Instructions

AND - Bit-Wise AND

Instruction Type: output

Table 17-3: Execution Time for the AND Instruction

Data Size

word long word

True

2.00

µ s

8.20

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The AND instruction performs a bit-wise logical AND of two sources and places the result in the destination.

Table 17-4: Truth Table for the AND Instruction

Destination = A AND B

Source: A

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

Source: B

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Destination:

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

For more information, see “Using Logical Instructions” on page 17-1 and “Updates to

Math Status Bits” on page 17-2.

17-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

OR - Logical OR

Instruction Type: output

Table 17-5: Execution Time for the OR Instruction

Data Size

word long word

True

2.00

µ s

8.19

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The OR instruction performs a logical OR of two sources and places the result in the destination.

Table 17-6: Truth Table for the OR Instruction

Destination = A OR B

Source: A

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

Source: B

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Destination:

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

For more information, see “Using Logical Instructions” on page 17-1 and “Updates to

Math Status Bits” on page 17-2.

17-4

Logical Instructions

XOR - Exclusive OR

Instruction Type: output

Table 17-7: Execution Time for the XOR Instruction

Data Size

word long word

True

2.67

µ s

8.81

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The XOR instruction performs a logical exclusive OR of two sources and places the result in the destination.

Table 17-8: Truth Table for the XOR Instruction

Destination = A XOR B

Source: A

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

Source: B

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Destination:

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

For more information, see “Using Logical Instructions” on page 17-1 and “Updates to

Math Status Bits” on page 17-2.

17-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

NOT - Logical NOT

Instruction Type: output

Table 17-9: Execution Time for the NOT Instruction

Data Size

word long word

True

2.20

µ s

7.99

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The NOT instruction is used to invert the source bit-by-bit (one’s complement) and then place the result in the destination.

Table 17-10: Truth Table for the NOT Instruction

Destination = A NOT B

Source:

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

Destination:

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

For more information, see “Using Logical Instructions” on page 17-1 and “Updates to

Math Status Bits” on page 17-2.

17-6

18

Move Instructions

The move instructions modify and move words.

Instruction

MOV - Move

MVM - Masked Move

Used to:

Move the source value to the destination.

Move data from a source location to a selected portion of the destination.

Move Instructions

Page

18-2

18-4

18-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MOV - Move

Instruction Type: output

Table 18-1: Execution Time for the MOV Instruction

Data Size

word long word

True

2.15

µ s

7.18

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The MOV instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination. As long as the rung remains true, the instruction moves the data each scan.

Using the MOV Instruction

When using the MOV instruction, observe the following:

• Source and Destination can be different data sizes. The source is converted to the destination size when the instruction executes. If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination, the overflow shall be handled as follows:

™

If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear, a saturated result is stored in the

Destination. If the Source is positive, the Destination is 32767 (word). If the result is negative, the Destination is -32768.

™

If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set, the unsigned truncated value of the

Source is stored in the Destination.

• Source can be a constant or an address.

• Valid constants are -32768 to 32767 (word) and -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

(long word).

18-2

Move Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 18-2: MOV Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Destination

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

• •

• •

Important:

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

Updates to Math Status Bits

After a MOV instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated. The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0-3 in the processor status file

(S2).

Table 18-3: Math Status Bits

With this Bit:

S:0/0

Carry

S:0/1

Overflow

S:0/2

Zero Bit

S:0/3

Sign Bit

S:5/0

Math Overflow Trap Bit

1

The Controller:

always resets sets when an overflow condition is detected, otherwise resets sets if result is zero, otherwise resets sets if result is negative (MSB is set), otherwise resets sets Math Overflow Trap minor error if the Overflow bit is set, otherwise it remains in last state

1. Control bit.

Note:

If you want to move one word of data without affecting the math flags, use a copy (COP) instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction.

18-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MVM - Masked Move

Instruction Type: output

Table 18-4: Execution Time for the MVM Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

7.05

µ s

10.58

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The MVM instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination, allowing portions of the destination to be masked. The mask bit functions as follows:

Table 18-5: Mask Function for MVM Instruction

Source Bit

1

0

1

0

Mask Bit

0

0

1

1

Destination Bit

last state last state

1

0

Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero; pass data by setting bits in the mask to one. The mask can be a constant, or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address. Bits in the Destination that correspond to zeros in the Mask are not altered.

18-4

Move Instructions

Using the MVM Instruction

When using the MVM instruction, observe the following:

• Source, Mask, and Destination must be of the same data size (i.e. all words or all long words). An example of masking is shown below for word addressing level:

Word

15

14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Bit

7

6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Destination Before Move 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Source 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Mask (F0F0)

Destination After Move

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero; pass data by setting bits in the mask to one. The mask can be a constant value, or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address. Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered.

• Valid constants for the mask are -32768 to 32767 (word) and -2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647 (long word). The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 18-6: MVM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Mask

Destination

• •

• •

• • • • •

• • • •

• • • •

• •

• • •

• •

• •

• •

• •

18-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Updates to Math Status Bits

After a MVM instruction is executed, the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated. The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0-3 in the processor status file

(S2).

Table 18-7: Math Status Bits

With this Bit:

S:0/0

Carry

S:0/1

Overflow

S:0/2

Zero Bit

S:0/3

Sign Bit

The Controller:

always resets always resets sets if destination is zero, otherwise resets sets if the MSB of the destination is set, otherwise resets

18-6

19

File Instructions

The file instructions perform operations on file data.

Instruction

COP - Copy File

Used To:

Copy a range of data from one file location to another

FLL - Fill File

BSL - Bit Shift Left

BSR - Bit Shift Right

Load a file with a program constant or a value from an element address

Load and unload data into a bit array one bit at a time

FFL - First In, First Out (FIFO) Load Load words into a file and unload them in the same order (first in, first out)

FFU - First In, First Out (FIFO)

Unload

LFL - Last In, First Out (LIFO) Load Load words into a file and unload them in reverse order (last in, first out)

LFU - Last In, First Out (LIFO)

Unload

File Instructions

Page

19-2

19-3

19-5

19-7

19-9

19-12

19-15

19-18

19-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

COP - Copy File

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-1: Execution Time for the COP Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

16

µ s + 0.7 µs/word

False

0.00

µ s

The COP instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another.

Table 19-2: COP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Destination

Length

• •

• •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

• •

• •

Important:

You cannot use indirect addressing with: S, MG, PD, RTC, HSC,

PTO, PWM, STI, EII, BHI, MMI, DAT, TPI, CS0, and IOS files.

The source and destination file types must be the same except bit (B) and integer (N); they can be interchanged. It is the address that determines the maximum length of the block to be copied, as shown in the following table:

Table 19-3: Maximum Lengths for the COP Instruction

Source/Destination Data Type

1 word elements (ie. word)

2 word elements (ie. long word)

3 word elements (ie. counter)

Range of Length Operand

1 to 128

1 to 64

1 to 42

19-2

File Instructions

FLL - Fill File

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-4: Execution Time for the FLL Instruction

Data Size

word long word

True

13+0.43

µ s/word

13.7+0.859

µ s/ dword

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

0.00

µ s

The FLL instruction loads elements of a file with either a constant or an address data value for a given length. The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated. The instruction fills the words of a file with a source value. It uses no status bits. If you need an enable bit, program a parallel output that uses a storage address.

Destination

Source

Word to File

19-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

This instruction uses the following operands:

• Source - The source operand is the address of the value or constant used to fill the destination. The data range for the source is from -32768 to 32767 (word) or

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word).

Note: A constant cannot be used as the source in a timer (T), counter (C), or control (R) file.

• Destination - The starting destination address where the data is written.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of elements. The length can range from 1 to 128 (word), 1 to 64 (long word), or 1 to 42 (3 word element such as counter).

Note:

The source and destination operands must be of the same file type, unless they are bit (B) and integer (N).

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 19-5: FLL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

1

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

Destination

Length

• •

• •

1. See Important note about indirect addressing.

• • •

• •

• • •

19-4

File Instructions

BSL - Bit Shift Left

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-6: Execution Time for the BSL Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

29+1.08

µ s/word

NA

False

0.00

µ s

NA

The BSL instruction loads data into a bit array on a false-to-true rung transition, one bit at a time. The data is shifted left through the array, then unloaded, one bit at a time.

The following figure shows the operation of the BSR instruction.

Source Bit

I:22/12

Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16 to bit 73.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

RESERVED 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

58 Bit Array #B3:1

Unload Bit

(R6:14/10)

If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan, you must create a loop in your application using the JMP, LBL, and CTU instructions.

19-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

This instruction uses the following operands:

• File - The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated.

• Control - The control operand is the address of the BSL’s control element. The control element consists of 3 words:

Word 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EN

1 --

DN

2 --

ER

3

UL

4 not used

Word 1

Size of bit array (number of bits).

Word 2

not used

1. EN - Enable Bit is set on false-to-true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit, when set, indicates that the bit array has shifted one position.

3. ER - Error Bit, when set, indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand.

4. UL - Unload Bit is the instruction’s output. Avoid using the UL (unload) bit when the ER (error) bit is set.

• Length - The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits. The valid data range for length is from 0 to 2048.

• Source - The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the first (lowest) bit position.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 19-7: BSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

File

Control

Length

Source

• •

1

• •

• • • • • •

1. Control file only. Not valid for Timers and Counters.

• •

• • •

• •

19-6

File Instructions

BSR - Bit Shift Right

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-8: Execution Time for the BSR Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

29+1.14

µ s/word

False

0.00

µ s

Unload Bit

(R6:15/10)

47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

INVALID 69 68 67 66 65 64

38 Bit Array

#B3:2

Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 69 to bit 32.

Source Bit

I:23/06

If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan, you must create a loop in your application using the JMP, LBL, and CTU instructions.

19-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The BSR instruction loads data into a bit array on a false-to-true rung transition, one bit at a time. The data is shifted right through the array, then unloaded, one bit at a time. This instruction uses the following operands:

• File - The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated.

• Control - The control operand is the address of the BSR’s control element. The control element consists of 3 words:

Word 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EN

1 --

DN

2 --

ER

3

UL

4 not used

Word 1

Size of bit array (number of bits).

Word 2

not used

1. EN - Enable Bit is set on false-to-true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit, when set, indicates that the bit array has shifted one position.

3. ER - Error Bit, when set, indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand.

4. UL - Unload Bit is the instruction’s output. Avoid using the UL (unload) bit when the ER (error) bit is set.

• Length - The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits. The data range for length is from 0 to 2048.

• Source - The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the last (highest) bit position..

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 19-9: BSR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

File

Control

Length

Source

• •

1

• •

• • • • • •

1. Control file only. Not valid for Timers and Counters.

• •

• • •

• •

19-8

File Instructions

FFL - First In, First Out (FIFO) Load

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-10: Execution Time for the FFL Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

20.00

µ s

23.00

µ s

False

9.50

µ s

9.50

µ s

On a false-to-true rung transition, the FFL instruction loads words or long words into a user-created file called a FIFO stack. This instruction’s counterpart, FIFO unload

(FFU), is paired with a given FFL instruction to remove elements from the FIFO stack. Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL - FFU instruction pair shown below.

FIFO Load

Source

FIFO

Control

Length

Position

N7:10

#N7:12

R6:0

34

9

EN

DN

EM

FIFO Unload

FIFO

Dest

#N7:12

N7:11

Control

Length

Position

R6:0

34

9

EU

DN

EM

Destination

N7:11

FFU instruction unloads data from stack #N7:12 at position 0, N7:12

N7:12

N7:13

N7:14

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

Position

0

34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at

N7:12, ending at N7:45

Source

N7:10

FFL instruction loads data into stack #7:12 at the next available position, 9 in this case.

N7:45

33

Loading and Unloading of Stack #N7:12

19-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

This instruction uses the following operands:

• Source - The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the FIFO stack. The address level of the source must match the FIFO stack. If FIFO is a word size file, source must be a word value or constant. If FIFO is a long word size file, source must be a long word value or constant. The data range for the source is from -32768 to 32767 (word) or

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word).

• FIFO - The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack where the value in source is loaded.

• Control - This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Word 0

EN

1 --

DN

2

EM

3 not used

Word 1

Length - maximum number of words or long words in the stack.

Word 2

Position - the next available location where the instruction loads data.

1. EN - Enable Bit is set on false-to-true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit, when set, indicates that the stack is full.

3. EM - Empty Bit, when set, indicates FIFO is empty.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source. The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 (word) or 1 to 64 (long word). The position is incremented after each load.

• Position - This is the current location pointed to in the FIFO stack. It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source.

Position is a component of the control register. The position can range from 0 to

128 (word) or 0 to 64 (long word).

19-10

File Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 19-11: FFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

FIFO

Control

Length

Position

• •

• •

• • • •

1

• •

1. Control file only. Not valid for Timers or Counters.

• • •

• •

• •

• •

19-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

FFU - First In, First Out (FIFO) Unload

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-12: Execution Time for the FFU Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

18+0.727

µ s/word

20+1.39

µ s/word

False

9.50

µ s

9.50

µ s

On a false-to-true rung transition, the FFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user-created file called a FIFO stack. The data is unloaded using first-in, firstout order. After the unload completes, the data in the stack is shifted one element toward the top of the stack and the last element is zeroed out. Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL - FFU instruction pair shown below.

FIFO Load

Source

FIFO

Control

Length

Position

N7:10

#N7:12

R6:0

34

9

EN

DN

EM

FIFO Unload

FIFO

Dest

#N7:12

N7:11

Control

Length

Position

R6:0

34

9

EU

DN

EM

Destination

N7:11

FFU instruction unloads data from stack #N7:12 at position 0, N7:12

N7:12

N7:13

N7:14

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

Position

0

34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at

N7:12, ending at N7:45

Source

N7:10

FFL instruction loads data into stack #7:12 at the next available position, 9 in this case.

N7:45

33

Loading and Unloading of Stack #N7:12

19-12

File Instructions

This instruction uses the following operands:

• FIFO - The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack.

• Destination - The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the FIFO stack. The FFU instruction unloads this value from the first location on the FIFO stack and places it in the destination address.

The address level of the destination must match the FIFO stack. If FIFO is a word size file, destination must be a word size file. If FIFO is a long word size file, destination must be a long word size file.

• Control - This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Word 0

--

EU

1

DN

2

EM

3 not used

Word 1

Length - maximum number of words or long words in the stack.

Word 2

Position - the next available location where the instruction unloads data.

1. EU - Enable Unload Bit is set on false-to-true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit, when set, indicates that the stack is full.

3. EM - Empty Bit, when set, indicates FIFO is empty.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack.

The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 (word) or 1 to 64 (long word).

• Position - Position is a component of the control register. The position can range from 0 to 128 (word) or 0 to 64 (long word). The position is decremented after each unload. Data is unloaded at position zero.

19-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 19-13: FFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

FIFO

Destination

Control

Length

Position

• •

• • •

• • • •

1

1. Control file only. Not valid for Timers and Counters.

• •

• •

• •

• •

19-14

File Instructions

LFL - Last In, First Out (LIFO) Load

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-14: Execution Time for the LFL Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

20.00

µ s

24.00

µ s

False

9.50

µ s

9.50

µ s

On a false-to-true rung transition, the LFL instruction loads words or long words into a user-created file called a LIFO stack. This instruction’s counterpart, LIFO unload

(LFU), is paired with a given LFL instruction to remove elements from the LIFO stack. Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL - LFU instruction pair shown below.

LFL

LIFO LOAD

Source

LIFO

Control

Length

Position

N7:10

#N7:12

R6:0

34

9

(EN)

(DN)

(EM)

Destination

N7:11

LFU instruction unloads data from stack #N7:12 at position 8.

LFU

LIFO UNLOAD

LIFO

Dest

Control

Length

Position

#N7:12

N7:11

R6:0

34

9

(EU)

(DN)

(EM)

Source

N7:10

LFL instruction loads data into stack #N7:12 at the next available position, 9 in this case.

N7:12

N7:13

N7:14

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

Position

0

34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at

N7:12, ending at N7:45

N7:45

33

Loading and Unloading of Stack #N7:12

19-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The LFL instruction uses the following operands:

• Source - The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the LIFO stack. The data size of the source must match the LIFO stack. If LIFO is a word size file, source must be a word value or constant. If LIFO is a long word size file, source must be a long word value or constant. The data range for the source is from -32768 to 32767 (word) or

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (long word).

• LIFO - The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack where the value in source is loaded.

• Control - This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Word 0

EN

1 --

DN

2

EM

3 not used

Word 1

Length - maximum number of words or long words in the stack.

Word 2

Position - the next available location where the instruction loads data.

1. EN - Enable Bit is set on false-to-true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit, when set, indicates that the stack is full.

3. EM - Empty Bit, when set, indicates that LIFO is empty.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source. The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 (word) or 1 to 64 (long word). The position is incremented after each load.

• Position - This is the current location pointed to in the LIFO stack. It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source.

Position is a component of the control register. The position can range from 0 to

128 (word) or 0 to 64 (long word).

19-16

File Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 19-15: LFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Source

LIFO

Control

Length

Position

• •

• •

• • • •

1

• •

1. Control file only. Not valid for Timers and Counters.

• • •

• •

• •

• •

19-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

LFU - Last In, First Out (LIFO) Unload

Instruction Type: output

Table 19-16: Execution Time for the LFU Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

20.80

µ s

24.00

µ s

False

9.50

µ s

9.50

µ s

On a false-to-true rung transition, the LFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user-created file called a LIFO stack. The data is unloaded using last-in, firstout order. Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL - LFU instruction pair shown below.

LFL

LIFO LOAD

Source

LIFO

Control

Length

Position

N7:10

#N7:12

R6:0

34

9

(EN)

(DN)

(EM)

Destination

N7:11

LFU instruction unloads data from stack #N7:12 at position 8.

LFU

LIFO UNLOAD

LIFO

Dest

Control

Length

Position

#N7:12

N7:11

R6:0

34

9

(EU)

(DN)

(EM)

Source

N7:10

LFL instruction loads data into stack #N7:12 at the next available position, 9 in this case.

N7:12

N7:13

N7:14

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

Position

0

34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at

N7:12, ending at N7:45

N7:45

33

Loading and Unloading of Stack #N7:12

19-18

File Instructions

The LFU instruction uses the following operands:

• LIFO - The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack.

• Destination - The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the LIFO stack. The LFU instruction unloads this value from the last location on the LIFO stack and places it in the destination address.

The address level of the destination must match the LIFO stack. If LIFO is a word size file, destination must be a word size file. If LIFO is a long word size file, destination must be a long word size file.

• Control - This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Word 0

--

EU

1

DN

2

EM

3 not used

Word 1

Length - maximum number of words or double words in the stack.

Word 2

Position - the next available location where the instruction unloads data.

1. EU - Enable Unload Bit is set on false-to-true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit, when set, indicates that the stack is full.

3. EM - Empty Bit, when set, indicates LIFO is empty.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of elements in the LIFO stack.

The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 (word) or 1 to 64 (long word).

• Position - This is the next location in the LIFO stack where data will be unloaded.

Position is a component of the control register. The position can range from 0 to

128 (word) or 0 to 64 (long word). The position is decremented after each unload.

Table 19-17: LFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

LIFO

Destination

Control

Length

Position

• •

1

• • • •

1. Control file only. Not valid for Timers and Counters.

• •

• •

• •

• •

19-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

19-20

Sequencer Instructions

20

Sequencer Instructions

Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines or processes that have a consistent and repeatable operation. They are typically time based or event driven.

Instruction

SQC - Sequencer Compare

SQO - Sequencer Output

SQL - Sequencer Load

Used To:

Compare 16-bit data with stored data

Transfer 16-bit data to word addresses

Load 16-bit data into a file

Page

20-2

20-6

20-10

Use the sequencer compare instruction to detect when a step is complete; use the sequencer output instruction to set output conditions for each step. Use the sequencer load instruction to load data into the sequencer file.

The primary advantage of sequencer instructions is to conserve program memory.

These instructions monitor and control 16 (word) or 32 (long word) discrete outputs at a time in a single rung.

You can use bit integer or double integer files with sequencer instructions.

20-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

SQC- Sequencer Compare

Instruction Type: output

Table 20-1: Execution Time for the SQC Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

21.30

µ s

22.80

µ s

False

6.80

µ s

6.80

µ s

On a false-to-true rung transition, the SQC instruction is used to compare masked source words or long words with the masked value at a reference address (the sequencer file) for the control of sequential machine operations.

When the status of all non-masked bits in the source word match those of the corresponding reference word, the instruction sets the found bit (FD) in the control word. Otherwise, the found bit (FD) is cleared.

The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set.

The mask can be fixed or variable. If you enter a hexadecimal code, it is fixed. If you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step, it is variable.

When the rung goes from false-to-true, the instruction increments to the next step

(word) in the sequencer file. Data stored there is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality. While the rung remains true, the source is compared against the reference data for every scan. If equal, the FD bit is set in the

SQCs control counter.

20-2

Sequencer Instructions

Applications of the SQC instruction include machine diagnostics. The following figure explains how the SQC instruction works.

Sequencer Compare

File

Mask

Source

#B11:10

FFF0

I:3.0

Control

Length

Position

R6:21

4

2

EN

DN

FD

Input Word I:3.0

0010 0100 1001 1101

Mask Value FFF0

1111 1111 1111 0000

Sequencer Ref File #B10:11

Word

B10:11

12

13 0010 0100 1001 0000

14

15

Step

0

1

2

3

4

SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matches

(through mask) its corresponding reference word.

The FD bit R6:21/FD is set in the example, since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value.

20-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

This instruction uses the following operands:

• File - This is the sequencer reference file. Its contents, on an element-by-element basis are masked and compared to the masked value stored in source.

• Mask - The mask operand contains the mask constant, word, or file which is applied to both file and source. When mask bits are set to 1, data is allowed to pass through for comparison. When mask bits are reset to 0, the data is masked (does not pass through to for comparison). The immediate data ranges for mask are from

0 to 0xFFFF or 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF.

• Source - This is the value that is compared to file.

Note:

If mask is direct or indirect, the position selects the location in the specified file.

• Control - This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Word 0

EN

1 --

DN

2 --

ER

3 not used FD 4 not used

Word 1

Length - contains the number of steps in the sequencer reference file.

Word 2

Position - the current position in the sequence

1. EN - Enable Bit is set by a false-to-true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file. It is reset on the next false-to-true rung transition after the rung goes false.

3. ER - Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value, or a negative or zero length value. When the ER bit is set, the minor error bit (S2:5/2) is also set.

4. FD - Found bit is set when the status of all non-masked bits in the source address match those of the word in the sequencer reference file. This bit is assessed each time the SQC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file (as well as Mask and/or Source if they are file data types). The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 255.

• Position - This is the current location or step in the sequencer file (as well as Mask and/or Source if they are file data types). It determines the next location in the stack to receive the current comparison data. Position is a component of the control register. The position can range from 0 to 255 for words and 0 to 127 for long words. The position is incremented on each false-to-true transition.

Note:

If mask is direct or indirect, the position selects the location in the specified file.

20-4

Sequencer Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 20 -2: SQC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

File

Mask

Source

Control

Length

Position

• •

1. Control file only.

1

• •

• •

• •

Note:

• •

• • •

• •

• •

• •

• •

If file type is word, then mask and source must be words. If file type is long word, mask and source must be long words.

20-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

SQO- Sequencer Output

Instruction Type: output

Table 20-3: Execution Time for the SQO Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

20.20

µ s

23.40

µ s

False

6.80

µ s

6.80

µ s

On a false-to-true rung transition, the SQO instruction transfers masked source reference words or long words to the destination, for the control of sequential machine operations. When the rung goes from false-to-true, the instruction increments to the next step (word) in the sequencer file. Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction. Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed.

The done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred. On the next false-to-true rung transition, the instruction resets the position to step one.

If the position is equal to zero at start-up, when you switch the controller from the program mode to the run mode instruction operation depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan.

• If true, the instruction transfers the value in step zero.

• If false, the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false-to-true and transfers the value in step one.

The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set. The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits.

The mask can be fixed or variable. It will be fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code. It will be variable if you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step.

The following figure indicates how the SQO instruction works.

20-6

Sequencer Instructions

Destination O:14.0

15 8 7

0000 0101 0000 1010

0

15

Mask Value 0F0F

8 7

0000 1111 0000 1111

0

Sequencer Output File #B10:1

Word

B10:1

0000 0000 0000 0000

2

1010 0010 1111 0101

3

1111 0101 0100 1010

4

0101 0101 0101 0101

5

0000 1111 0000 1111

Step

0

1

2

3

4

Sequencer Output

File #B10:1

Mask

Dest

Control

0F0F

O14.0

R6:20

Length

Position

4

2

EN

DN

External Outputs

Associated with O:14

00

01

02

03

04

05

Current Step

10

11

12

13

06

07

08

09

14

15

ON

ON

ON

ON

20-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

This instruction uses the following operands:

• File - This is the sequencer reference file. Its contents, on an element-by-element basis are masked and stored in the destination.

• Mask - The mask operand contains the mask constant. When mask bits are set to

1, data is allowed to pass through to destination. When mask bits are reset to 0, the data is masked (does not pass through to destination). The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to 0xFFFF (word) or 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF (long word).

Note:

If mask is direct or indirect, the position selects the location in the specified file.

• Destination - The destination operand is the sequencer location or file.

• Control - This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Word 0

EN

1 --

DN

2 --

ER

3 not used FD not used

Word 1

Length - contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file

Word 2

Position - the current position in the sequence

1. EN - Enable Bit is set by a false-to-true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file. It is reset on the next false-to-true rung transition after the rung goes false.

3. ER - Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value, or a negative or zero length value. When the ER bit is set, the minor error bit (S2:5/2) is also set.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file (as well as Mask and/or Destination if they are file data types). The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 255.

• Position - This is the current location or step in the sequencer file (as well as Mask and/or Destination if they are file data types). It determines the next location in the stack to be masked and moved to the destination. Position is a component of the control register. The position can range from 0 to 255. Position is incremented on each false-to-true transition.

20-8

Sequencer Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table:

Table 20 -4: SQO Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

File

Mask

Destination

Control

Length

Position

• •

1. Control file only.

1

• •

• •

• •

Note:

• •

• • •

• •

• •

• •

• •

If file type is word, then mask and source must be words. If file type is long word, mask and source must be long words.

20-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

SQL - Sequencer Load

Instruction Type: output

Table 20-5: Execution Time for the SQL Instruction

Data Size

word long word

When Rung Is:

True

19.20

µ s

21.10

µ s

False

6.80

µ s

6.80

µ s

On a false-to-true rung transition, the SQL instruction loads words or long words into a sequencer file at each step of a sequencer operation. This instruction uses the following operands:

• File - This is the sequencer reference file. Its contents are received on an elementby-element basis from the source.

• Source - The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position sequencer file. The address level of the source must match the sequencer file. If file is a word type, then source must be a word type. If file is a long word type, then source must be a long word type. The data range for the source is from -32768 to 32767 (word) or -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

(long word).

• Control - This is a control file address. The status bits, stack length, and the position value are stored in this element. The control element consists of 3 words:

Word 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EN

1 --

DN

2 --

ER

3 not used FD not used

Word 1

Length - contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file

Word 2

Position - the current position in the sequence

1. EN - Enable Bit is set by a false-to-true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled.

2. DN - Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file. It is reset on the next false-to-true rung transition after the rung goes false.

3. ER - Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value, or a negative or zero length value. When the ER bit is set, the minor error bit (S2:5/2) is also set.

• Length - The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file

(this is also the length of source if it is a file data type). The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 255.

20-10

Sequencer Instructions

• Position - This is the current location or step in the sequencer file (as well as source if it is a file data type). It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source. Position is a component of the control register. The position can range from 0 to 255.

Table 20 -6: SQL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

File

Source

Control

Length

Position

• •

1. Control file only.

1

• •

• •

Note:

• •

• • •

• •

• •

If file type is word, then mask and source must be words. If file type is long word, mask and source must be long words.

20-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

20-12

Program Control Instructions

21

Program Control Instructions

Use these instructions to change the order in which the processor scans a ladder program. Typically these instructions are used to minimize scan time, create a more efficient program, and to troubleshoot a ladder program.

Instruction

JMP - Jump to Label

LBL - Label

JSR - Jump to Subroutine

SBR - Subroutine Label

RET - Return from Subroutine

SUS - Suspend

TND - Temporary End

END - Program End

MCR - Master Control Reset

Used To:

Jump forward/backward to a corresponding label instruction

Jump to a designated subroutine and return

Debug or diagnose your user program

Abort current ladder scan

End a program or subroutine

Enable or inhibit a master control zone in your ladder program

Page

21-2

21-2

21-3

21-3

21-4

21-4

21-5

21-5

21-6

21-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

JMP - Jump to Label

Instruction Type: output

Table 21-1: Execution Time for the JMP Instruction

True

0.39

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The JMP instruction causes the controller to change the order of ladder execution.

Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked (LBL label number). Jumps can be forward or backward in ladder logic within the same program file. Multiple

JMP instructions may cause execution to proceed to the same label.

The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999. The label is local to a program file.

LBL - Label

Instruction Type: input

Table 21-2: Execution Time for the LBL Instruction

True

0.16

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.16

µ s

The LBL instruction is used in conjunction with a jump (JMP) instruction to change the order of ladder execution. Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked (LBL label number).

The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999. The label is local to a program file.

21-2

Program Control Instructions

JSR - Jump to Subroutine

Instruction Type: output

Table 21-3: Execution Time for the JSR Instruction

True

6.43

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The JSR instruction causes the controller to start executing a separate subroutine file within a ladder program. JSR moves program execution to the designated subroutine

(SBR file number). After executing the SBR, control proceeds to the instruction following the JSR instruction.

The immediate data range for the JSR file is from 3 to 255.

SBR - Subroutine Label

Instruction Type: input

Table 21-4: Execution Time for the SBR Instruction

True

0.16

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

n/a

The SBR instruction is a label which is not used by the processor. It is for user subroutine identification purposes as the first rung for that subroutine. This instruction is the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true.

21-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

RET - Return from Subroutine

Instruction Type: output

Table 21-5: Execution Time for the RET Instruction

True

0.44

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The RET instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file. It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction, user interrupt, or user fault routine that caused this subroutine to execute.

SUS - Suspend

Instruction Type: output

Table 21-6: Execution Time for the SUS Instruction

True

0.66

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The SUS instruction is used to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troubleshooting. This instruction causes the processor to enter the suspend idle mode causing all outputs to be de-energized. The suspend ID and the suspend file (program file number or subroutine file number identifying where the suspend instruction resides) are placed in the status file (S:7 and S:8).

The immediate data range for the suspend ID is from -32768 to 32767.

21-4

Program Control Instructions

TND - Temporary End

Instruction Type: output

The TND instruction is used to denote a premature end of ladder program execution.

The TND instruction cannot be executed from a STI subroutine, HSC subroutine, EII subroutine, or a user fault subroutine. This instruction may appear more than once in a ladder program.

On a true rung, TND stops the processor from scanning the rest of the program file. In addition, this instruction performs the output scan, input scan, and housekeeping aspects of the processor scan cycle prior to resuming scanning at rung 0 of the main program (file 2). If this instruction is executed in a nested subroutine, it terminates execution of all nested subroutines.

END - Program End

Instruction Type: output

Table 21-7: Execution Time for the END Instruction

True

0.33

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The END instruction must appear at the end of every ladder program. For the main program file (file 2), this instruction ends the program scan. For a subroutine, interrupt, or user fault file, the END instruction causes a return from subroutine.

21-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MCR - Master Control Reset

Instruction Type: output

Table 21-8: Execution Time for the MCR Instructions

Instruction

MCR Start

MCR End

True

0.66

µ s

0.87

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.66

µ s

0.87

µ s

The MCR instruction works in pairs to control the ladder logic found between those pairs. Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned, but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non-retentive outputs. Non-retentive outputs are reset when the rung goes false.

I:1

] [

0

(MCR)

Ladder Logic

(MCR)

This instruction defines the boundaries of an MCR Zone. An MCR Zone is the set of ladder logic instructions bounded by an MCR instruction pair. The start of an MCR zone is defined to be the rung that contains an MCR instruction preceded by conditional logic. The end of an MCR zone is defined to be the first rung containing just an MCR instruction following a start MCR zone rung.

While the rung state of the first MCR instruction is true, execution shall proceed as if the zone were not present. When the rung state of the first MCR instruction is false, the ladder logic within the MCR zone is executed as if the rung is false. All nonretentive outputs within the MCR zone shall be reset.

MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program, such as for recipe applications.

21-6

Program Control Instructions

When you program MCR instructions, note that:

• You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction.

• You cannot nest one MCR zone within another.

• Do not jump into an MCR zone. If the zone is false, jumping into it activates the zone.

Note:

The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard-wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability. You still must install a hard-wired master control relay to provide emergency I/O power shutdown.

!

ATTENTION: If you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone, instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled.

Re-program critical operations outside the zone if necessary.

21-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

21-8

Input and Output Instructions

22

Input and Output Instructions

The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans.

Instruction

IIM - Immediate Input with Mask

Used To:

Update data prior to the normal input scan.

IOM - Immediate Output with Mask Update outputs prior to the normal output scan.

REF - I/O Refresh Interrupt the program scan to execute the

I/O scan (write outputs, service communications, read inputs)

Page

22-2

22-4

22-6

22-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

IIM - Immediate Input with Mask

Immediate Input w/Mask

Slot I:0.0

Mask

Length

N7:0

1

Instruction Type: output

Note:

This instruction is used for the MicroLogix 1500 on-board I/O only. It is not designed to be used with expansion I/O.

Table 22-1: Execution Time for the IIM Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

22.06

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

The IIM instruction allows you to selectively update input data without waiting for the automatic input scan. This instruction uses the following operands:

Slot - This operand defines the location where data is obtained for updating the input file. The location specifies the slot number and but the word where data is to be obtained. For example, if slot = I:0, input data from slot 0 starting at word 0 is masked and placed in input data file I:0 starting at word 0 for the specified length.

If slot = I0.1, word 1 of slot 0 is used, and so on.

Important:

Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction. IIM cannot be used with expansion I/O.

Mask - The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied to the slot. If a given bit position in the mask is a “1”, the corresponding bit data from slot is passed to the input data file. A “0” prohibits corresponding bit data in slot from being passed to the input data file. The mask value can range from 0 to 0xFFFF.

Bit

Real Input

Mask

Input Data File

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Input Word

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Input Word

Length - This is the number of masked words to transfer to the input data file.

22-2

Input and Output Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below:

Table 22-2: IIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Slot

Mask

Length

• •

• • •

• • • •

22-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

IOM - Immediate Output with Mask

Immediate Output w/Mask

Slot

Mask

Length

O:0.0

N7:0

1

Instruction Type: output

Note:

This instruction is used for the MicroLogix 1500 on-board I/O only. It is not designed to be used with expansion I/O.

Table 22-3: Execution Time for the IOM Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

19.44

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

The IOM instruction allows you to selectively update output data without waiting for the automatic output scan. This instruction uses the following operands:

Slot - The slot is the physical location that will be updated with data from the output file.

Important:

Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction. IOM cannot be used with expansion I/O.

Mask - The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied. If a given bit position in the mask is a “1”, the corresponding bit data is passed to the physical outputs. A “0” prohibits corresponding bit data from being passed to the outputs. The mask value can range from 0 to 0xFFFF.

Bit

Output Data

Mask

Real Outputs

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Output Word

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Output Word

Length - This is the number of masked words to transfer to the outputs.

22-4

Input and Output Instructions

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below:

Table 22-4: IOM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Slot

Mask

Length

• • • • •

• • • •

22-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

REF- I/O Refresh

Instruction Type: output

Table 22-5: Execution Time for the REF Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

19.44

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

The REF instruction is used to interrupt the program scan to execute the I/O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle for all communication channels. This includes: write outputs, service communications (all communication channels, comms push-button, DAT, and comms housekeeping), and read inputs.

The REF instruction has no programming parameters. When it is evaluated as true, the program scan is interrupted to execute the I/O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle. The scan then resumes at the instruction following the

REF instruction.

The REF instruction cannot be executed from an STI subroutine, HSC subroutine, EII subroutine, or a user fault subroutine.

Note:

!

Using an REF instruction may result in input data changing in the

“middle” of a program scan. This condition needs to be evaluated when using the REF instruction.

ATTENTION: The watchdog and scan timers are reset when executing the REF instruction. You must insure that the REF instruction is not placed inside a non-terminating program loop. Do not place the REF instruction inside a program loop unless the program is thoroughly analyzed.

22-6

Using Interrupts

23

Using Interrupts

Interrupts allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events. This chapter contains information about using interrupts, the interrupt instructions, and the interrupt function files. The chapter is arranged as follows:

“Information About Using Interrupts” on page 23-1.

“User Interrupt Instructions” on page 23-7.

“Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) Function File” on page 23-13.

“Using the Event Input Interrupt (EII) Function File” on page 23-19.

See also: “Using the High Speed Counter” on page 9-1.

Information About Using Interrupts

The purpose of this section is to explain some fundamental properties of the

Micrologix 1500 User Interrupts, including:

• What is an interrupt?

• When can the Micrologix 1500 operation be interrupted?

• Priority of User Interrupts

• Interrupt Latency

• User Fault Routine

23-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

What is an Interrupt?

An interrupt is an event that causes the processor to suspend the task it is currently performing, perform a different task, and then return to the suspended task at the point where it suspended. The Micrologix 1500 supports the following User Interrupts:

• User Fault Routine

• Event Interrupts (4)

• High Speed Counter Interrupts (2)

• Selectable Timed Interrupt

An interrupt must be configured and enabled to execute. When any one of the interrupts is configured (and enabled) and subsequently occurs, the user program will:

1. suspend its execution

2. perform a defined task based upon which interrupt occurred

3. return to the suspended operation.

rung 0

Program File 2

Program File 10

Interrupt Operation Example

Program File 2 is the main control program.

Program File 10 is the interrupt routine.

• An Interrupt Event occurs at rung 123.

• Program File 10 is executed.

• Program File 2 execution resumes immediately after rung 123.

rung 123 rung 275

Specifically, if the controller program is executing normally and an interrupt event occurs:

1. the processor will stop its normal execution

2. determine which interrupt occurred

3. go immediately to rung 0 of the subroutine specified for that User Interrupt

4. begin executing until the end of that User Interrupt subroutine

(or set of subroutines if the specified subroutine calls a subsequent subroutine)

5. After completion of that subroutine, the processor resumes normal execution from where it was interrupted.

23-2

Using Interrupts

When Can the Micrologix 1500 Operation be Interrupted?

The Micrologix 1500 only allows interrupts to be serviced during certain periods of a program scan. They are:

• At the start of a ladder rung

• Anytime during End of Scan

• Between data words in an expansion I/O scan

The interrupt will only be serviced by the processor at these opportunities. If the interrupt is disabled, the pending bit will be set at the next occurrence of one of the three listed occasions.

!

ATTENTION: If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL, OTE, or UIE, this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung (last instruction on last branch). It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung.

23-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Priority of User Interrupts

When multiple interrupts occur, the interrupts are serviced based upon their individual priority.

When an interrupt occurs and another interrupt(s) has already occurred but has not been serviced, the new interrupt will be scheduled for execution based on its priority relative to the other pending interrupts. At the next point in time when an interrupt can be serviced, all the interrupts will be executed in the sequence of highest priority to lowest priority.

If an interrupt occurs while a lower priority interrupt is being serviced (executed), the currently executing interrupt routine will be suspended, and the higher priority interrupt will be serviced. Then the lower priority interrupt will be allowed to complete before returning to normal processing.

If an interrupt occurs while a higher priority interrupt is being serviced (executed), and the pending bit has been set for the lower priority interrupt, the currently executing interrupt routine will continue to completion. Then the lower priority interrupt will run before returning to normal processing.

The priorities from highest to lowest are:

highest priority

User Fault Routine

Event Interrupt 0

Event Interrupt 1

High Speed Counter Interrupt 0

Event Interrupt 2

Event Interrupt 3

High Speed Counter Interrupt 1

Selectable Timed Interrupt

lowest priority

23-4

Using Interrupts

Interrupt Latency

Interrupt Latency is defined as the worst case amount of time elapsed from when an interrupt occurs to when the interrupt subroutine starts to execute. The tables below show the interaction between an interrupt and the processor operating cycle.

Program Scan Activity

Input Scan

Ladder Scan

Output Scan

Communications Service

Housekeeping

When an Interrupt can occur in MicroLogix 1500

Between word updates

Start of Rung

Between word updates

Anytime

Anytime

To determine the interrupt latency:

1. First determine the execution time for the longest executing rung in your control program (maximum rung time). See Appendix G for more information.

2. Multiply the maximum rung time by the Communications Multiplier correspond-

ing to your configuration in the Scantime Worksheet on page F-8.

Evaluate you results as follows:

• If the time calculated in step 2 is less than 100us, the interrupt latency is 360 µs.

• If the time calculated in step 2 is greater than 100us, the user interrupt latency is the sum of the time calculated in step 2 plus 260 µs.

23-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

User Fault Routine

The user fault routine gives you the option of preventing a processor shutdown when a specific user fault occurs. The fault routine is executed when any recoverable or nonrecoverable user fault occurs. The fault routine is not executed for non-user faults.

Faults are classified as recoverable, non-recoverable, and non-user faults. A complete

list of faults for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers appear in “Troubleshooting Your

System” on page C-1. The basic types of faults are described below:

Recoverable Non-Recoverable Non-User Fault

Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and are recovered from by executing the user fault routine. The user fault routine recovers by clearing the Major

Error Halted bit, S:1/13.

Note: You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device to identify the fault condition of the processor.

Non-Recoverable Faults are caused by the user, and cannot be recovered from.

The user fault routine executes when this type of fault occurs. However, the fault cannot be cleared.

Note: You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller.

Non-User Faults are caused by various conditions that cease ladder program execution. The user fault routine does not execute when this type of fault occurs.

Status File Data Saved

The Arithmetic Flags (Status File word S:0) are saved on entry to the user fault subroutine and re-written upon exiting the subroutine.

Creating a User Fault Subroutine

To use the user fault subroutine:

1. Create a subroutine file. Program Files 3 to 255 can be used.

2. Enter the file number in word S:29 of the status file.

MicroLogix 1500 Processor Operation

The occurrence of recoverable or non-recoverable faults causes the processor to read

S:29 and execute the subroutine number identified by S:29. If the fault is recoverable, the routine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S:1/13. The processor then continues in its current executing mode. The routine does not execute for non-user faults.

23-6

Using Interrupts

User Interrupt Instructions

Instruction

INT - Interrupt Subroutine

Used To:

Use this instruction to identify a program file as an interrupt subroutine (INT label) versus a regular subroutine (SBR label). This should be the first instruction in your interrupt subroutine.

STS - Selectable Timed Start Use the STS (Selectable Timed Interrupt Start) instruction to the start the STI timer from the control program, rather than starting automatically.

UID - User Interrupt Disable Use the User Interrupt Disable (UID) and the User

Interrupt Enable (UIE) instructions to create zones in

UIE - User Interrupt Enable which I/O interrupts cannot occur.

UIF - User Interrupt Flush Use the UIF instruction to remove selected pending interrupts from the system.

Page

23-7

23-8

23-9

23-10

23-12

INT - Interrupt Subroutine

I/O Interrupt

Instruction Type: input

Table 23-1: Execution Time for the INT Instruction

True

0.16

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

n/a

The INT instruction is used as a label to identify a user interrupt service routine (ISR).

This instruction is placed as the first instruction on a rung, and is always evaluated as true. Use of the INT instruction is optional.

23-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

STS - Selectable Timed Start

Selectable Timed Start

Time 1

Instruction Type: output

Table 23-2: Execution Time for the STS Instruction

When Rung Is:

True

62.73

µ s

False

0.00

µ s

The STS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interrupts. The STI instruction has one operand:

Time - This is the amount of time (in milliseconds) which must expire prior to executing the selectable timed user interrupt. A value of zero disables the STI function. The time range is from 0 to 65,535 milliseconds.

The STS instruction applies the specified set point to the STI function as follows:

• If a zero set point is specified, the STI is disabled and STI:0/TIE is cleared (0).

• If the STI is disabled (not timing) and a value greater than 0 is entered into the set point, the STI starts timing to the new set point and STI:0/TIE is set (1).

• If the STI is currently timing and the set point is changed, the new setting takes effect immediately and the STI continues to time until it reaches the new set point.

Note that if the new setting is less than the current accumulated time, the STI times-out immediately. For example, if the STI has been timing for 15 microseconds, and the STI set point is changed from 20 microseconds to 10 microseconds, an STI user interrupt occurs at the next start-of-rung.

Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below:

Table 23-3: STS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types

For definitions of the terms used in this table see “Using the Instruction Descriptions” on page 11-2.

Data Files Function Files

Address

Mode

Parameter

Address

Level

Time • • • • • • • • •

23-8

Using Interrupts

UID - User Interrupt Disable

User Interrupt Disable

Interrupt Types 5

Instruction Type: output

Table 23-4: Execution Time for the UID Instruction

True

0.59

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts. The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits:

Table 23-5: Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction

Interrupt

EII - Event Input Interrupts

EII - Event Input Interrupts

HSC - High Speed Counter

EII - Event Input Interrupts

EII - Event Input Interrupts

HSC - High Speed Counter

STI - Selectable Timed Interrupts

Note: Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero.

Element

Event 0

Event 1

HSC0

Event 2

Event 3

HSC1

STI

Decimal Value

64

32

4

2

16

8

1

Corresponding Bit

bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

To disable interrupt(s):

1. Select which interrupts you want to disable.

2. Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt(s) you selected.

3. Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt.

4. Enter the sum into the UID instruction.

For example, to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3:

EII Event 1 = 32, EII Event 3 = 4

32 + 4 = 36 (enter this value)

23-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

UIE - User Interrupt Enable

User Interrupt Enable

Interrupt Types 4

Instruction Type: output

Table 23-6: Execution Time for the UIE Instruction

True

0.66

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts. The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits:

Table 23-7: Types of Interrupts Enabled by the UIE Instruction

Interrupt

EII - Event Input Interrupts

EII - Event Input Interrupts

HSC - High Speed Counter

EII - Event Input Interrupts

EII - Event Input Interrupts

HSC - High Speed Counter

STI - Selectable Timed Interrupts

Note: Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero.

Element

Event 0

Event 1

HSC0

Event 2

Event 3

HSC1

STI

Decimal Value

64

32

4

2

16

8

1

Corresponding Bit

bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

23-10

Using Interrupts

To enable interrupt(s):

1. Select which interrupts you want to enable.

2. Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt(s) you selected.

3. Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt.

4. Enter the sum into the UIE instruction.

For example, to enable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3:

EII Event 1 = 32, EII Event 3 = 4

32 + 4 = 36 (enter this value)

!

ATTENTION: If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL, OTE, or UIE, this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung (last instruction on last branch). It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung.

23-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

UIF - User Interrupt Flush

User Interrupt Flush

Interrupt Types 1

Instruction Type: output

Table 23-8: Execution Time for the UIF Instruction

True

9.79

µ s

When Rung Is:

False

0.00

µ s

The UIF instruction is used to flush (remove pending interrupts from the system) selected user interrupts. The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding flush bits:

Table 23-9: Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction

Interrupt

EII - Event Input Interrupts

EII - Event Input Interrupts

HSC - High Speed Counter

EII - Event Input Interrupts

EII - Event Input Interrupts

HSC - High Speed Counter

STI - Selectable Timed Interrupts

Note: Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero.

Element

Event 0

Event 1

HSC0

Event 2

Event 3

HSC1

STI

Decimal Value

64

32

4

2

16

8

1

Corresponding Bit

bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

To flush interrupt(s):

1. Select which interrupts you want to flush.

2. Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt(s) you selected.

3. Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt.

4. Enter the sum into the UIF instruction.

For example, to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3:

EII Event 1 = 32, EII Event 3 = 4

32 + 4 = 36 (enter this value)

23-12

Using Interrupts

Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) Function File

The Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI) within the MicroLogix 1500 controller provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements. The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive.

Example of where you would use the STI are:

• PID type applications, where a calculation must be performed at a specific time interval.

• A motion application, where the motion instruction (PTO) needs to be scanned at a specific rate to guarantee a consistent acceleration/deceleration profile.

• A block of logic that needs to be scanned more often.

How an STI is used is typically driven by the demands/requirements of the application. It operates using the following sequence:

1. The user selects a time interval.

2. When a valid interval is set and the STI is properly configured, the controller monitors the STI value.

3. When the time period has elapsed, the controller’s normal operation is interrupted.

4. The controller then scans the logic in the STI program file.

5. When the STI file scan is completed, the controller returns to where it was prior to the interrupt, and continues normal operation.

23-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Selectable Time Interrupt (STI) Function File Sub-Elements Summary

Table 23-10: Selectable Timed Interrupt Function File (STI:0)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type

PFN - Program File Number

ER - Error Code

UIX - User Interrupt Executing

UIE - User Interrupt Enable

UIL - User Interrupt Lost

UIP - User Interrupt Pending

TIE - Timed Interrupt Enabled

AS - Auto Start

ED - Error Detected

SPM - Set Point Msec

STI:0.PFN

STI:0.ER

STI:0/UIX

STI:0/UIE

STI:0/UIL

STI:0/UIP

STI:0/TIE

STI:0/AS

STI:0/ED

STI:0.SPM

word (INT) word (INT) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) word (INT) control status status control status status control control status control

User Program

Access

read only read only read only read/write read/write read only read/write read only read only read/write

For More

Information

23-15

23-15

23-16

23-16

23-16

23-17

23-17

23-17

23-18

23-18

23-14

Using Interrupts

STI Function File Sub-Elements

STI Program File Number (PFN)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only PFN - Program File Number STI:0.PFN

word (INT) control

The PFN (Program File Number) variable defines which subroutine is called

(executed) when the timed interrupt times out. A valid subroutine file is any program file (3 to 255).

The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller, it is programmed and operates the same as any other program file. From the control program perspective it is unique, in that it is automatically scanned based on the STI set point.

STI Error Code (ER)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only ER - Error Code STI:0.ER

word (INT) status

Error codes detected by the STI sub-system are displayed in this register. The table below explains the error codes.

Table 23-11: STI Error Code

Error

Code

1

Recoverable Fault

(Controller)

Invalid Program File

Description

Program file number is less than 3, greater than 255, or does not exist

23-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

STI User Interrupt Executing (UIX)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only UIX - User Interrupt Executing STI:0/UIX binary (bit) status

The UIX (User Interrupt Executing) bit is set whenever the STI mechanism completes timing and the controller is scanning the STI PFN. The UIX bit is cleared when the controller completes processing the STI subroutine.

The STI UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an

STI interrupt is executing.

STI User Interrupt Enable (UIE)

Sub-Element Description

UIE - User Interrupt Enable

Address

STI:0/UIE

Data Format

binary (bit)

Type

control

User Program

Access

read/write

The UIE (User Interrupt Enable) bit is used to enable or disable STI subroutine processing. This bit must be set if the user wants the controller to process the STI subroutine at the configured time interval.

STI User Interrupt Lost (UIL)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read/write UIL - User Interrupt Lost STI:0/UIL binary (bit) status

The UIL (User Interrupt Lost) is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost. The MicroLogix 1500 can process 1 active, and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions.

This bit is set by the MicroLogix 1500. It is up to the control program to utilize, track if necessary, and clear the lost condition.

23-16

Using Interrupts

STI User Interrupt Pending (UIP)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only UIP - User Interrupt Pending STI:0/UIP binary (bit) status

The UIP (User Interrupt Pending) is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending. This status bit can be monitored, or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately.

This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500, and is set and cleared automatically.

STI Timed Interrupt Enabled (TIE)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read/write TIE - Timed Interrupt Enabled STI:0/TIE binary (bit) control

The TIE (Timed Interrupt Enabled) control bit is used to enable or disable the timed interrupt mechanism. When set (1), timing is enabled, when clear (0) timing is disabled. If this bit is cleared (disabled) while the timer is running, the accumulated value is cleared (0). If the bit is then set (1), timing will start.

STI Auto Start (AS)

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only AS - Auto Start STI:0/AS binary (bit) control

The AS (Auto Start) is a control bit that can be used in the control program. The auto start bit is configured with the programming device, and stored as part of the user program. The auto start bit defines if the STI function automatically starts whenever the MicroLogix 1500 controller enters any executing mode.

23-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

STI Error Detected (ED)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only ED - Error Detected STI:0/ED binary (bit) status

The ED (Error Detected) flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the STI sub-system. The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error. When this bit is set the user should look at the error code in parameter STI:0.ER

This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500, and is set and cleared automatically.

STI Set Point Milliseconds Between Interrupts (SPM)

Sub-Element

Description

Address Data Format

SPM - Set Point Msec STI:0.SPM

word (INT)

Range Type

0 to 65,535 control

User Program

Access

read/write

When the controller transitions to an executing mode, the SPM (set point in milliseconds) value is loaded into the STI. If the STI is configured correctly, and enabled, the program file identified in the STI variable PFN is scanned at this interval.

This value can be changed from the control program by using the STS instruction.

Note:

The minimum value cannot be less than the time required to scan the STI program file (STI:0.PFN) plus the Interrupt Latency.

23-18

Using the Event Input Interrupt (EII) Function File

Using Interrupts

The EII (event input interrupt) is a feature that allows the user to scan a specific program file (subroutine), when an input condition is detected from a field device.

Within the function file section of RSLogix 500, the user sees an EII folder. Within the folder are four EII elements. Each of these elements (EII:0, EII:1, EII:2, and

EII:3) are identical, this explanation uses EII:0.

Each EII can be configured to monitor any one of the first eight (inputs I1:0.0/0 to

I1:0.0/7). Each EII can be configured to detect rising edge or falling edge input signals. When the configured input signal is detected at the input terminal, the controller immediately scans the configured subroutine.

23-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Event Input Interrupt (EII) Function File Sub-Elements Summary

Table 23-12: Event Input Interrupt Function File (EII:0)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type

PFN - Program File Number

ER - Error Code

UIX - User Interrupt Executing

UIE - User Interrupt Enable

UIL - User Interrupt Lost

UIP - User Interrupt Pending

EIE - Event Interrupt Enabled

AS - Auto Start

ED - Error Detected

ES - Edge Select

IS - Input Select

EII:0.PFN

EII:0.ER

EII:0/UIX

EII:0/UIE

EII:0/UIL

EII:0/UIP

EII:0/EIE

EII:0/AS

EII:0/ED

EII:0/ES

EII:0.IS

word (INT) word (INT) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) word (INT) control status status control status status control control status control control

User Program

Access

read only read only read only read/write read/write read only read/write read only read only read only read only

For More

Information

23-21

23-21

23-22

23-22

23-22

23-23

23-23

23-23

23-24

23-24

23-24

23-20

Using Interrupts

EII Function File Sub-Elements

EII Program File Number (PFN)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only PFN - Program File Number EII:0.PFN

word (INT) control

PFN (Program File Number) defines which subroutine is called (executed) when the input terminal assigned to EII:0 detects a signal. A valid subroutine file is any program file (3 to 255).

The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller. It is programmed and operates the same as any other program file. From the control program perspective it is unique, in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the EII.

EII Error Code (ER)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only ER - Error Code EII:0.ER

word (INT) status

ERs (Error Codes) detected by the EII sub-system are displayed in this register. The table below explains the error codes.

Table 23-13: EII Error Codes

Error

Code

1

Recoverable Fault

(Controller)

Invalid Program File

2

3

Invalid Input

Input Overlap

Description

Program file number is less than 3, greater than 255, or does not exist

Valid numbers must be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7

EIIs cannot share inputs. Each EII must have a unique input.

23-21

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

EII User Interrupt Executing (UIX)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only UIX - User Interrupt Executing EII:0/UIX binary (bit) status

The UIX (User Interrupt Executing) bit is set whenever the EII mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the PFN. The EII mechanism clears the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the EII subroutine.

The EII UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an

EII interrupt is executing.

EII User Interrupt Enable (UIE)

Sub-Element Description

UIE - User Interrupt Enable

Address

EII:0/UIE

Data Format

binary (bit)

Type

control

User Program

Access

read/write

The UIE (User Interrupt Enable) bit is used to enable or disable EII subroutine processing. This bit must be set if the user wants the controller to process the EII subroutine when EII event occurs.

EII User Interrupt Lost (UIL)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read/write UIL - User Interrupt Lost EII:0/UIL binary (bit) status

UIL (User Interrupt Lost) is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost.

The MicroLogix 1500 can process 1 active, and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions.

This bit is set by the MicroLogix 1500. It is up to the control program to utilize, track, and clear the lost condition.

23-22

Using Interrupts

EII User Interrupt Pending (UIP)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only UIP - User Interrupt Pending EII:0/UIP binary (bit) status

UIP (User Interrupt Pending) is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending.

This status bit can be monitored, or used for logic purposes, in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately.

This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500, and is set and cleared automatically.

EII Event Interrupt Enable (EIE)

EII Auto Start (AS)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read/write EIE - Event Interrupt Enabled EII:0/EIE binary (bit) control

EIE (Event Interrupt Enabled) allows the event interrupt function to be enabled or disabled from the control program. When set (1), the function is enabled, when cleared (0, default) the function is disabled.

This bit is controlled by the user program, and retains its value through a power cycle.

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only AS - Auto Start EII:0/AS binary (bit) control

AS (Auto Start) is a control bit that can be used in the control program. The auto start bit is configured with the programming device, and stored as part of the user program.

The auto start bit defines if the EII function automatically starts whenever the

MicroLogix 1500 controller enters any executing mode.

23-23

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

EII Error Detected (ED)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only ED - Error Detected EII:0/ED binary (bit) status

The ED (Error Detected) flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the EII sub-system. The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error. When this bit is set the user should look at the specific error code in parameter EII:0.ER

This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500, and is set and cleared automatically.

EII Edge Select (ES)

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only ES - Edge Select EII:0/ES binary (bit) control

The ES (Edge Select) bit selects the type of trigger that causes an Event Interrupt.

This bit allows the EII to be configured for rising edge (off-to-on, 0-to-1), or falling edge (on-to-off, 1-to-0) signal detection. This selection is based on the type of field device that is connected to the controller.

EII Input Select (IS)

The default condition is 1, which configures the EII for rising edge operation.

Sub-Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program

Access

read only IS - Input Select EII:0.IS

word (INT) control

The IS (Input Select) parameter is used to configure each EII to a specific input on the controller. Valid inputs are 0 to 7, which correspond to I1:0.0/0 to I1:0.0/7.

This parameter is configured with the programming device and cannot be changed from the control program.

23-24

24

Process Control Instruction

Process Control Instruction

This chapter describes the MicroLogix 1500 Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) instruction. The PID instruction is an output instruction that controls physical properties such as temperature, pressure, liquid level, or flow rate using process loops.

The PID Concept

The PID instruction normally controls a closed loop using inputs from an analog input module and providing an output to an analog output module. For temperature control, you can convert the analog output to a time proportioning on/off output for driving a

heater or cooling unit. An example appears on page 24-21.

The PID instruction can be operated in the timed mode or the Selectable Time

Interrupt (STI mode). In the timed mode, the instruction updates its output periodically at a user-selectable rate. In the STI mode, the instruction should be placed in an STI interrupt subroutine. It then updates its output every time the STI subroutine is scanned. The STI time interval and the PID loop update rate must be the

same in order for the equation to execute properly. See “Using the Selectable Timed

Interrupt (STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information on STI interrupts.

PID closed loop control holds a process variable at a desired set point. A flow rate/ fluid level example is shown below.

Feed Forward or Bias

Set Point

Flow Rate

Error

PID

Equation

Process

Variable

Control

Output

Level

Detector

Control Valve

24-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The PID equation controls the process by sending an output signal to the control valve. The greater the error between the setpoint and process variable input, the greater the output signal. Alternately, the smaller the error, the smaller the output signal. An additional value (feed forward or bias) can be added to the control output as an offset. The PID result (control variable) drives the process variable toward the set point.

The PID Equation

The PID instruction uses the following algorithm:

Standard equation with dependent gains:

Output

=

K

C

+

1

-----

T

I

( )

d t

+

T

D

D PV

)

-----------------

df

+

bias

Standard Gains constants are:

Term Range (Low to High) Reference

Controller Gain K

C 0.01 to 327.67 (dimensionless)

① Proportional

Reset Term 1/T

I

327.67 to 0.01 (minutes per repeat)

① Integral

Rate Term T

D

0.01 to 327.67 (minutes)

Derivative

Applies to MicroLogix 1500 PID range when Reset and Gain Range (RG) bit is set to 1. For more

information on reset and gain, see “PLC 5 Gain Range (RG)” on page 24-15.

The derivative term (rate) provides smoothing by means of a low-pass filter. The cutoff frequency of the filter is 16 times greater than the corner frequency of the derivative term.

24-2

Process Control Instruction

PD Data File

The PID instruction implemented by the MicroLogix 1500 is virtually identical in function to the PID implementation used by the Allen-Bradley SLC 5/03 and higher processors. Minor differences primarily involve enhancements to terminology. The major difference is that the PID instruction now has its own data file. In the SLC family of processors, the PID instruction operated as a block of registers within an integer file. The Micrologix 1500 PID instruction utilizes a PD data file.

You can create a PD data file by creating a new data file and classifying it as a PD file type. RSLogix automatically creates a new PD file or a PD sub-element whenever a

PID instruction is programmed on a rung.

Each PD data file has a maximum of 255 elements, and each PID instruction requires a unique PD element. Each PD element is composed of 20 sub-elements, which include bit, integer and long integer data. All of the examples in this chapter use PD file 10 sub-element 0.

24-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PID Instruction

Normally, you place the PID instruction on a rung without conditional logic. If conditional logic is in front of the PID instruction, the output remains at its last value when the rung is false. The integral term is also cleared when the rung is false.

Note:

In order to stop and restart the PID instruction, you need to create a false-to-true rung transition.

The example below shows a PID instruction on a rung with RSLogix 500 programming software.

When programming, the setup screen provides access to the PID instruction configuration parameters. The illustration shows the RSLogix 500 setup screen.

24-4

Process Control Instruction

Input Parameters

The table below shows the input parameter addresses, data formats, and types of user program access. See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter.

Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data

Format

word (INT)

Range Type User Program

Access

status read only SPV - Scaled Process Variable PD10:0.SPV

MAXS - Setpoint Maximum

MINS - Setpoint Minimum

OSP - Old Setpoint Value

PD10:0.MAXS

PD10:0.MINS

PD10:0.OSP

word (INT) word (INT) word (INT)

0 to 16383

-32,768 to +32,767

-32,768 to +32,767

-32,768 to +32,767 control control status read/write read/write read only

For More

Information

24-5

24-5

24-6

24-6

Scaled Process Variable (SPV)

Input Parameter Descriptions Address Range

SPV - Scaled Process Variable PD10:0.SPV

Data

Format

word (INT) 0 to 16383

Type User Program

Access

status read only

The SPV (Scaled Process Variable) is the analog input variable. If scaling is enabled, the range is the minimum scaled value (MinS) to maximum scaled value (MaxS).

If the SPV is configured to be read in engineering units, then this parameter

corresponds to the value of the process variable in engineering units. See “Analog I/O

Scaling” on page 24-21 for more information on scaling.

Setpoint MAX (MAXS)

Input Parameter Descriptions

MAXS - Setpoint Maximum

Address Data

Format

Range Type

PD10:0.MAXS

word (INT) -32,768 to +32,767 control

User Program

Access

read/write

If the SPV is read in engineering units, then the MAXS (Setpoint Maximum) parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its maximum value.

24-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Setpoint MIN (MINS)

Input Parameter Descriptions

MINS - Setpoint Minimum

Address Data

Format

Range Type

PD10:0.MINS

word (INT) -32,768 to +32,767 control

User Program

Access

read/write

If the SPV is read in engineering units, then the MINS (Setpoint Minimum) parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its minimum value.

Note:

MinS - MaxS scaling allows you to work in engineering units. The deadband, error, and SPV will also be displayed in engineering units.

The process variable, PV, must be within the range of 0 to 16383. Use of

MinS - MaxS does not minimize PID PV resolution.

Scaled errors greater than +32767 or less than -32768 cannot be represented. If the scaled error is greater than +32767, it is represented as +32767. If the scaled error is less than -32768, it is represented as -32768.

Old Setpoint Value (OSP)

Input Parameter Descriptions

OSP - Old Setpoint Value

Address

PD10:0.OSP

Data

Format

Range Type

word (INT) -32,768 to +32,767 status

User Program

Access

read only

The OSP (Old Setpoint Value) is substituted for the current setpoint, if the current setpoint goes out of range of the setpoint scaling (limiting) parameters.

24-6

Process Control Instruction

Output Parameters

The table below shows the output parameter addresses, data formats, and types of user program access. See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter.

Output Parameter Descriptions

CV - Control Variable

CVP - Control Variable Percent

OL - Output Limit

CVH - Control Variable High Limit

CVL - Control Variable Low Limit

Address Data

Format

Range

User-defined word (INT) 0 - 16,383

PD10:0.CVP

word (INT)

PD10:0/OL binary

PD10:0.CVH

PD10:0.CVL

word (INT) word (INT)

0 - 100

1 = enabled

0 = disabled

0 - 100%

0 - 100%

Type

control control control control control

User Program

Access

read/write read/write read/write

For More

Information

24-7

24-8

24-8

read/write read/write

24-9

24-9

Control Variable (CV)

Output Parameter Descriptions

CV - Control Variable

Address Data

Format

Range

User-defined word (INT) 0 - 16,383

Type

control

User Program

Access

read/write

The CV (Control Variable) is user-defined. See the ladder rung below.

24-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Control Variable Percent (CVP)

Output Parameter Descriptions

CVP - Control Variable Percent

Address Data

Format

PD10:0.CVP

word (INT)

Range

0 - 100

Type

control

User Program

Access

read/write

CVP (Control Variable Percent) displays the control variable as a percentage. The range is 0 to 100%. If the PD10:0/AM bit is off (automatic mode), this value tracks the control variable (CV) output. Any value written by the programming software will be overwritten. If the PD10:0/AM bit is on (manual mode), this value can be set by the programming software, and the control variable output tracks the control variable percent value.

Output Limit (OL)

Output Parameter Descriptions Address

OL - Output Limit PD10:0/OL

Data

Format

binary

Range Type

1 = enabled

0 = disabled control

User Program

Access

read/write

An enabled (1) value enables output limiting to the values defined in PD10:0.CVH

(Control Variable High) and PD10.0.CVL (Control Variable Low).

A disabled (0) value disables OL (Output Limiting).

24-8

Process Control Instruction

Control Variable High Limit (CVH)

Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data

Format

CVH - Control Variable High Limit PD10:0.CVH

word (INT)

Range

0 - 100%

Type

control

User Program

Access

read/write

When the output limit bit (PD10:0/OL) is enabled (1), the CVH (Control Value High) you enter is the maximum output (in percent) that the control variable attains. If the calculated CV exceeds the CVH, the CV is set (overridden) to the value you entered, and the upper limit alarm bit (UL) is set.

When the output limit bit (PD10:0/OL) is disabled (0), the CVH value you enter determines when the upper limit alarm bit (UL) is set.

If CV exceeds the maximum value, the output is not overridden, and the upper limit alarm bit (UL) is set.

Control Variable Low Limit (CVL)

Output Parameter Descriptions

CVL - Control Variable Low Limit

Address Data

Format

PD10:0.CVL

word (INT)

Range

0 - 100%

Type

control

User Program

Access

read/write

When the output limit bit (PD10:0/OL) is enabled (1), the CVL (Control Value Low) you enter is the minimum output (in percent) that the Control Variable attains. If the calculated CV is below the minimum value, the CV is set (overridden) to the CVL value you entered, and the lower limit alarm bit (LL) is set.

When the output limit bit (PD10:0/OL) is disabled (0), the CVL value you enter determines when the lower limit alarm bit (LL) is set. If CV is below the minimum value, the output is not overridden, and the lower limit alarm bit (LL) is set.

24-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Tuning Parameters

The table below shows the tuning parameter addresses, data formats, and types of user program access. See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter.

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data

Format

word (INT) KC - Controller Gain - K c

TI - Reset Term - T i

TD - Rate Term - T d

TM - Time Mode

PD10:0.KC

PD10:0.TI

PD 10:0.TD

word (INT) word (INT)

PD10:0.TM

binary

LUT - Loop Update Time PD10:0.LUT

word (INT)

ZCD - Zero Crossing Deadband PD10:0.ZCD

word (INT)

FF - Feed Forward Bias

SE - Scaled Error

AM - Automatic/Manual

CM - Control Mode

PD10:0.FF

PD10:0.SE

PD10:0/AM

PD10:0/CM word (INT) word (INT) binary (bit) binary (bit)

Range

0 to 32,767

0 to 32,767

0 to 32,767

0 or 1

1 to 1024

0 to 32,767

-16,383 to +16,383

-32,768 to +32,767

0 or 1

0 or 1

Type

control control control control control control control status control control

User Program

Access

read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read only read/write read/write

DB - PV in Deadband

RG - PLC 5 Gain Range

SC - Setpoint Scaling

TF - Loop Update Too Fast

DA - Derivative Action Bit

UL - CV Upper Limit Alarm

LL - CV Lower Limit Alarm

SP - Setpoint Out of Range

PV - PV Out of Range

DN - Done

EN - Enable

IS - Integral Sum

AD - Altered Derivative Term

PD10:0/DB

PD10:0/RG

PD10:0/SC

PD10:0/TF

PD10:0/DA

PD10:0/UL

PD10:0/LL

PD10:0/SP

PD10:0/PV

PD10:0/DN

PD10:0/EN

PD10:0.IS

PD10:0.AD

binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit) binary (bit)

Lword (32bit INT)

Lword (32bit INT)

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

-2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647

-2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647 status control control status control status status

status status status status status status read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read/write read only read only read/write read only

For More

Information

24-11

24-11

24-12

24-15

24-15

24-16

24-16

24-16

24-16

24-17

24-17

24-12

24-13

24-13

24-13

24-14

24-14

24-14

24-17

24-17

24-18

24-18

24-18

24-10

Process Control Instruction

Controller Gain (K

c

)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

KC - Controller Gain - K c

PD10:0.KC

Data

Format

word (INT)

Range

0 to 32,767

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

Gain K c

(word 3) is the proportional gain, ranging from 0 to 3276.7 (when RG = 0), or 0 to 327.67 (when RG = 1). Set this gain to one-half the value needed to cause the output to oscillate when the reset and rate terms (below) are set to zero.

Note:

Controller gain is affected by the reset and gain range (RG) bit. For

information, see“PLC 5 Gain Range (RG)” on page 24-15.

Reset Term (T

i

)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

TI - Reset Term - T i

PD10:0.TI

Data

Format

word (INT)

Range

0 to 32,767

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

Reset T i

(word 4) is the Integral gain, ranging from 0 to 3276.7 (when RG = 0), or

327.67 (when RG = 1) minutes per repeat. Set the reset time equal to the natural period measured in the above gain calibration. A value of 1 will add the minimum integral term into the PID equation.

Note:

Reset term is affected by the reset and gain range (RG) bit. For

information, see“PLC 5 Gain Range (RG)” on page 24-15.

24-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Rate Term (T

d

)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions

TD - Rate Term - T d

Address Data

Format

PD 10:0.TD

word (INT)

Range

0 to 32,767

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

Rate T d

(word 5) is the Derivative term. The adjustment range is 0 to 327.67 minutes.

Set this value to 1/8 of the integral gain T i

.

Note:

This word is not effected by the reset and gain range (RG) bit. For

information, see“PLC 5 Gain Range (RG)” on page 24-15.

Time Mode (TM)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

TM - Time Mode PD10:0.TM

Data

Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

The time mode bit specifies when the PID is in timed mode (1) or STI mode (0). This bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program.

When set for timed mode, the PID updates the CV at the rate specified in the loop update parameter (PD10:0.LUT).

When set for STI mode the PID updates the CV every time the PID instruction is scanned in the control program. When you select STI, program the PID instruction in the STI interrupt subroutine. The STI routine should have a time interval equal to the setting of the PID “loop update” parameter (PD10:0.LUT). Set the STI period in word

STI:0.SPM. For example, if the loop update time contains the value 10 (for 100 ms), then the STI time interval must also equal 100 (for 100 ms).

Note:

When using timed mode, your processor scan time should be at least ten times faster than the loop update time to prevent timing inaccuracies or disturbances.

24-12

Process Control Instruction

Loop Update Time (LUT)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions

LUT - Loop Update Time

Address Data

Format

PD10:0.LUT

word (INT)

Range

1 to 1024

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

The loop update time (word 13) is the time interval between PID calculations. The entry is in 0.01 second intervals. Enter a loop update time five to ten times faster than the natural period of the load. The natural period of the load is determined by setting the reset and rate parameters to zero and then increasing the gain until the output begins to oscillate. When in STI mode, this value must equal the STI time interval value loaded in STI:0.SPM. The valid range is 0.01 to 10.24 seconds.

Zero Crossing Deadband (ZCD)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data

Format

ZCD - Zero Crossing Deadband PD10:0.ZCD

word (INT)

Range

0 to 32,767

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value entered. The deadband is entered at the zero crossing of the process variable and the setpoint. This means that the deadband is in effect only after the process variable enters the deadband and passes through the setpoint.

The valid range is 0 to the scaled maximum, or 0 to 16,383 when no scaling exists.

Feed Forward Bias (FF)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

FF - Feed Forward Bias PD10:0.FF

Data

Format

Range Type

word (INT) -16,383 to +16,383 control

User Program

Access

read/write

The feed forward bias is used to compensate for disturbances that may affect the CV output.

24-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Scaled Error (SE)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

SE - Scaled Error PD10:0.SE

Data

Format

Range Type

word (INT) -32,768 to +32,767 status

User Program

Access

read only

Scaled error is the difference between the process variable and the setpoint. The format of the difference (E = SP-PV or E = PV-SP) is determined by the control mode

(CM) bit. See “Control Mode (CM)” on page 24-14.

Automatic / Manual (AM)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

AM - Automatic/Manual PD10:0/AM

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

The auto/manual bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program.

When off (0), it specifies automatic operation. When on (1), it specifies manual operation. In automatic operation, the instruction controls the control variable (CV).

In manual operation, the user/control program controls the CV. During tuning, set this bit to manual.

Note:

Output limiting is also applied when in manual.

Control Mode (CM)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

CM - Control Mode PD10:0/CM

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

Control mode, or forward-/reverse-acting, toggles the values E=SP-PV and E=PV-SP.

Forward acting (E=PV-SP) causes the control variable to increase when the process variable is greater than the setpoint.

Reverse acting (E=SP-PV) causes the control variable to decrease when the process variable is greater than the setpoint.

24-14

Process Control Instruction

PV in Deadband (DB)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

DB - PV in Deadband PD10:0/DB

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read/write

This bit is set (1) when the process variable is within the zero-crossing deadband range.

PLC 5 Gain Range (RG)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

RG - PLC 5 Gain Range PD10:0/RG

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

When set (1), the reset (TI) and gain range enhancement bit (RG) causes the reset minute/repeat value and the gain multiplier (KC) to be enhanced by a factor of 10.

That means a reset multiplier of 0.01 and a gain multiplier of 0.01.

When clear (0), this bit allows the reset minutes/repeat value and the gain multiplier value to be evaluated with a reset multiplier of 0.1 and a gain multiplier of 0.1.

Example with the RG bit set: The reset term (TI) of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0.01 minutes/repeat (0.6 seconds/repeat) will be applied to the PID integral algorithm. The gain value (KC) of 1 indicates that the error will be multiplied by 0.01 and applied to the PID algorithm.

Example with the RG bit clear: The reset term (TI) of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0.1 minutes/repeat (6.0 seconds/repeat) will be applied to the PID integral algorithm. The gain value (KC) of 1 indicates that the error will be multiplied by 0.1 and applied to the PID algorithm.

Note:

The rate multiplier (TD) is not affected by this selection.

24-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Setpoint Scaling (SC)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

SC - Setpoint Scaling PD10:0/SC

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

The SC bit is cleared when setpoint scaling values are specified.

Loop Update Too Fast (TF)

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

TF - Loop Update Too Fast PD10:0/TF

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read/write

The TF bit is set by the PID algorithm if the loop update time specified cannot be achieved by the controller due to scan time limitations.

If this bit is set, correct the problem by updating your PID loop at a slower rate or move the PID instruction to an STI interrupt routine. Reset and rate gains will be in error if the instruction operates with this bit set.

Derivative Action Bit (DA)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

DA - Derivative Action Bit PD10:0/DA

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

control read/write

When set (1), the derivative (rate) action (DA) bit causes the derivative (rate) calculation to be evaluated on the error instead of the process variable (PV). When clear (0), this bit allows the derivative (rate) calculation to be evaluated where the derivative is performed on the PV.

CV Upper Limit Alarm (UL)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

UL - CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10:0/UL

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read/write

The control variable upper limit alarm bit is set when the calculated CV output exceeds the upper CV limit.

24-16

Process Control Instruction

CV Lower Limit Alarm (LL)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

LL - CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10:0/LL

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read/write

The control variable lower limit alarm bit is set (1) when the calculated CV output is less than the lower CV limit.

Setpoint Out Of Range (SP)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read/write

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

SP - Setpoint Out of Range PD10:0/SP

Data

Format

binary (bit)

This bit is set (1) when the setpoint:

• exceeds the maximum scaled value, or

• is less than the minimum scaled value.

PV Out Of Range (PV)

Done (DN)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

PV - PV Out of Range PD10:0/PV

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read/write

The process variable out of range bit is set (1) when the unscaled process variable

• exceeds 16,383, or

• is less than zero.

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

DN - Done PD10:0/DN

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read only

The PID done bit is set (1) for one scan when the PID algorithm is computed. It resets automatically.

24-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Enable (EN)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

EN - Enable PD10:0/EN

Data

Format

binary (bit)

Range

0 or 1

Type User Program

Access

status read only

The PID enabled bit is set (1) whenever the PID instruction is enabled. It follows the rung state.

Integral Sum (IS)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

IS - Integral Sum PD10:0.IS

Data

Format

Lword (32bit INT)

Range

-2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647

Type User Program

Access

status read/write

This is the result of the integration

1

T

I

d t

.

Altered Derivative Term (AD)

Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address

AD - Altered Derivative Term PD10:0.AD

Data

Format

Lword (32bit INT)

Range

-2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647

Type User Program

Access

status read only

This long word is used internally to track the change in the process variable within the loop update time.

24-18

Process Control Instruction

Runtime Errors

Error code 0036 appears in the status file when a PID instruction runtime error occurs.

Code 0036 covers the following PID error conditions, each of which has been assigned a unique single byte code value that appears in the MSbyte of the second word of the control block.

Error Code

11H

12H

13H

14H

23H

31H

41H

Description of Error Condition or

Conditions

1.

Loop update time

D t

> 1024

2.

Loop update time

D t

= 0

Proportional gain

K c

< 0

Integral gain (reset)

T i

< 0

Derivative gain (rate)

T d

< 0

Scaled setpoint min

MinS > Scaled setpoint max MaxS

If you are using setpoint scaling and

MinS

> setpoint

SP

>

MaxS

, or

Corrective Action

Change loop update time

Change proportional gain

0 < D

t

< 1024

K c

to

0 < K

c

Change integral gain (reset)

T

Change derivative gain (rate)

T i

to

d

to

0 < T

0 < T

d i

Change scaled setpoint min

MinS

to

-32768

< MinS < MaxS < +32767

If you are using setpoint scaling, then change the setpoint

SP

to

MinS

< SP < MaxS, or

If you are not using setpoint scaling, then change the setpoint SP to 0 < SP < 16383.

If you are not using setpoint scaling and

0 > setpoint

SP

> 16383, then during the initial execution of the PID loop, this error occurs and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set. However, during subsequent execution of the PID loop if an invalid loop setpoint is entered, the PID loop continues to execute using the old setpoint, and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set.

Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected Scaling Selected

1. Deadband < 0, or 1. Deadband < 0, or

Change deadband to

0 < deadband <

(MaxS - MinS) < 16383

Scaling Deselected

Change deadband to

0 < deadband < 16383

24-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Error Code

51H

52H

53H

60H

Description of Error Condition or

Conditions

2. Deadband

>

(MaxS – MinS)

2. Deadband >

16383

1. Output high limit < 0, or

2. Output high limit > 100

Corrective Action

Change output high limit to

0 < output high limit < 100

1. Output low limit < 0, or

2. Output low limit > 100

Change output low limit to

0 < output low limit < output high limit < 100

Output low limit > output high limit

PID is being entered for the second time. (PID loop was interrupted by an I/O interrupt, which is then interrupted by the PID STI interrupt.

Change output low limit to

0 < output low limit < output high limit < 100

You have at least three PID loops in your program:

One in the main program or subroutine file, one in an I/O interrupt file, and one in the STI subroutine file. You must alter your ladder program and eliminate the potential nesting of PID loops.

24-20

Process Control Instruction

Analog I/O Scaling

To configure an analog input for use in a PID instruction, the analog data must be scaled to match the PID instruction parameters. In the MicroLogix 1500 the process variable (PV) in the PID instruction is designed to work with a data range of 0 to

16,383. The 1769 Compact I/O analog modules (1769-IF4 and 1769-OF2) have the ability to scale analog data on board the module itself. Scaling data is required to match the range of the analog input, to the input range of the PID instruction. The ability to perform scaling in the I/O modules reduces the amount of programming required in the system, and makes PID setup much easier.

The example shows a 1769-IF4 module. The IF4 has 4 inputs, which are individually configurable. In this example analog input 0 is configured for 0 to 10V and is scaled in engineering units. Word 0 is not being used in a PID instruction. Input #1 (word 1) is configured for 4 to 20 mA operation with scaling configured for a PID instruction.

This configures the analog data for the PID instruction.

Field Device Input Signal

> 20.0 mA

20.0 mA

4.0 mA

< 4.0 mA

Analog Register Scaled Data

16,384 to 17,406

16,383

0

-819 to -1

The analog configuration screen is accessed from within RSLogix 500.

Simply double click on the I/O configuration item in the “Controller” folder, and then double click on the specific I/O card that you wish to configure.

The configuration for the analog output is virtually identical. Simply address the PID control variable (CV) to the analog output address, and configure the analog output to “Scaled for PID” behavior.

24-21

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Application Notes

The following paragraphs discuss:

• Input/Output Ranges

• Scaling to Engineering Units

• Zero-crossing Deadband

• Output Alarms

• Output Limiting with Anti-reset Windup

• The Manual Mode

• Feed Forward

• Time Proportioning Outputs

Input/Output Ranges

The input module measuring the process variable (PV) must have a full scale binary range of 0 to 16383. If this value is less than 0 (bit 15 set), then a value of zero is used for PV and the “Process var out of range” bit is set (bit 12 of word 0 in the control block). If the process variable is greater than 16383 (bit 14 set), then a value of 16383 is used for PV and the “Process var out of range” bit is set.

The Control Variable, calculated by the PID instruction, has the same range of 0 to

16383. The Control Output (word 16 of the control block) has the range of 0 to

100%. You can set lower and upper limits for the instruction’s calculated output values (where an upper limit of 100% corresponds to a Control Variable limit of

16383).

24-22

Process Control Instruction

Scaling to Engineering Units

Scaling lets you enter the setpoint and zero-crossing deadband values in engineering units, and display the process variable and error values in the same engineering units.

Remember, the process variable PV must still be within the range 0-16383. The PV is displayed in engineering units, however.

Select scaling as follows:

1. Enter the maximum and minimum scaling values MaxS and MinS in the PID control block. The MinS value corresponds to an analog value of zero for the lowest reading of the process variable, and MaxS corresponds to an analog value of 16383 for the highest reading. These values reflect the process limits. Setpoint scaling is selected by entering a non-zero value for one or both parameters. If you enter the same value for both parameters, setpoint scaling is disabled.

For example, if measuring a full scale temperature range of -73°C (PV=0) to

+

1156°C (PV=16383), enter a value of -73 for MinS and 1156 for MaxS.

Remember that inputs to the PID instruction must be 0 to 16383. Signal conversions could be as follows:

Process limits

Transmitter output (if used)

Output of analog input module

PID instruction, MinS to MaxS

73 to

+

1156 ° C

+4 to +20 mA

0 to 16383

73 to

+

1156 ° C

2. Enter the setpoint (word 2) and deadband (word 9) in the same scaled engineering units. Read the scaled process variable and scaled error in these units as well.

The control output percentage (word 16) is displayed as a percentage of the 0 to

16383 CV range. The actual value transferred to the CV output is always between

0 and 16383.

When you select scaling, the instruction scales the setpoint, deadband, process variable, and error. You must consider the effect on all these variables when you change scaling.

24-23

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Zero-Crossing Deadband DB

The adjustable deadband lets you select an error range above and below the setpoint where the output does not change as long as the error remains within this range. This lets you control how closely the process variable matches the setpoint without changing the output.

Output Alarms

+DB

SP

-DB

Error range

Time

Zero-crossing is deadband control that lets the instruction use the error for computational purposes as the process variable crosses into the deadband until it crosses the setpoint. Once it crosses the setpoint (error crosses zero and changes sign) and as long as it remains in the deadband, the instruction considers the error value zero for computational purposes.

Select deadband by entering a value in the deadband storage word (word 9) in the control block. The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value you enter. A value of zero inhibits this feature. The deadband has the same scaled units as the setpoint if you choose scaling.

You may set an output alarm on the control variable at a selected value above and/or below a selected output percent. When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded either value, it sets an alarm bit (bit LL for lower limit, bit UL for upper limit) in the PID instruction. Alarm bits are reset by the instruction when the control variable comes back inside the limits. The instruction does not prevent the control variable from exceeding the alarm values unless you select output limiting.

Select upper and lower output alarms by entering a value for the upper alarm (CVH) and lower alarm (CVL). Alarm values are specified as a percentage of the output. If you do not want alarms, enter zero and 100% respectively for lower and upper alarm values and ignore the alarm bits.

24-24

Process Control Instruction

Output Limiting with Anti-Reset Windup

You may set an output limit (percent of output) on the control variable. When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded a limit, it sets an alarm bit

(bit LL for lower limit, bit UL for upper limit), and prevents the control variable from exceeding either limit value. The instruction limits the control variable to 0 and 100% if you choose not to limit.

Select upper and lower output limits by setting the limit enable bit (bit OL), and entering an upper limit (CVH) and lower limit (CVL). Limit values are a percentage

(0 to 100%) of the control variable.

The difference between selecting output alarms and output limits is that you must select output limiting to enable limiting. Limit and alarm values are stored in the same words. Entering these values enables the alarms, but not limiting. Entering these values and setting the limit enable bit enables limiting and alarms.

Anti-reset windup is a feature that prevents the integral term from becoming excessive when the control variable reaches a limit. When the sum of the PID and bias terms in the control variable reaches the limit, the instruction stops calculating the integral sum until the control variable comes back in range. The integral sum is contained in element, IS.

The Manual Mode

In the manual mode, the PID algorithm does not compute the value of the control variable. Rather, it uses the value as an input to adjust the integral sum (IS) so that a smooth transfer takes place upon re-entering the AUTO mode.

In the manual mode, the programmer allows you to enter a new CV value from 0 to

100%. This value is converted into a number from 0 to 16383 and written to the

Control Variable address. If your ladder program sets the manual output level, design your ladder program to write to the CV address when in the manual mode. Note that this number is in the range of 0 to 16383, not 0 to 100. Writing to the CV percent

(CVP) with your ladder program has no effect in the manual mode.

The example on the next page shows how you can manually control the control variable (CV) output with your ladder program.

24-25

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

PID Rungstate

If the PID rung is false, the integral sum (IS) is cleared and CV remains in its last state.

Feed Forward or Bias

Applications involving transport lags may require that a bias be added to the CV output in anticipation of a disturbance. This bias can be accomplished using the processor by writing a value to the Feed Forward Bias element (word FF). (See page

24-13.) The value you write is added to the output, allowing a feed forward action to

take place. You may add a bias by writing a value between

16383 and

+

16383 to word 6 with your programming terminal or ladder program.

PID Tuning

PID tuning requires a knowledge of process control. If you are inexperienced, it will be helpful if you obtain training on the process control theory and methods used by your company.

There are a number of techniques that can be used to tune a PID loop. The following

PID tuning method is general, and is limited in terms of handling load disturbances.

When tuning, we recommend that changes be made in the MANUAL mode, followed by a return to AUTO. Output limiting is applied in the MANUAL mode.

Note:

• This method requires that the PID instruction controls a non-critical application in terms of personal safety and equipment damage.

• The PID tuning procedure may not work for all cases. It is strongly recommended to use a PID Loop tuner package for the best result (i.e..

RSTune, Rockwell Software catalog number 9323-1003D).

24-26

Process Control Instruction

Procedure

!

1. Create your ladder program. Make certain that you have properly scaled your analog input to the range of the process variable PV and that you have properly scaled your control variable CV to your analog output.

2. Connect your process control equipment to your analog modules. Download your program to the processor. Leave the processor in the program mode.

ATTENTION: Ensure that all possibilities of machine motion have been considered with respect to personal safety and equipment damage. It is possible that your output

CV may swing between 0 and 100% while tuning.

Note:

If you want to verify the scaling of your continuous system and/or determine the initial loop update time of your system, go to the procedure

on page 24-29.

3. Enter the following values: the initial setpoint SP value, a reset T i of 0, a rate T d of 0, a gain K c of 1, and a loop update of 5.

Set the PID mode to STI or Timed, per your ladder diagram. If STI is selected, ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval.

Enter the optional settings that apply (output limiting, output alarm,

MaxS - MinS scaling, feedforward).

4. Get prepared to chart the CV, PV, analog input, or analog output as it varies with time with respect to the setpoint SP value.

5. Place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode, then place the processor in the

Run mode.

6. While monitoring the PID display, adjust the process manually by writing to the

CO percent value.

7. When you feel that you have the process under control manually, place the PID instruction in the AUTO mode.

8. Adjust the gain while observing the relationship of the output to the setpoint over time.

24-27

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

9. When you notice that the process is oscillating above and below the setpoint in an even manner, record the time of 1 cycle. That is, obtain the natural period of the process.

Natural Period

4x deadtime

Record the gain value. Return to the MANUAL mode (stop the process if necessary).

10. Set the loop update time (and STI time interval if applicable) to a value of 5 to 10 times faster than the natural period.

For example, if the cycle time is 20 seconds, and you choose to set the loop update time to 10 times faster than the natural rate, set the loop update time to 200, which would result in a 2-second rate.

11. Set the gain K c value to 1/2 the gain needed to obtain the natural period of the process. For example, if the gain value recorded in step 9 was 80, set the gain to 40.

12. Set the reset term T i to approximate the natural period. If the natural period is 20 seconds, as in our example, you would set the reset term to 3 (0.3 minutes per repeat approximates 20 seconds).

13. Now set the rate T d equal to a value 1/8 that of the reset term. For our example, the value 4 will be used to provide a rate term of 0.04 minutes per repeat.

14. Place the process in the AUTO mode. If you have an ideal process, the PID tuning will be complete.

15. To make adjustments from this point, place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode, enter the adjustment, then place the PID instruction back in the AUTO mode.

This technique of going to MANUAL, then back to AUTO ensures that most of the “gain error” is removed at the time each adjustment is made. This allows you to see the effects of each adjustment immediately. Toggling the PID rung allows the PID instruction to restart itself, eliminating all of the integral buildup. You may want to toggle the PID rung false while tuning to eliminate the effects of previous tuning adjustments.

24-28

Process Control Instruction

Verifying the Scaling of Your Continuous System

To ensure that your process is linear, and that your equipment is properly connected and scaled, do the following:

1. Place the PID instruction in manual and enter the following parameters:

™ type: 0 for MinS

™ type:

100

for MaxS

™ type: 0 for CO%

2. Enter the REM Run mode and verify that PV=0.

3. Type:

20

in CO%

4. Record the PV = _______

5. Type: 40 in CO%.

6. Record the PV = _______

7. Type: 60 in CO%.

8. Record the PV = _______

9. Type:

80

in CO%.

10. Record the PV = _______

11. The values you recorded should be offset from CO% by the same amount. This proves the linearity of your process. The following example shows an offset progression of fifteen.

CO 20% = PV 35%

CO 40% = PV 55%

CO 60% = PV 75%

CO 80% = PV 95%

If the values you recorded are not offset by the same amount:

• Either your scaling is incorrect, or

• the process is not linear, or

• your equipment is not properly connected and/or configured.

Make the necessary corrections and repeat steps 2-10.

24-29

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Determining the Initial Loop Update Time

To determine the approximate loop update time that should be used for your process, perform the following:

1. Place the normal application values in MinS and MaxS.

2. Type: 50 in CO%.

3. Type: 60 in CO% and immediately start your stopwatch.

4. Watch the PV. When the PV starts to change, stop your stopwatch. Record this value. It is the deadtime.

5. Multiply the deadtime by 4. This value approximates the natural period. For example, if: deadtime = 3 seconds, then 4 x 3 = 12 seconds (

natural period)

6. Divide the value obtained in step 5 by 10. Use this value as the loop updated time.

For example, if: natural period

=

12 seconds

, then

12/10 = 1.2 seconds

.

Therefore, the value 120 would be entered as the loop update time.

( 120 x 10 ms

=

1.2 seconds )

7. Enter the following values: the initial setpoint SP value, a reset T i of 0, a rate T d of 0, a gain K c of 1, and the loop update time determined in step 17.

Set the PID mode to STI or Timed, per your ladder diagram. If STI is selected, ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval.

Enter the optional settings that apply (output limiting, output alarm,

MaxS - MinS scaling, feedforward).

8. Return to page 24-27 and complete the tuning procedure starting with step 4.

24-30

Communications Instructions

25

Communications Instructions

This chapter contains information about the Message (MSG) and Service

Communications (SVC), communication instructions. This chapter provides information on:

• how messaging works

• what the instructions look like

• how to configure and use the instructions

• examples and timing diagrams

The communication instructions read or write data to another station.

MSG

SVC

Instruction Used To:

Transfer data from one device to another.

Interrupt the program scan to execute the service communications part of the operating cycle. The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction.

Page

25-2

25-24

25-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MicroLogix 1500 Messaging Overview

The MicroLogix 1500’s communication architecture is comprised of three primary components:

• Ladder Scan

• Communications Buffers

• Communication Queue

These three components determine when a message is transmitted by the controller.

For a message to transmit, it must be scanned on a true rung of logic. When scanned, the message and the data defined within the message (if it is a write message) are placed in a communication buffer. The controller continues to scan the remaining user program. The message is processed and sent out the controller through the communications port.

If a second message instruction is processed before the first message completes, the second message and its data are placed in one of the three remaining communication buffers. This process repeats whenever a message instruction is processed, until all four buffers are in use.

When a buffer is available, the message and its associated data are placed in the buffer immediately. If all four buffers are full when the next (fifth) message is processed, the message request, not the data, is placed in a communications queue. The queue is a message storage area that keeps track of messages that have not been allocated a buffer. The queue operates as a first-in first-out (FIFO) storage area. The first message request stored in the queue is the message that will be allocated a buffer as soon as a buffer becomes available. The queue can accommodate all MSG instructions in a ladder program.

When a message request in a buffer is completed, the buffer is released back to the system. If a message is in the queue, that message is then allocated a buffer. At that time, the data associated with the message is read from within the controller.

Note:

If a message instruction was in the queue, the data that is actually sent out of the controller may be different than what was present when the message instruction was first processed.

The buffer and queue mechanisms are completely automatic. Buffers are allocated and released as the need arises, and message queuing occurs if buffers are full.

25-2

Communications Instructions

The MicroLogix 1500 controller initiates read and write messages through channel 0 when configured for the following protocols:

• DF1 Full-Duplex and DF1 Half-Duplex Slave

• DH485

For a description of valid communication protocols, see “Understanding the

Communication Protocols” on page D-1.

The Message Instruction

The message instruction is an output instruction. Any preceding logic on the message rung must be solved true before the message instruction can be processed. The example below shows a Micrologix 1500 message instruction.

If B3/0 is on (1), the MSG rung is true, and MG11:0 will be processed. If one of the four buffers is available, the message and its associated data will be processed immediately.

Note:

How quickly the message is actually sent to the destination device depends on a number of issues, including the selected channel’s communication protocol, the baud rate of the communications port, the number of retries needed (if any), and the destination device's readiness to receive the message.

25-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

The Message File

The MSG instruction built into the MicroLogix 1500 controller uses a MG data file to process the message instruction. The MG data file, shown below, is accessed using the MG prefix. Each message instruction utilizes an element within a MG data file. For example, MG11:0 is the first element in message data file 11.

Local Messages

The MicroLogix 1500 is capable of communicating using local or remote messages.

With a local message, all devices are accessible without a separate device acting as a bridge. Different types of electrical interfaces may be required to connect to the network, but the network is still classified as a local network. Remote messages use a remote network, where devices are accessible only by passing or routing through a

device. Remote networks are discussed on page 25-14.

The following four examples represent different types of local networks.

Example 1 - Local DH485 Network with AIC+ (1761-NET-AIC) Interface

AIC+

DH485 Network

AIC+ AIC+ AIC+

A-B

MicroLogix 1000

Node 12

SLC 5/03

Node 5

MicroLogix 1500

Node 10

SLC 5/04

Node 17

PanelView

PanelView 550

Node 22

25-4

Communications Instructions

Example 2 - Local DeviceNet Network with DeviceNet Interface (1761-NET-DNI)

DeviceNet

Node 2

Node 5

MicroLogix 1000

DANGER DANGER

Master

Node 1

SLC 5/03

Node 6

MicroLogix 1500

DANGER

Node 10

DANGER

Node 7

MicroLogix 1500

DANGER

SLC 5/03

DeviceNet

Node 55

Node 30

DANGER

25-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Example 3 - Local DF1 Half-Duplex Network

Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX, RSLinx 2.0

(or higher), SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05, or PLC-5 processors configured for DF1 Half-

Duplex Master.

RS-232 (DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol)

25-6

MicroLogix 1500

Programmable

Controller

(Slave)

SLC 5/03 Processor

Modular Controller

(Slave)

MicroLogix 1500

Programmable

Controllers

(Slave)

SLC 500 Fixed I/O

Controller with

1747-KE Interface

Module (Slave)

Note:

It is recommended that isolation (1761-NET-AIC) be provided between the

MicroLogix 1500 and the modem.

Example 4 - Local DF1 Full-Duplex Network (point-to-point)

MicroLogix 1500

Optical Isolator

(1761-NET-AIC recommended)

1761-CBL-PM02

Personal Computer

Communications Instructions

Configuring a Local Message

The RSLogix Message Setup Screen is shown below. Descriptions of each of the elements follow.

25-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

“This Controller” Parameters

Communication Command

The MicroLogix 1500 controller supports six different types of communications commands. If the target device supports any of these command types, the

MicroLogix 1500 should be capable of exchanging data with the device. Supported commands include:

Communication

Command

Description

500CPU Read

500CPU Write

485CIF Read

1

485CIF Write

1

PLC5 Read

PLC5 Write

The target device is compatible with and supports the SLC 500 command set (all

MicroLogix 1000 and 1500 controllers), use this setting to read data.

The target device is compatible with and supports the SLC 500 command set (all

MicroLogix 1000 and 1500 controllers), use this setting to send data.

The target device is compatible with and supports the 485CIF (PLC2) command set, use this setting to read data.

The target device is compatible with and supports the 485CIF (PLC2) command set, use this setting to send data

The target device is compatible with and supports the PLC5 command set, use this setting to read data.

The target device is compatible with and supports the PLC5 command set, use this setting to send data.

1.

The Common Interface File (CIF) in the MicroLogix 1500 and SLC 500 processors is File 9. The CIF in the

MicroLogix 1000 controller is Integer File 7.

25-8

Communications Instructions

Data Table Address

This variable defines the starting address in the local controller. A valid address is any configured data file within the controller, except system status, PD and MG files.

Size in Elements

This variable defines the amount of data (number of local elements) to exchange with the target device.

The maximum amount of data that can be transferred via a MSG instruction is 103 words (206 bytes) and is determined by the destination data type. The destination data type is defined by the type of message: read or write.

For Read Messages: When a read message is used, the destination file is the data file in the local or originating processor.

Note:

Input or output data file types are not valid for read messages.

For Write Messages: When a write message is used, the destination file is the data file in the target processor.

25-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Message Type

Read or Write

Read

Write

Read

Write

The maximum number of elements that can be transmitted or received are shown in the table below. You cannot cross file types when sending messages. For example, you cannot read a timer into an integer file and you cannot write counters to a timer file. The only exception to this rule is that long integer data can be read/written to bit or integer files.

Note:

The table below is not intended to illustrate file compatibility, only the maximum number of elements that can be exchanged in each case.

S Status

T Timer

C Counter

R Control

N Integer (16-bit)

L Long Integer (32-bit)

Message

Format

SLC or

PLC

SLC

PLC

SLC or

PLC

SLC or

PLC

CIF

CIF

I Input

O Output

B Bit

This Controller

(MicroLogix 1500)

File Type

B, N

L

C, R

T

T

B, N

B, N

L

I, O

I, O, B, N

L

B, N

L

T, C, R

I, O, B, N

L

T, C, R

Target Device

File Type

S, B, N

L

C, R

T

T

I, O

L

I, O, S, B, N

S, B, N

L

S, B, N

CIF (Common Interface

File)

CIF (Common Interface

File)

Maximum Number of Elements in

This Controller (MicroLogix 1500)

103

51

103

51

34

103

51

34

103

51

34

34

20

103

103

51

103

Channel

This variable defines the communication channel that will be used to transmit the message request. This value is factory-set to channel 0 for the MicroLogix 1500 and cannot be changed.

25-10

Communications Instructions

“Target Device” Parameters

Message Timeout

This value defines how long, in seconds, the message instruction has to complete its operation once it has started. Timing begins when the false to true rung transition occurs, enabling the message. If the timeout period expires, the message errors out.

The default value is 5 seconds.

If the message timeout is set to zero, the message instruction will never timeout. The user must set (1) the Time Out (TO) bit to flush a message instruction from its buffer if the destination device does not respond to the communications request.

Data Table Address/Offset

This variable defines the starting address in the target controller. The data table address is used for a 500CPU or PLC5 type MSG. A valid address is any valid, configured data file within the target device whose file type is recognized by the

MicroLogix 1500 controller.

The data table offset is used for 485CIF type messages. A valid offset is any value in the range 0 to 255 and indicates the word or byte offset into the target's Common

Interface File (CIF). The type of device determines whether it is a word or byte offset.

The amount of data to be exchanged is determined by the “Size in Elements” variable

described on page 25-9.

Local Node Address

This is the destination device's node number if the devices are connected on a network

(DH485 using 1761-NET-AIC, DeviceNet using 1761-NET-DNI, or DF1 Half-

Duplex).

Note:

To initiate a broadcast message on a DH485 network, set the local node address to -1.

Local/Remote

This variable defines the type of communications that will be used. Use local when you need point-to-point communications via DF1 Full-Duplex or network communications like DH485 using 1761-NET-AIC, DeviceNet using 1761-NET-

DNI, or DF1 Half-Duplex.

25-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

“Control Bits” Parameters

Ignore if Timed Out (TO)

Address

MG11:0/TO

Data Format

Binary

Range

On - Off

Type

Control

User Program Access

Read / Write

The Timed Out Bit (TO) can be set in your application to remove an active message instruction from processor control. You can create your own timeout routine by monitoring the EW and ST bits to start a timer. When the timer times out, you can set the TO bit, which will remove the message from the system. The controller resets the

TO bit the next time the associated MSG rung goes from false to true.

An easier method is to use the message timeout variable described on page 25-11,

because it simplifies the user program. This built-in timeout control is in effect whenever the message timeout is nonzero. It defaults to 5 seconds, so unless you change it, the internal timeout control is automatically enabled.

When the internal timeout is used and communications are interrupted, the MSG instruction will timeout and error after the set period of time expires. This allows the control program to retry the same message or take other action, if desired.

To disable the internal timeout control, enter zero for the MSG instruction timeout parameter. If communications are interrupted, the processor will wait forever for a reply. If an acknowledge (ACK) is received, indicated by the ST bit being set, but the reply is not received, the MSG instruction will appear to be locked up, although it is actually waiting for a reply from the target device.

Enable (EN)

Address

MG11:0/EN

Data Format

Binary

Range

On - Off

Type

Control

User Program Access

Read / Write

The Enable Bit (EN) is set when rung conditions go true and the MSG is enabled.

The MSG is enabled when the command packet is built and put into one of the MSG buffers, or the request is put in the MSG queue. It remains set until the message transmission is completed and the rung goes false. You may clear this bit when either the ER or DN bit is set in order to re-trigger a MSG instruction with true rung conditions on the next scan.

Important:

Do not set this bit from the control program.

25-12

Communications Instructions

Enabled and Waiting (EW)

Address Data Format

MG11:0/EW Binary

Range

On - Off

Type

Status

User Program Access

Read Only

The Enabled and Waiting Bit (EW) is set after the enable bit is set and the message is in the buffer and waiting to be sent.

Important:

Do not set or clear this bit. It is informational only.

Error (ER)

Address

MG11:0/ER

Data Format

Binary

Range

On - Off

Type

Status

User Program Access

Read Only

The Error Bit (ER) is set when message transmission has failed. An error code is written to the MSG File. The ER bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true.

Important:

Do not set or clear this bit. It is informational only.

Done (DN)

Address

MG11:0/DN

Data Format

Binary

Range

On - Off

Type

Status

User Program Access

Read Only

The Done Bit (DN) is set when the message is transmitted successfully. The DN bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true.

Important:

Do not set or clear this bit. It is informational only.

Start (ST)

Address

MG11:0/ST

Data Format

Binary

Range

On - Off

Type

Status

User Program Access

Read Only

The Start Bit (ST) is set when the processor receives acknowledgment (ACK) from the target device. The ST bit is cleared when the DN, ER, or TO bit is set.

Important:

Do not set or clear this bit. It is informational only.

25-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Remote Messages

The MicroLogix 1500 is also capable of remote or off-link messaging. Remote messaging is the ability to exchange information with a device that is not connected to the local network. This type of connection requires a device on the local network to act as a bridge or gateway to the other network. The illustration below shows two networks, a DH485 and a DH+ network. The SLC 5/04 processor at DH485 node 17 is configured for passthru operation. Devices that are capable of remote messaging and are connected on either network can initiate read or write data exchanges with devices on the other network, based on each device's capabilities. In this example, node 12 is a MicroLogix 1500. The MicroLogix 1500 can respond to remote message requests from nodes 40 or 51 on the DH+ network and it can initiate a message to any node on the DH+ network.

Note:

The MicroLogix 1000 can respond to remote message requests, but it cannot initiate them.

This functionality is also available on Ethernet by replacing the SLC 5/04 at node 19 with an SLC 5/05 processor.

DH485 and DH+ Networks

AIC+

DH485 Network

AIC+ AIC+

Node 17

AIC+

A-B PanelView

MicroLogix 1500

Node 12

SLC 5/03

Node 5

MicroLogix 1000

Node 10

SLC 5/04

Node 19

PanelView 550

Node 22

DH+ Network

Node 51 Node 40

PLC5

SLC 5/04

The illustration below shows a DeviceNet network using DeviceNet Interfaces (1761-

NET-DNI) connected to a Ethernet network using an SLC 5/05. In this configuration, controllers on the DeviceNet network can reply to requests from devices on the

Ethernet network, but cannot initiate communications to devices on Ethernet.

25-14

Communications Instructions

DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks

DNI

DeviceNet Network

DNI

SLC 5/03

Node 5

DNI

A-B

DNI

PanelView

MicroLogix 1000

Node 10

MicroLogix 1500

Node 17

SLC 5/05

Node 38

PanelView 550

Node 54

Ethernet Network

PLC-5E

SLC 5/05 SLC 5/05

Configuring a Remote Message

You configure for remote capability in the RSLogix Message Setup screen.

The message configuration shown below is the MicroLogix 1500 at node 12 on the

DH485 network. This message will read five elements of data to address N:50:0 in the

SLC 5/04 controller at node 51 on the DH+ network. The SLC 5/04 at Node 23 of the

DH+ network is configured for passthru operation.

25-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

AIC+

DH485 Network

SLC 5/03

Node 5

AIC+

MicroLogix 1000

Node 10

MicroLogix 1500

Node 12

AIC+

Node 17

AIC+

A-B

PanelView

SLC 5/04

Node 23

PanelView 550

Node 22

Link ID 1

DH+ Network

Node 63 octal

(51 dec.)

Node 40 octal

(32 dec.)

Link ID 100

PLC-5

SLC 5/04

Local Bridge Address

This variable defines the bridge address on the local network. In the example, node

12 is writing data to node 51 on DH+. The SLC 5/04 on DH485 is node 17. This variable sends the message to node 17.

Remote Bridge Address

This variable defines the remote node address of the bridge device. In this example, the remote bridge address is set to zero, because the target device, SLC 5/04 at node

63 (octal) is a remote-capable device. If the target device is remote-capable, the remote bridge address is not required. If the target device is not remote-capable (SLC

500, SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and MicroLogix 1000 Series A, B and C), the remote bridge address is required.

Remote Station Address

This variable is the final destination address of the message instruction. In this example, integer file 50 elements 0-4 of the SLC 5/04 on DH+ at node 63 (octal) sends data to the MicroLogix 1500 controller at node 12 on DH485.

25-16

Communications Instructions

Remote Bridge Link ID

This variable is a user-assigned value that identifies the remote network as a number.

This number must be used by any device initiating remote messaging from the DH485 side of the network. Any controller on the local DH485 network sending data to a device on the DH+ network should use the same value for the remote bridge link ID.

Set the Link ID in the General tab on the Channel Configuration screen. The Link ID value is a user-defined number between 1 and 65,535. All devices that can initiate remote messages and are connected to the local must have the same number for this variable.

25-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MSG Instruction Error Codes

17H

18H

30H

37H

12H

13H

15H

16H

39H

3AH

40H

45H

05H

06H

07H

08H

09H

0BH

0CH

10H

Error

Code

02H

03H

04H

50H

60H

When the processor detects an error during the transfer of message data, the processor sets the ER bit and enters an error code that you can monitor from your programming software.

Description of Error Condition

Target node is busy. NAK No Memory retries by link layer exhausted.

Target node cannot respond because message is too large.

Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvertently modified.

Local processor is off-line (possible duplicate node situation).

Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available.

Target node does not respond.

Target node cannot respond.

Local modem connection has been lost.

Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction.

Received a master link reset (one possible source is from the DF1 master).

Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported command.

Local channel configuration protocol error exists.

Local MSG configuration error in the Remote MSG parameters.

Local channel configuration parameter error exists.

Target or Local Bridge address is higher than the maximum node address.

Local service is not supported.

Broadcast is not supported.

PCCC Description: Remote station host is not there, disconnected, or shutdown.

Message timed out in local processor.

Local communication channel reconfigured while MSG active.

STS in the reply from target is invalid.

PCCC Description: Host could not complete function due to hardware fault.

MSG reply cannot be processed. Either Insufficient data in MSG read reply or bad network address parameter.

Target node is out of memory.

Target node cannot respond because file is protected.

25-18

Communications Instructions

E9H

EAH

EBH

ECH

DAH

E1H

E2H

E3H

E4H

E5H

D5H

D7H

D8H

D9H

D1H

D2H

D3H

D4H

Error

Code

70H

80H

90H

B0H

C0H

D0H

E6H

E7H

E8H

Description of Error Condition

PCCC Description: Processor is in Program Mode.

PCCC Description: Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem.

PCCC Description: Remote station cannot buffer command.

PCCC Description: Remote station problem due to download.

PCCC Description: Cannot execute command due to active IPBs.

No IP address configured for the network, –or–

Bad command - unsolicited message error, –or–

Bad address - unsolicited message error, –or–

No privilege - unsolicited message error

Maximum connections used - no connections available

Invalid internet address or host name

No such host / Cannot communicate with the name server

Connection not completed before user–specified timeout

Connection timed out by the network

Connection refused by destination host

Connection was broken

Reply not received before user–specified timeout

No network buffer space available

PCCC Description: Illegal Address Format, a field has an illegal value.

PCCC Description: Illegal Address format, not enough fields specified.

PCCC Description: Illegal Address format, too many fields specified.

PCCC Description: Illegal Address, symbol not found.

PCCC Description: Illegal Address Format, symbol is 0 or greater than the maximum number of characters support by this device.

PCCC Description: Illegal Address, address does not exist, or does not point to something usable by this command.

Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large.

PCCC Description: Cannot complete request, situation changed (file size, for example) during multi– packet operation.

PCCC Description: Data or file is too large. Memory unavailable.

PCCC Description: Request is too large; transaction size plus word address is too large.

Target node cannot respond because target node denies access.

Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable.

25-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

F7H

F8H

F9H

FAH

FBH

FCH

FDH

FFH

F2H

F3H

F4H

F5H

F6H

Error

Code

EDH

EEH

EFH

F0H

F1H

Description of Error Condition

PCCC Description: Resource is already available; condition already exists.

PCCC Description: Command cannot be executed.

PCCC Description: Overflow; histogram overflow.

PCCC Description: No access

Local processor detects illegal target file type.

PCCC Description: Invalid parameter; invalid data in search or command block.

PCCC Description: Address reference exists to deleted area.

PCCC Description: Command execution failure for unknown reason; PLC–3 histogram overflow.

PCCC Description: Data conversion error.

PCCC Description: The scanner is not able to communicate with a 1771 rack adapter. This could be due to the scanner not scanning, the selected adapter not being scanned, the adapter not responding, or an invalid request of a “DCM BT (block transfer)”.

PCCC Description: The adapter is not able to communicate with a module.

PCCC Description: The 1771 module response was not valid - size, checksum, etc.

PCCC Description: Duplicated Label.

Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner (has sole file access).

Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner (has sole access to all files).

PCCC Description: Disk file is write protected or otherwise inaccessible (off–line only).

PCCC Description: Disk file is being used by another application; update not performed (off–line only).

Local communication channel is shut down.

Note:

For 1770-6.5.16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual users: The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your

MSG instruction.

• Codes E0 - EF represent EXT STS codes 0 - F.

• Codes F0 - FC represent EXT STS codes 10 - 1C.

25-20

Communications Instructions

Timing Diagram for MicroLogix 1500 MSG Instruction

The following section describes the timing diagram for a MicroLogix 1500 MSG instruction.

Rung goes true.

Target node receives packet.

➁ ➂

Target node processes packet successfully and returns data

(read) or writes data (success).

EN

1

0

EW

1

0

ST

1

0

DN

1

0

ER

1

0

TO

1

0

1. If there is room in any of the four active message buffers when the MSG rung becomes true and the MSG is scanned, the EN and EW bits are set. If this were a

MSG write instruction, the source data would be transferred to the message buffer at this time.

(Not shown in the diagram.) If there is no room in the four message buffers, the message request is put in the MSG queue, only the EN bit is set. The MSG queue works on a first-in, first-out basis that allows the MicroLogix 1500 controller to remember the order in which the MSG instructions were enabled. When a buffer becomes available, the first message in the queue is placed into the buffer, and the

EW bit is set (1).

Note:

The control program does not have access to the MicroLogix 1500 communications queue.

Once the EN bit is set (1), it remains set until the entire message process is complete and either the DN, ER, or TO bit is set (1). The MSG Timeout period begins timing when the EN bit is set (1). If the timeout period expires before the

25-21

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MSG instruction completes its function, the ER bit is set (1), and an error code

(37H) is placed in the MG File to inform you of the timeout error.

2. At the next end of scan, REF, or SVC instruction, the MicroLogix 1500 controller determines if it should examine the communications queue for another instruction.

The controller bases its decision on the state of the Channel 0 Communication

Servicing Selection (CSS) and Message Servicing Selection (MSS) bits, the network communication requests from other nodes, and whether previous MSG instructions are already in progress. If the MicroLogix 1500 controller determines that it should not access the queue, the MSG instruction remains as it was. Either the EN and EW bits remain set (1) or only the EN bit is set (1) until the next end of scan, REF, or SVC instruction.

If the MicroLogix 1500 controller determines that it has an instruction in the queue, it unloads the communications queue entries into the message buffers until all four message buffers are full. If an invalid message is unloaded from the communications queue, the ER bit is set (1), and a code is placed in the MG file to inform you of an error. When a valid MSG instruction is loaded into a message buffer, the EN and EW bits are set (1).

The MicroLogix 1500 controller then exits the end of scan, REF, or SVC portion of the scan. The controller’s background communication function sends the messages to the target nodes specified in the MSG instruction. Depending on the state of the CSS and MSS bits, you can have up to four MSG instructions active at any given time.

3. If the target node successfully receives the message, it sends back an acknowledge

(ACK). The ACK causes the processor to clear (0) the EW bit and set (1) the ST bit. The target node has not yet examined the packet to see if it understands your request.

Once the ST bit is set (1), the controller waits for a reply from the target node. The target node is not required to respond within any give time frame.

Note:

If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the message transaction, you will never receive a reply. This is why you should use a Message Timeout value in your MSG instruction.

25-22

Communications Instructions

4. Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram. If you do not receive an ACK, step 3 does not occur. Instead either no response or a no acknowledge (NAK) is received. When this happens, the ST bit remains clear (0).

No response may be caused by:

• the target node is not there

• the message became corrupted in transmission

• the response was corrupted in response transmission

A NAK may be caused by:

• target node is busy

• target node received a corrupt message

• the message is too large

When a NAK occurs, the EW bit is cleared (0), and the ER bit is set (1), indicating that the MSG instruction failed.

5. Following the successful receipt of the packet, the target node sends a reply packet. The reply packet contains one of the following responses:

• successful write request.

• successful read request with data

• failure with error code

At the next end of scan, REF, or SVC instruction, following the target node’s reply, the MicroLogix 1500 controller examines the message from the target device. If the reply is successful, the DN bit is set (1), and the ST bit is cleared

(0). If it is a successful read request, the data is written to the data table. The MSG instruction function is complete.

If the reply is a failure with an error code, the ER bit is set (1), and the ST bit is cleared (0). The MSG instruction function is complete.

6. If the DN or ER bit is set (1) and the MSG rung is false, the EN bit is cleared (0) the next time the MSG instruction is scanned.

See “Examples: Ladder Logic” on page 25-27 for examples using the MSG

instruction.

25-23

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Service Communications (SVC)

Under normal operation the MicroLogix 1500 controller processes communications once every time it scans the control program. If you require the communications port to be scanned more often, or if the ladder scan is long, you can add an SVC (Service

Communications) instruction to your control program. The SVC instruction is used to improve communications performance/throughput, but will also cause the ladder scan to be longer.

Simply place the SVC instruction on a rung within the control program. When the rung is scanned, the controller will service any communications that need to take place. You can place the SVC instruction on a rung without any preceding logic, or you can condition the rung with a number of communications status bits. The table on

page 25-25 shows the available status file bits.

Note:

The amount of communications servicing performed is controlled by the

Communication Servicing Selection Bit (CSS) and Message Servicing

Selection Bit (MSS) in the Channel 0 Communication Configuration

File.

Channel Select

For best results, place the SVC instruction in the middle of the control program.You may not place an SVC instruction in a Fault, DII, STI, or I/O Event subroutine.

When using the SVC instruction, you must select the channel to be serviced. The channel select variable is a one-word bit pattern that determines which channel is serviced. Each bit corresponds to a specific channel. For example, bit 0 equals channel 0. When any bit is set (1), the corresponding channel is serviced.

Enter a 1 (decimal value 1 turns on bit 0) to allow channel 0 to be serviced.

If you enter 0, only the DAT will be serviced.

Note:

The DAT is not a selectable channel. It is always serviced when the

SVC instruction executes.

25-24

Communications Instructions

Communication Status Bits

The following communication status bits allow you to customize or monitor

communications servicing. See “System Status File” on page G-1 for additional

information about the status file.

Address

CS0:4/0

CS0:4/1

CS0:4/2

CS0:4/4

Description

Incoming Command Pending

Incoming Message Reply Pending

Outgoing Message Command Pending

Communications Active Bit

Application Example

The SVC instruction is used when you want to execute a communication function, such as transmitting a message, prior to the normal service communication portion of the operating scan.

You can place this rung after a message write instruction. CS0:4/MCP is set when the message instruction is enabled and put in the communications queue. When

CS0:4/MCP is set (1), the SVC instruction is evaluated as true and the program scan is interrupted to execute the service communication’s portion of the operating scan.

The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction.

The example rung shows a conditional SVC which will be processed only when an outgoing message is in the communications queue.

Note:

You may program the SVC instruction unconditionally across the rungs.

This is the normal programming technique for the SVC instruction.

25-25

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

25-26

Communications Instruction

25

Examples: Ladder Logic

Enabling the MSG Instruction for Continuous Operation

Enabling the MSG Instruction Via User Supplied Input

0000

0001

As long as input I:1/0 is set, or anytime it becomes set, the MSG instruction in the next rung will be enabled. This program is an example of controlling when the MSG instruction operates. Input I:1/0 could be any user-supplied bit to control when MSGs are sent.

I:1

MSG Enable Bit

MG11:0

B3:0

L

0 EN 0

The MSG instruction will be enabled with each false-to-true transition of bit B3:0/0.

B3:0

0

MSG

Read/Write Message

MSG File MG11:0

Setup Screen

EN

DN

ER

0002

MSG Done Bit

MG11:0

DN

MSG Error Bit

MG11:0

ER

B3:0

U

0

0003 END

25-27

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using Local Messaging

Example 1 - Local Read from a 500CPU

In the display above the MicroLogix 1500 processor reads 10 elements from Local

Node 2’s N7 file, starting at word N7:50. The 10 words are placed in this controller’s integer file starting at word N7:0. If five seconds elapse before the message completes, error bit MG11:0/ER is set, indicating that the instruction timed out. The device at node 2 understands the SLC 500 processor family (SLC 500, SLC 5/01,

SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, MicroLogix 1000, and MicroLogix 1500) protocol.

25-28

Communications Instruction

Function Key

This

Controller

Communication

Command

Description

Specifies the type of message. Valid types are: 500CPU Read, 500CPU Write, 485CIF Read,

485CIF Write, PLC5 Read, PLC5 Write.

Data Table

Address

For a Read (Destination) this is the address in the initiating processor which is to receive data.

Valid file types are B, T, C, R, N, and L.

For a Write (Source) this is the address in the initiating processor which is to send data.

Valid file types are B, T, C, R, N, I, O, and L.

Size in elements

Defines the length of the message in elements. One word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-103. Two word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-51. Three word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-34.

Target

Device

Channel

Message

Timeout

Data Table

Address

Identifies the physical channel used for the message communication. Always channel 0.

Defines the length of the message timer in seconds. A timeout of 0 seconds means that there is no timer and the message will wait indefinitely for a reply. Valid range is 0-255 seconds.

For a Read (Source) this is the address in the target processor which is to send data.

For a Write (Destination) this is the address in the target processor which is to receive data.

Valid file types are S, B, T, C, R, N, I, O, and L. See “Valid File Type Combinations” below.

Local Node

Address

Specifies the node number of the processor that is receiving the message. Valid range is 0-31 for

DH485 protocol, or 0-254 for DF1 Half- and Full-Duplex protocols.

Local/Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote.

Valid File Type Combinations

For 500CPU messages, the only valid combinations of local file types and target file types are:

Local Data Types Target Data Types

O, I, S, B, N, L

O

1

, I

1.

, B, N, L

T

C

R

T

C

R

1. Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages.

Mixing file types of different size elements is not allowed, except for one-word elements (O, I, S, B, and N) and two-word elements (L).

25-29

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Example 2 - Local Read from a 485CIF

In the display above the MicroLogix 1500 processor reads five elements (words) from

Local Node 2’s CIF file, starting at word 20 (or byte 20 for non-SLC 500 devices).

The five elements are placed in your integer file starting at word N7:0. If 15 seconds elapse before the message completes, error bit MG11:0/ER is set, indicating that the instruction timed out. The device at node 2 understands the 485CIF (PLC-2 emulation) protocol.

25-30

Communications Instruction

Function Key

This

Controller

Communication

Command

Description

Specifies the type of message. Valid types are: 500CPU Read, 500CPU Write, 485CIF Read,

485CIF Write, PLC5 Read, PLC5 Write.

Data Table

Address

For a Read (Destination) this is the address in the initiating processor which is to receive data.

Valid file types are B, T, C, R, N, and L.

For a Write (Source) this is the address in the initiating processor which is to send data.

Valid file types are B, T, C, R, N, I, O, and L.

Size in

Elements

Defines the length of the message in elements. One word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-103. Two word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-51. Three word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-34.

Target

Device

Channel

Message

Timeout

Identifies the physical channel used for the message communication. Always channel 0.

Defines the length of the message timer in seconds. A timeout of 0 seconds means that there is no timer and the message will wait forever for a reply. Valid range is 0-255 seconds.

Data Table

Offset

Local Node

Address

This is the word offset value in the common interface file (byte offset for non-SLC device) in the target processor, which is to send the data.

Specifies the node number of the processor that is receiving the message. Valid range is 0-31 for

DH–485 protocol, or 0-254 for DF-1 Half- and Full-Duplex protocols.

Local/Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote.

25-31

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Example 3 - Local Read from a PLC-5

In the display above the MicroLogix 1500 processor reads 10 elements from Local

Node 2’s N7 file, starting at word N7:50. The 10 words are placed in your integer file starting at word N7:0. If five seconds elapse before the message completes, error bit

MG11:0/ER is set, indicating that the instruction timed out. The device at node 2 understands the PLC-5 processor protocol.

Description Function Key

This

Controller

Communication

Command

Data Table

Address

Specifies the type of message. Valid types are: 500CPU Read, 500CPU Write, 485CIF Read,

485CIF Write, PLC5 Read, PLC5 Write.

For a Read (Destination) this is the address in the initiating processor which is to receive data.

Valid file types are B, T, C, R, N, and L. See “Valid File Type Combinations” below.

Size in

Elements

Channel

For a Write (Source) this is the address in the initiating processor which is to send data.

Valid file types are B, T, C, R, N, I, O, and L. See “Valid File Type Combinations” below.

Defines the length of the message in elements. One-word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-103. Two-word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-51. Counter and control elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-34. Timer elements are limited to a maximum length of 1-20.

Identifies the physical channel used for the message communication. Always channel 0.

25-32

Communications Instruction

Target

Device

Message

Timeout

Data Table

Address

Defines the length of the message timer in seconds. A timeout of 0 seconds means that there is no timer and the message will wait indefinitely for a reply. Valid range is 0-255 seconds.

For a Read (Source) this is the address in the target processor which is to send data.

Valid file types are S, B, T, C, R, N, and L. See “Valid File Type Combinations” below.

For a Write (Destination) this is the address in the target processor which is to receive data.

Valid file types are S, B, T, C, R, N, I, O, and L. See “Valid File Type Combinations” below.

Local Node

Address

Specifies the node number of the processor that is receiving the message. Valid range is 0-31 for

DH485 protocol, or 0-254 for DF1 protocol.

Local/Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote.

Valid File Type Combinations

For PLC-5 messages, the only valid combinations of local file types and target file types are:

Local File Types Target File Types

O, I, S, B, N, L

O

1

, I

1.

, B, N, L

T

C

R

T

C

R

1. Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages.

Mixing file types of different size elements is not allowed, except for one-word elements (O, I, S, B, and N) and two-word elements (L).

25-33

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using Remote Messaging

The MicroLogix 1500 can pass a MSG instruction to a target device on a remote network.

Example 1 - Communicating with A-B processors using a 1785-KA5

Device A

SLC 5/04

Modular I/O Controller

Node 1

(octal)

Device B

PLC-5/40 with

1785-KA5 Module

Node 5

Device C

MicroLogix 1500

Node 3

(octal)

DH485 Node 7

DH485

Link ID = 1

(19.2Kbaud)

Node 2

DH+

Link ID = 2

(57.6Kbaud)

DH+

Link ID = 2

(57.6Kbaud)

25-34

Communications Instruction

MicroLogix 1500 (Device C) to SLC 5/04 Processor (Device A) via 1785-KA5

Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by a MicroLogix 1500 processor on the DH485 (Link ID 1).

Local Bridge Node Address is set to 7 since this is the DH485 node address used by the 1785-KA5 communication interface module.

Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 (not used) because communication is from one remote-capable device to another remote-capable device.

Remote Station Address is the SLC 5/04 processor at node address 1.

Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH+ network with the 1785-

KA5 and the SLC 5/04 processor (Link ID 2).

Note:

Important:

Data Table Addresses, the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user-specified.

Set the MicroLogix 1500’s Link ID in the channel configuration screen.

25-35

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MicroLogix 1500 Processor (Device C) to a PLC-5 (Device B) via 1785-KA5

25-36

Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by a MicroLogix processor on the DH485 (Link ID 1).

Local Bridge Node Address is set to 7 since this is the DH485 node address used by the 1785-KA5 communication interface module.

Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 (not used) because communication is from one remote-capable device to another remote-capable device.

Remote Station Address is the PLC-5 processor at node address 3.

Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH+ network with the 1785-

KA5 and the PLC-5 processor (Channel 1A, Link ID 2).

Note:

Important:

Data Table Addresses, the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user-specified.

Set the MicroLogix 1500’s Link ID in the channel configuration screen.

Communications Instruction

Example 2 - Passthru via DH485 Channel 0 of the SLC 5/04

Processor

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX TX

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX TX

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

25-37

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

MicroLogix 1500 Processor (Device D) to SLC 5/04 Processor (Device A) via an SLC 5/04 Processor (Device C)

(Passthru using Channel 0 DH485)

25-38

Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by a MicroLogix 1500 processor on the DH485 network.

Local Bridge Node Address is set to 1 since this is the DH485 node address used by the passthru SLC 5/04 processor.

Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 (not used) because communication is from one remote-capable device to another remote-capable device.

Remote Station Address is the SLC 5/04 processor at node address 1.

Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH+ network with both

SLC 5/04 processors (Channel 1, Link ID 2).

Note:

Important:

Data Table Addresses, the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user-specified.

Set the MicroLogix 1500’s Link ID in the channel configuration screen.

Communications Instruction

MicroLogix 1500 Processor (Device D) to PLC–5 (Device B) via an SLC 5/04

Processor

(Passthru using Channel 0 DH485)

Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by an MicroLogix 1500 processor on the DH485 network.

Local Bridge Node Address is set to 1 since this is the DH485 node address used by the passthru SLC 5/04 processor.

Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 (not used) because communication is from one Internet–capable device to another remote-capable device.

Remote Station Address is the PLC-5 processor at node address 3.

Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH+ network with the SLC 5/04 processor (Channel 1, Link ID 2) and PLC-5 processor (Channel 1A, Link ID 2).

Note:

Important:

Data Table Addresses, the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user-specified.

Set the MicroLogix 1500’s Link ID in the channel configuration screen.

25-39

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Example - Passthu using Two 1785-KA5s

Device A

MicroLogix 1500

Node 10

Device D

PLC-5/40 with

1785-KA5 Module

Link ID = 6

DH485

(19.2Kbaud)

Device B

MicroLogix 1500

Node 2

Node 3

(octal)

Device C

PLC-5/40 with

1785-KA5 Module

Link ID = 8

DH485

(19.2Kbaud)

Node 20

Link ID = 4

DH+

(17.6Kbaud)

Node 10

MicroLogix 1500 (Device A) to a MicroLogix 1500 (Device B) (Using two

1785-KA5s)

25-40

Communications Instruction

Channel is set to 0 since the command is sent from the MicroLogix 1500’s DH485 channel onto local Link ID 4.

Local Bridge Node Address is set to 20 since it is the bridge device (Link ID 4) that the command is to be sent through (device D).

Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 (not used) because communication is from one remote-capable device to another remote-capable device.

Remote Station Address is set to 2 since this is the DH485 address the destination device resides at on the destination link (Link ID 8).

Remote Bridge Link ID is set to 8 since this is the destination link that the destination device resides on.

Note:

The Communication Command can be 500CPU Read or Write, or PLC5

Read or Write.

Note:

Important:

Data Table Addresses, the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user-specified.

You must set the Link ID to 6 in the Channel Configuration screen.

25-41

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

25-42

Specifications

A

Specifications

Table 1: General Specifications

Description

Number of I/O

Line Power

Power Supply Inrush

User Power Output

1764-24BWA

12 inputs

12 outputs

85 to 265V ac

120V ac = 25 A

for 8 ms

240V ac = 40 A

for 4 ms

24V dc at 400 mA,

400 µF max.

24V dc, sink/source relay none

1764-24AWA

12 inputs

12 outputs

85 to 265V ac

120V ac = 25 A

for 8 ms

240V ac = 40 A

for 4 ms

1764-28BXB

16 inputs

12 outputs

20.4 to 30V dc

24V dc = 4 A for 150 ms none

Input Circuit Type

Output Circuit Type

120V ac relay

24V dc, sink/source

6 relay,

6 FET transistor

(24V dc source)

Operating Temp.

+0°C to +55°C (+32°F to +131°F) ambient

Storage Temp.

Operating Humidity

Vibration

Shock (without Data

Access Tool installed)

-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F) ambient

1

5% to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)

Operating: 0.015 in. peak-to-peak displacement 10-57 Hz, 5g 57-500 Hz

Relay Operation: 2g

Operating: 30g panel mounted (15g DIN Rail mounted)

Relay operation: 7.5g panel mounted (5g DIN Rail mounted)

Non-Operating: 40g panel mounted (30g DIN Rail mounted)

Shock (with Data Access

Tool installed)

Operating: 20g panel mounted (15g DIN Rail mounted)

Relay operation: 7.5g panel mounted (5g DIN Rail mounted)

Non-Operating: 30g panel mounted (20g DIN Rail mounted)

1. Recommended storage temperature for maximum battery life (5 years typical with normal operating/ storage conditions) of the 1764-RTC and 1764-MM1RTC is -40°C to +40°C (-40°F to +104°F). Battery life is significantly shorter at elevated temperatures.

A-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table 1: General Specifications

Description

Agency Certification

1764-24BWA 1764-24AWA

• UL 508

• C-UL under CSA C22.2 no. 142

• Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D

(UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 no. 213)

• CE compliant for all applicable directives

1764-28BXB

Electrical/EMC The module has passed testing at the following levels:

• IEC1000-4-2: 4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect

• IEC1000-4-3: 10 V/m

• IEC1000-4-4: 2 kV, 5 kHz; communications cable: 1 kV, 5 kHz

• IEC1000-4-5: communications cable1 kv galvanic gun

-I/O: 2 kV CM, 1 kV DM,

-Power Supply (1764-24AWA/1764-24BWA): 4 kV CM, 2 kV DM

-Power Supply (1764-28BXB): 0.5 kV CM, 0.5 kV DM

• IEC1000-4-6: 10V, communications cable 3V

Terminal Screw Torque 1.13 Nm (10 in-lb) rated; 1.3 Nm (12 in-lb) maximum

Table 2: Input Specifications

Description

On State Voltage Range

Off State Voltage Range

Operating Frequency

1764-24AWA

79 to 132V ac

0 to 20V ac

47 Hz to 63 Hz

1764-24BWA and 1764-28BXB

Inputs 0 thru 7 Inputs 8 and Higher

14 to 30.0V dc at 30°C

(86°F)

14 to 26.4V dc at 55°C

(131°F)

0 to 5V dc

10 to 30.0V dc at 30°C

(86°F)

10 to 26.4V dc at 55°C

(131°F)

0 Hz to 20 kHz

0 Hz to 500 Hz

1

On State Current:

• minimum

• nominal

• maximum

Off State Leakage

Current

Nominal Impedance

• 5.0 mA at 79V ac

• 12.0 mA at 120V ac

• 16.0 mA at 132V ac

2.5 mA minimum

12k ohms at 50 Hz

10k ohms at 60 Hz

Inrush Current (max.) 250 mA at 120V ac

• 2.5 mA at 14V dc

• 7.3 mA at 24V dc

• 12.0 mA at 30V dc

1.5 mA minimum

3.3k ohms

Not Applicable

2.0 mA at 10V dc

8.9 mA at 24V dc

12.0 mA at 30V dc

2.7k ohms

Not Applicable

1. Scan-time dependant.

A-2

Specifications

Note:

The 1764-24AWA input circuits (inputs 0-11) do not support adjustable filter settings. They have maximum turn-on and maximum turn-off times of 20 milliseconds.

Table 3: Response Times for High-Speed dc Inputs 0 Through 7 (applies to 1764-24BWA and 1764-

28BXB)

Maximum

High-Speed

Counter

Frequency @

50% Duty

Cycle (KHz)

Filter Setting

(ms)

Minimum ON

Delay (ms)

Maximum ON

Delay (ms)

Minimum

OFF Delay

(ms)

Maximum

OFF Delay

(ms)

20.000

0.025

0.005

0.025

0.005

0.025

6.700

5.000

2.000

1.000

0.075

0.100

0.250

0.500

0.040

0.050

0.170

0.370

0.075

0.100

0.250

0.500

0.045

0.060

0.210

0.330

0.075

0.100

0.250

0.500

0.500

0.200

0.125

0.063

0.031

1.000

2.000

4.000

8.000

1

16.000

0.700

1.700

3.400

6.700

14.000

1.000

2.000

4.000

8.000

16.000

0.800

1.600

3.600

7.300

14.000

1.000

2.000

4.000

8.000

16.000

1. This is the default setting.

A-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table 4: Response Times for Normal dc Inputs 8 Through 11 (1764-24BWA) and 8 Through 15

(1764-28BXB)

Maximum

Frequency @

50% Duty

Cycle (kHz)

Filter Setting

(ms)

Minimum ON

Delay (ms)

Maximum ON

Delay (ms)

Minimum

OFF Delay

(ms)

Maximum

OFF Delay

(ms)

1.000

0.500

0.250

0.125

0.063

0.031

0.500

1.000

2.000

4.000

8.000

1

16.000

0.090

0.500

1.100

2.800

5.800

11.000

0.500

1.000

2.000

4.000

8.000

16.000

0.020

0.400

1.300

2.700

5.300

10.000

0.500

1.000

2.000

4.000

8.000

16.000

1. This is the default setting.

Table 5: Relay Contact Rating Table 1764-24AWA, -24BWA, -28BXB

Maximum Volts

Make

Amperes

Break

Amperes

Continuous

240V ac

120V ac

125V dc

7.5A

15A

0.75A

1.5A

2.5A

1.0A

24V dc

0.22A

2

1.2A

2

2.0A

Voltamperes

Make

1800VA

28VA

28VA

Break

180VA

1. The total load controlled by thet 1764-24AWA and 1764-24BWA is limited to 1440VA (break).

2. For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA/48V dc = 0.58A. For dc voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A.

Table 6: Output Specifications - Maximum Continuous Current

Specification 1764-24AWA/BWA

Current per Common

Current per Controller at 150V Maximum at 240V Maximum

8A

24A

20A

1764-28BXB

8A

18A

18A

1

A-4

Specifications

¡

Table 7: 1764-28BXB FET Output Specifications

Specification General Operation

(Outputs 2 thru 7)

High Speed Operation

1

(Outputs 2 and 3 Only)

User Supply Voltage minimum maximum

On-State Voltage

Drop at maximum load current at maximum surge current

Current Rating per

Point

Surge Current per

Point

20.4V dc

26.4V dc

1V dc

2.5V dc

20.4V dc

26.4V dc

Not Applicable

Not Applicable maximum load 1A at 55°C (131°F)

1.5A at 30°C (86°F)

1.0 mA minimum load maximum leakage 1.0 mA peak current 4.0A

10 msec maximum surge duration maximum rate of repetition at 30°C

(86°F) maximum rate of repetition at 55°C

(131°F) maximum total once every second once every 2 seconds

6A

100 mA

10 mA

1.0 mA

Not Applicable

Not Applicable

Not Applicable

Not Applicable

Not Applicable Current per

Common

Turn-On Time

Turn-Off Time maximum maximum

0.1 msec

1.0 msec

6 µsec

18 µsec

Repeatability

Drift maximum maximum n/a n/a

2 µsec

1 µsec per 5°C

(1 µsec per 9°F)

1. Outputs 2 and 3 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs (4 through 7). They may be used like the other FET transistor outputs, but in addition, within a limited current range, they may be operated at a higher speed. Outputs 2 and 3 also provide a pulse train output (PTO) or pulse width modulation output (PWM) function.

A-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table 8: Working Voltage (1764-24AWA)

Specification 1764-24AWA

Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation

265V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

151V ac for 1 second or 2145V dc for 1 second

Output Group to Backplane Isolation

132V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

Output Group to Output Group Isolation

265V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

265V Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V

Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation).

A-6

Specifications

Table 9: Working Voltage (1764-24BWA)

Specification 1764-24BWA

Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

265V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

600V ac for 1 second or 848V dc for 1 second

Power Supply User 24V Output to Backplane

Isolation

Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation

50V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second

75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Output Group to Backplane Isolation

Output Group to Output Group Isolation.

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

265V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation).

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

265V Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V

Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

A-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table 10: Working Voltage (1764-28BXB)

Specification 1764-28BXB

Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second

75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

FET Output Group to Backplane Isolation and FET

Outputs Group to Group

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second

75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Relay Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

265V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Relay Output Group to Relay and FET Output Group

Isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:

1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second

265V Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V

Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

A-8

Controller Dimensions

See also page 2-13 for “Base Unit Mounting Dimensions”.

Specifications

A-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Compact I/O Dimensions

Panel Mounting

For more than 2 modules: (number of modules - 1) X 35 mm (1.38 in.)

Refer to host controller documentation for this dimension.

35

(1.38)

132

(5.197)

122.6±0.2

(4.826±0.008)

28.5

(1.12)

NOTE: All dimensions are in mm (inches). Hole spacing tolerance:

±0.4 mm (0.016 in.)

End Cap

18 (0.71)

32

(1.26)

118

(4.65)

Depth: 85 (3.35)

Dimensions are in mm (inches).

Transistor Output Transient Pulses

Refer to page 3-14 for “Transistor Output Transient Pulses”.

A-10

Replacement Parts

B

Replacement Parts

This chapter contains the following information:

• a table of MicroLogix 1500 replacement parts

• procedure for replacing the lithium battery

• illustrations of the MicroLogix 1500 replacement doors and terminal blocks

MicroLogix 1500 Replacement Kits

The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog number.

Description

ESD Barrier

Base Terminal Doors (See page B-6.)

Processor Access Door (See page B-6.)

Door Combination Kit

ESD Barrier

Terminal Door

Access Door

Base Comms Door (See page B-7.)

Trim Pots/Mode Switch Cover Door (See page B-7.)

17-Point Terminal Block (for inputs on 1764-24AWA and -24BWA bases)

(See page B-8.)

21-Point Terminal Block (for inputs of 1764-28BXB and outputs for all base

units)(See page B-8.)

Catalog Number

1764-RPL-TRM1

1764-RPL-TDR1

1764-RPL-CDR1

1764-RPL-DR

1764-RPL-TB1

1764-RPL-TB2

B-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Lithium Battery (1747-BA)

Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards.

Handling

!

• Use only for the intended operation.

• Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures.

• Do not ship on passenger aircraft.

ATTENTION: Do not charge the batteries. An explosion could result or the cells could overheat causing burns.

Do not open, puncture, crush, or otherwise mutilate the batteries. A possibility of an explosion exists and/or toxic, corrosive, and flammable liquids would be exposed.

Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high temperatures. Do not attempt to solder batteries. An explosion could result.

Do not short positive and negative terminals together. Excessive heat can build up and cause severe burns.

Storing

Store lithium batteries in a cool, dry environment, typically +20

°

C to +25

°

C (+68

°

F to

77

°

F) and 40% to 60% humidity. Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container, away from flammable materials.

B-2

Replacement Parts

Transporting

One or Two Batteries - Each battery contains 0.23 grams of lithium. Therefore, up to two batteries can be shipped together within the United States without restriction.

Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may differ.

Three or More Batteries - Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped together within the United States are specified by the Department of

Transportation (DOT) in the Code of Federal Regulations, CFR49, “Transportation.”

An exemption to these regulations, DOT - E7052, covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids. This exemption authorizes transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle, rail freight, cargo vessel, and cargoonly aircraft, providing certain conditions are met. Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted.

A special provision of DOT-E7052 (11th Rev., October 21, 1982, par. 8-a) provides that:

“Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173.22a in any of these packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received.”

The Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a, relates to the use of packaging authorized under exemptions. In part, it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption.

Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries, such as the IATA

Articles Regulations of the International Air Transport Association, Geneva,

Switzerland.

Important:

Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically revised.

B-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Installing

Follow the procedure below to ensure proper replacement battery installation.

Important:

Do not remove the permanent battery when installing replacement battery.

1. Insert battery into replacement battery pocket with wires facing up.

2. Insert replacement battery wire connector into connector port.

3. Secure battery wires under wire latch (as shown below).

Replacement Battery Pocket

Replacement Battery

Battery Connector Wires

DC INPUTS

24V SINK/SOURCE

DC/RELAY OUT

24V SOURCE

Permanent Battery

(DO NOT REMOVE)

Connector Port

Wire Connector

Wire Latch

B-4

Replacement Parts

Disposing

!

ATTENTION: Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection. Explosion or violent rupture is possible. Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short circuiting, compacting, or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal.

For disposal, batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation regulations, to a proper disposal site. The U.S. Department of

Transportation authorizes shipment of “Lithium batteries for disposal” by motor vehicle only in regulation 173.1015 of CFR 49 (effective January 5, 1983). For additional information contact:

U.S. Department of Transportation

Research and Special Programs Administration

400 Seventh Street, S.W.

Washington, D.C. 20590

Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to lithium batteries, the material contained may be considered toxic, reactive, or corrosive. The person disposing of the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so. State and local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials.

For a lithium battery product safety data sheet, contact the manufacturer:

Sanyo Energy Corporation

2001 Sanyo Avenue

San Diego, CA 92173

(619) 661-4801

Tadiran Electronic Industries

2 Seaview Blvd.

Port Washington, NY 11050

(516) 621-4980

B-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Replacement Doors

The following figures illustrate the procedure for installing the MicroLogix 1500 replacement doors.

Base Terminal Door

L2

85-2

VAC

L1

VAC

VDC

0

VAC

VDC

1

O / 0

O / 1

O / 1

0

O / 8

O / 7

VAC

VDC

3

O / 5

VAC

VDC

4

O / 4

O / 3

O / 6

O / 2

VAC

VDC

5

O / 9

O / 1

1

1

3

2

Processor Access Door

B-6

Base Comms Door

2

Replacement Parts

1

Trim Pots/Mode Switch Cover Door

1

2

B-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Replacement Terminal Blocks

The figure below illustrates how to replace the MicroLogix 1500 terminal blocks.

B-8

C

Troubleshooting Your System

Troubleshooting Your System

This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller. Topics include:

• understanding the controller LED status

• controller error recovery model

• identifying controller faults

• calling Allen-Bradley for assistance

C-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Understanding the Controller LED Status

The controller status LEDs provide a mechanism to determine the current status of the controller if a programming device is not present or available.

D.C. INPUTS

POWER

RUN

FAULT

FORCE

BAT. LO

COMM 0

DCOMM

24V SINK / SOURCE

DC/RELAY OUT

24V SOURCE

LED

POWER

RUN

FAULT

FORCE

BATTERY

LOW off amber off red

COMM 0

Color

no input power

Indicates

off green off power on controller is not in Run mode or REM

Run controller is in Run mode or REM Run green green flashing off no fault detected red flashing faulted user program red system is not in Run mode; memory module transfer is in progress processor hardware fault or critical fault off green

DCOMM off no forces installed forces installed battery OK battery needs replacement flashes when communications are active green user configured communications

Mode 15 active default communications Mode 15 active

INPUTS off amber

OUTPUTS off amber input is not energized input is energized (logic status) output is not energized output is energized (logic status)

C-2

Troubleshooting Your System

When Operating Normally

The POWER and RUN LEDs are on. If a force condition is active, the FORCE LED turns on and remains on.

When an Error Exists

If an error exists within the controller, the controller LEDs operate as described in the following tables.

If the LEDS indicate:

All LEDS off

The Following

Error Exists

No input power or power supply error

Probable

Cause

No Line

Power

Power

Supply

Overloaded

Recommended Action

Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller.

This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded when output loading and temperature varies.

If the LEDS indicate:

The Following

Error Exists

Probable

Cause

Recommended Action

Power and

FAULT LEDs on solid

Hardware faulted Processor

Hardware

Error

Cycle power. Contact your local Allen-

Bradley representative if the error persists.

Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller.

If the LEDS indicate:

The Following

Error Exists

Probable

Cause

Power LED on and FAULT LED flashing

Application fault Hardware/

Software

Major Fault

Detected

Recommended Action

1. Monitor Status File Word S:6 for

major error code. See page C-6 for

more information.

2. Remove hardware/software condition causing fault.

3. Clear Major Error Halted flag, bit

S2:1/13.

4. Attempt a controller Run mode entry.

If unsuccessful, repeat recommended action steps above or contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor.

C-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Controller Error Recovery Model

Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and hardware problems in the micro controller. The model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system. Refer to the recommended pages within the model for further help.

Identify the error code and description.

No

Refer to page C-3 for

probable cause and recommended action.

Clear fault.

Correct the condition causing the fault.

Return controller to RUN or any of the REM test modes.

Is the error hardware related?

Yes

Are the wire connections tight?

Yes

No

Start

Tighten wire connections.

Is the Power

LED on?

Yes

Is the RUN LED on?

No

No

Does the controller have power supplied?

Yes

Refer to page C-3 for

probable cause and recommended action.

No

Check power.

Yes

Is the Fault LED on?

Yes

Refer to page C-3 for

probable cause and recommended action.

No

Is an input LED accurately showing status?

Yes

No

Refer to page C-3 for

probable cause and recommended action.

Test and verify system operation.

C-4

Troubleshooting Your System

Identifying Controller Faults

While a program is executing, a fault may occur within the operating system or your program. When a fault occurs, you have various options to determine what the fault is and how to correct it. This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions.

Automatically Clearing Faults

You can automatically clear a fault by cycling power to the controller when the Fault

Override at Powerup bit (S:1/8) is set in the status file.

You can also configure the controller to clear faults and go to RUN every time the controller is power cycled. This is a feature that OEMs can build into their equipment to allow end users to reset the controller. If the controller faults, it can be reset by simply cycling power to the machine. To accomplish this, set the following bits in the status file:

• S2:1/8 - Fault Override at Power-up

• S2:1/12 - Mode Behavior

If the fault condition still exists after cycling power, the controller re-enters the fault

mode. For more information on status bits, see “System Status File” on page G-1.

Note:

You can declare your own application-specific major fault by writing your own unique value to S:6 and then setting bit S:1/13 to prevent reusing system defined codes. The recommended values for user defined faults are FF00 to FF0F.

Manually Clearing Faults Using the Fault Routine

The occurrence of recoverable or non-recoverable user faults can cause the user fault subroutine to be executed. If the fault is recoverable, the subroutine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S:1/13. The controller then continues in the

Run or test mode.

The subroutine does not execute for non-user faults. See “User Fault Routine” on page 23-6 for information on creating a user fault subroutine.

C-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Fault Messages

This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the

MicroLogix 1500 programmable controllers. Each table lists the error code description, the probable cause, and the recommended corrective action.

Error

Code

(Hex)

0001

0002

0003

0004

0006

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

NVRAM ERROR The default program is loaded to the controller memory. This occurs:

• if a power down occurred during program download or transfer from the memory module.

• RAM integrity test failed.

UNEXPECTED

RESET

The controller was unexpectedly reset due to a noisy environment or internal hardware failure. The default program is loaded.

• Re-download or transfer the program.

• Verify battery is connected.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the error persists.

MEMORY

MODULE USER

PROGRAM IS

CORRUPT

MEMORY

INTEGRITY

ERROR

Memory module memory error. This error can also occur when going to the Run mode.

• Refer to proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1.

• Verify battery is connected.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the error persists.

Re-program the memory module. If the error persists, replace the memory module.

MEMORY

MODULE

HARDWARE

FAULT

While the controller was powered up, ROM or RAM became corrupt.

The memory module hardware faulted or the memory module is incompatible with

OS.

• Cycle power on your unit. Then, re-download your program and start up your system.

• Refer to proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the error persists.

• Upgrade the OS to be compatible with memory module.

• Obtain a new memory module.

C-6

Troubleshooting Your System

Error

Code

(Hex)

0007

0008

0009

000A

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

MEMORY

MODULE

TRANSFER

ERROR

FATAL INTERNAL

SOFTWARE

ERROR

FATAL INTERNAL

HARDWARE

ERROR

OS MISSING OR

CORRUPT

Failure during memory module transfer.

An unexpected software error occurred.

An unexpected hardware error occurred.

The operating system required for the user program is corrupt or missing.

Re-attempt the transfer. If the error persists, replace the memory module.

• Cycle power on your unit. Then, re-download your program and reinitialize any necessary data.

• Start up your system.

• Refer to proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the error persists.

• Cycle power on your unit. Then, re-download your program and reinitialize any necessary data.

• Start up your system.

• Refer to proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the error persists.

• Download a new OS using

ControlFlash.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for more information about available operating systems for the

MicroLogix 1500 controller.

C-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Error

Code

(Hex)

000B

0012

0015

0016

0017

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

BASE HARDWARE

FAULT

The base hardware faulted or is incompatible with the OS.

• Upgrade the OS using

ControlFlash to be compatible with the base.

• Obtain a new base.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for more information about available operating systems for the

MicroLogix 1500 controller.

LADDER

PROGRAM

ERROR

I/O

CONFIGURATION

FILE ERROR

The ladder program has a memory integrity problem.

The user program I/O configuration is invalid.

• Reload the program or re-compile and reload the program. If the error persists, be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program.

• Refer to proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1.

Re-compile and reload the program, and enter the Run mode. If the error persists, be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program.

STARTUP

PROTECTION

FAULT

NVRAM/MEMORY

MODULE ERROR

The user fault routine was executed at power-up, prior to the main ladder program.

Bit S:1/13 (Major Error Halted) was not cleared at the end of the User Fault

Routine. The User Fault Routine ran because bit S:1/9 was set at power-up.

Bit S:2/9 is set in the controller and the memory module user program does not match the controller user program.

• Either reset bit S:1/9 if this is consistent with the application requirements, and change the mode back to RUN, or

• clear S:1/13, the Major Error

Halted bit, before the end of the

User Fault Routine.

Transfer the memory module program to the controller and then change to

Run mode.

C-8

Troubleshooting Your System

Error

Code

(Hex)

0018

001A

0020

0022

0023

0028

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

MEMORY

MODULE USER

PROGRAM

INCOMPATIBLE

WITH OS

USER PROGRAM

INCOMPATIBLE

WITH OS AT

POWERUP

The user program in the memory module is incompatible with the OS.

The user program in the controller is incompatible with the OS.

• Upgrade the OS using

ControlFlash to be compatible with the memory module.

• Obtain a new memory module.

• Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for more information about available operating systems for the

MicroLogix 1500 controller.

• Upgrade the OS using

ControlFlash to be compatible with the user program in the controller.

• Re-compile and reload the program.

MINOR ERROR AT

END OF SCAN

DETECTED

WATCHDOG

TIMER EXPIRED,

SEE S:3

STI ERROR

A minor fault bit (bits 0-7) in S:5 was set at the end of scan.

• Correct the instruction logic causing the error.

• Enter the status file display in your programming software and clear the fault.

• Enter the Run mode.

The program scan time exceeded the watchdog timeout value (S:3H).

• Determine if the program is caught in a loop and correct the problem.

• Increase the watchdog timeout value in the status file.

An error occurred in the STI configuration.

See the Error Code in the STI

Function File for the specific error.

INVALID OR

NONEXISTENT

USER FAULT

ROUTINE VALUE

• A fault routine number was entered in the status file, number (S:29), but either the fault routine was not physically created, or

• the fault routine number was less than 3 or greater than 255.

• Either clear the fault routine file number (S:29) in the status file, or

• create a fault routine for the file number reference in the status file

(S:29). The file number must be greater than 2 and less than 256.

C-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Error

Code

(Hex)

0029

002E

0030

0031

0032

0033

0034

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

INSTRUCTION

INDIRECTION

OUTSIDE OF

DATA SPACE

EII ERROR

SUBROUTINE

NESTING

EXCEEDS LIMIT

UNSUPPORTED

INSTRUCTION

DETECTED

SQO/SQC/SQL

OUTSIDE OF

DATA FILE SPACE

BSL/BSR/FFL/

FFU/LFL/LFU

CROSSED DATA

FILE SPACE

An indirect address reference in the ladder program is outside of the entire data file space.

Correct the program to ensure that there are no indirect references outside data file space.

Re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode.

An error occurred in the EII configuration. See the Error Code in the EII

Function File for the specific error.

The JSR instruction nesting level exceeded the controller memory space.

Correct the user program to reduce the nesting levels used and to meet the restrictions for the JSR instruction. Then reload the program and Run.

The program contains an instruction(s) that is not supported by the controller.

• Modify the program so that all instructions are supported by the controller.

• Re-compile and reload the program and enter the Run mode.

A sequencer instruction length/position parameter references outside of the entire data file space.

The length/position parameter of a BSL,

BSR, FFL, FFU, LFL, or LFU instruction references outside of the entire data file space.

• Correct the program to ensure that the length and position parameters do not point outside data file space.

• Re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode.

• Correct the program to ensure that the length and position parameters do not point outside of the data space.

• Re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode.

NEGATIVE VALUE

IN TIMER PRESET

OR

ACCUMULATOR

A negative value was loaded to a timer preset or accumulator.

• If the program is moving values to the accumulated or preset word of a timer, make certain these values are not negative.

• Reload the program and enter the

Run mode.

C-10

Troubleshooting Your System

Error

Code

(Hex)

0035

0036

0037

003B

003C

003D

003E

003F

0050

0051

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

ILLEGAL

INSTRUCTION IN

INTERRUPT FILE

INVALID PID

PARAMETER

HSC ERROR

PTO ERROR

The program contains a Temporary End

(TND), Refresh (REF), or Service

Communication instruction in an interrupt subroutine (STI, EII, HSC) or user fault routine.

An invalid value is being used for a PID instruction parameter.

• Correct the program.

• Re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode.

See page 24-1, Process Control

Instruction for more information about the PID instruction.

An error occurred in the HSC configuration. See the Error Code in the HSC

Function File for the specific error.

An error occurred in the PTO instruction configuration.

See the Error Code in the PTO

Function File for the specific error.

PWM ERROR

INVALID

SEQUENCER

LENGTH/

POSITION

INVALID BIT

SHIFT OR LIFO/

FIFO PARAMETER

A BSR or BSL instruction length parameter is greater than 2048) or

A FFU, FFL, LFU, LFL instruction length parameter is greater than 128 (word file) or greater than 64 (double word file)

COP/FLL

OUTSIDE OF

DATA FILE SPACE

An error occurred in the PWM instruction configuration.

A sequencer instruction (SQO, SQC, SQL) length/position parameter is greater than

255.

A COP or FLL instruction length parameter references outside of the entire data space.

See the Error Code in the PWM

Function File for the specific error.

Correct the user program, then recompile, reload the program and enter the Run mode.

Correct the user program or allocate more data file space using the memory map, then reload and Run.

• Correct the program to ensure that the length and parameter do not point outside of the data file space.

• Re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode.

CONTROLLER

TYPE MISMATCH

BASE TYPE

MISMATCH

A particular controller type was selected in the user program configuration, but did not match the actual controller type.

A particular base type (AWA, BWA, BXB) was selected in the user program configuration, but did no match the actual base.

• Correct the controller base type, or

• Reconfigure the program to match the attached controller type.

• Correct the base type, or

• Reconfigure the program to match the attached base.

C-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Error

Code

(Hex)

0052

0070 xx71 xx79

0080 xx81

0083

0084

1

1

1

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

MINIMUM SERIES

ERROR

EXPANSION I/O

TERMINATOR

REMOVED

The base minimum series selected in the user program configuration was greater than the series on the actual base.

The required expansion I/O terminator was removed.

• Correct the base type, or

• Reconfigure the program to match the attached base.

• Check the expansion I/O terminator on the last I/O module.

• Cycle power.

EXPANSION I/O

HARDWARE

ERROR

EXPANSION I/O

MODULE ERROR

The controller cannot communicate with an expansion I/O module.

An expansion I/O module generated an error.

• Check connections.

• Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used.

• Replace the module.

• Cycle power.

• Refer to the I/O Module Status

(IOS) file.

• Consult 1769 publications for specific module to determine possible causes of a module error.

EXPANSION I/O

TERMINATOR

REMOVED

EXPANSION I/O

HARDWARE

ERROR

MAX I/O CABLES

EXCEEDED

MAX I/O POWER

SUPPLIES

EXCEEDED

The required expansion I/O terminator was removed.

• Check expansion I/O terminator on last I/O module.

• Cycle power.

The controller cannot communicate with an expansion I/O module.

• Check connections.

• Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used.

• Replace the module.

• Cycle power.

The maximum number of expansion I/O cables allowed was exceeded.

The maximum number of expansion I/O power supplies allowed was exceeded.

• Reconfigure the expansion I/O system so that it has an allowable number of cables.

• Cycle power.

• Reconfigure the expansion I/O system so that it has the correct number of power supplies.

C-12

Troubleshooting Your System

Error

Code

(Hex)

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

0085 xx86 xx87

1

1

MAX I/O

MODULES

EXCEEDED

EXPANSION I/O

MODULE BAUD

RATE ERROR

The maximum number of expansion I/O modules allowed was exceeded.

An expansion I/O module could not communicate at the baud rate specified in the user program I/O configuration.

I/O

CONFIGURATION

MISMATCH

• The expansion I/O configuration in the user program did not match the actual configuration, or

• The expansion I/O configuration in the user program specified a module, but one was not found, or

• The expansion I/O module configuration data size for a module was greater than what the module is capable of holding.

• Reconfigure the expansion I/O system so that it has an allowable number of modules.

• Cycle power.

• Change the baud rate in the user program I/O configuration, and

• re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode, or

• replace the module.

• Cycle power.

• Either correct the user program

I/O configuration to match the actual configuration, or

• With power off, correct the actual

I/O configuration to match the user program configuration.

xx88 xx89

1

1

EXPANSION I/O

MODULE

CONFIGURATION

ERROR

The number of input or output image words configured in the user program exceeds the image size in the expansion I/O module.

EXPANSION I/O

MODULE ERROR

An expansion I/O module generated an error.

• Correct the user program I/O configuration to reduce the number of input or output words, and

• re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode.

• Refer to the I/O status file.

• Consult 1769 publications for specific module to determine possible causes of a module error.

xx8A

1 EXPANSION I/O

CABLE

CONFIGURATION

MISMATCH

ERROR

• Either an expansion I/O cable is configured in the user program, but no cable is present, or

• an expansion I/O cable is configured in the user program and a cable is physically present, but the types do not match.

• Correct the user program to eliminate a cable that is not present

• re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode, or

• add the missing cable.

• Cycle power.

1. xx indicates module number. If xx = 0, problem cannot be traced to a specific module.

C-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Error

Code

(Hex)

xx8B

1

Advisory

Message

Description Recommended Action

xx8C

1

EXPANSION I/O

POWER SUPPLY

CONFIGURATION

MISMATCH

ERROR

EXPANSION I/O

OBJECT TYPE

MISMATCH

• Either an expansion I/O power supply is configured in the user program, but no power supply is present, or

• an expansion I/O power supply is configured in the user program and a power supply is physically present, but the types do not match.

• Correct the user program to eliminate a power supply that is not present

• re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode, or

• With power removed, add the missing power supply.

An expansion I/O object (i.e. cable, power supply, or module) in the user program I/O configuration is not the same object type as is physically present.

• Correct the user program I/O configuration so that the object types match the actual configuration, and

• Re-compile, reload the program and enter the Run mode. Or

• Correct the actual configuration to match the user program I/O configuration.

• Cycle power.

1. xx indicates module number. If xx = 0, problem cannot be traced to a specific module.

Calling Allen-Bradley for Assistance

If you need to contact Allen-Bradley or local distributor for assistance, it is helpful to obtain the following (prior to calling):

• controller type, series letter, and revision letter of the base unit

• series letter, revision letter, and firmware (FRN) number of the processor (on bottom side of processor unit)

• controller LED status

• controller error codes (found in S2:6 of status file).

C-14

1. xx indicates module number. If xx = 0, problem cannot be traced to a specific module.

Understanding the Communication Protocols

D

Understanding the

Communication Protocols

Use the information in this appendix to understand the differences in communication protocols. The following protocols are supported from the RS-232 communication channel:

• DF1 Full-Duplex

• DF1 Half-Duplex Slave

• DH485

See “Connecting the System” on page 4-1 for information about required network

devices and accessories.

RS-232 Communication Interface

The communications port on the MicroLogix 1500 utilizes an RS-232 connector. RS-

232 is an Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standard that specifies the electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial binary communication.

It provides you with a variety of system configuration possibilities. (RS-232 is a definition of electrical characteristics; it is not a protocol.)

One of the biggest benefits of the RS-232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system (using the appropriate DF1 protocol only; not DH485 protocol).

D-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol provides a point-to-point connection between two devices.

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol combines data transparency (American National Standards

Institute ANSI - X3.28-1976 specification subcategory D1) and 2-way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses (subcategory F1).

The MicroLogix 1500 controllers support the DF1 Full-Duplex protocol via RS-232 connection to external devices, such as computers, or other controllers that support

DF1 Full-Duplex.

DF1 is an open protocol. Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference

Manual, Allen-Bradley publication 1770-6.5.16, for more information.

DF1 Full-Duplex Operation

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point protocol) is useful where RS-232 point-to-point communication is required. This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions. DF1 protocol controls message flow, detects and signals errors, and retries if errors are detected.

When the system driver is DF1 Full-Duplex, the following parameters can be changed:

Table 25-1: DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters

Parameter

Baud Rate

Parity

Source ID (Node Address)

Control Line

Error Detection

Embedded Responses

Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect

ACK Timeout

NAK retries

ENQ retries

Stop Bits

Options

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K none, even

0 to 254 decimal no handshaking, Full-Duplex modem handshaking

CRC, BCC auto-detect, enabled enabled, disabled

1 to 65535 counts (20 ms increments)

0 to 255

0 to 255 not a setting, always 1

Default

19.2K

none

1 no handshaking

CRC auto detect enabled

50 counts

3 retries

3 retries

1

D-2

Understanding the Communication Protocols

Example DF1 Full-Duplex Connections

For information about required network connecting equipment, see chapter 3,

Connecting the System.

Optical Isolator (recommended)

1761-CBL-PM02

Personal Computer

Modem cable

Personal Computer

Modem

Optical Isolator

(recommended)

Micro Controller

Modem

1761-CBL-PM02

We recommend using an AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as your optical isolator.

D-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol

DF1 Half-Duplex protocol provides a multi-drop single master/multiple slave network. DF1 Half-Duplex protocol supports data transparency (American National

Standards Institute ANSI - X3.28-1976 specification subcategory D1). In contrast to

DF1 Full-Duplex, communication takes place in one direction at a time. You can use the RS-232 port on the MicroLogix 1500 as both a Half-Duplex programming port, and a Half-Duplex peer-to-peer messaging port.

DF1 Half-Duplex Operation

The master device initiates all communication by “polling” each slave device. The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master. It is the master’s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate. During a polling sequence, the master polls a slave either repeatedly until the slave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit or just one time per polling sequence, depending on how the master is configured.

An additional feature of the DF1 Half-Duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to/ from another slave. When the initiating slave is polled, the MSG instruction is sent to the master. The master recognizes that the message is not intended for it, but for another slave, so the master immediately forwards the message to the intended slave.

This slave-to-slave transfer is a function of the master device and is also used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1

Half-Duplex link.

The MicroLogix 1500 can only act as a slave device. A device that can act as a master is required. Several Allen-Bradley products support DF1 Half-Duplex master protocol. They include the SLC 5/03™ and higher, and enhanced PLC-5

®

processors.

Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX™ and RSLinx (version 2.x and higher) also support DF1 Half-Duplex master protocol.

DF1 Half-Duplex supports up to 255 devices (address 0 to 254) with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts. The MicroLogix 1500 supports broadcast reception but cannot initiate a broadcast command. The MicroLogix 1500 supports Half-

Duplex modems using RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.

D-4

Understanding the Communication Protocols

When the system driver is DF1 Half-Duplex Slave, the following parameters can be changed:

Table 25-2: DF1 Half-Duplex Configuration Parameters

Parameter

Baud Rate

Options

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K

Parity

Source ID (Node

Address)

Control Line none, even

0 to 254 decimal no handshaking, Half-Duplex modem handshaking

1200 none

1

Default

Error Detection

EOT Suppression

Duplicate Packet

(Message) Detect

CRC, BCC enabled, disabled

When EOT Suppression is enabled, the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued. This saves modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit.

enabled, disabled

Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message. Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender’s Message Retries are not set to 0.

Poll Timeout (x20 ms) 0 to 65535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)

Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction. It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device. If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout, a MSG instruction error is generated, and the ladder program needs to requeue the MSG instruction. If you are using a MSG instruction, it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be used. Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero.

RTS Off Delay (x20 ms)

RTS Send Delay (x20 ms)

0 to 65535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)

Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated. Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet.

0 to 65535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)

Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response. For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS.

Message Retries

Pre Transmit Delay

(x1 ms)

0 to 255

Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master device. For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission.

0 to 65535 (can be set in 1 ms increments)

• When the Control Line is set to no handshaking, this is the delay time before transmission. Required for 1761-NET-AIC physical Half-Duplex networks. The 1761-

NET-AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to receive mode.

• When the Control Line is set to DF1 Half-Duplex Modem, this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion.

no handshaking

CRC disabled enabled

50

0

0

3

0

D-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX,

RSLinx 2.0 (or higher), SLC 5/03, SLC

5/04, and SLC 5/05, or PLC-5 processors configured for DF1 Half-

Duplex Master.

RS-232 (DF1 Protocol)

MicroLogix 1500

Programmable

Controller

SLC 5/03 Processor

Modular Controller

MicroLogix 1500

Programmable Controllers

SLC 500 Fixed I/O

Controller with 1747-KE

Interface Module

Note:

It is recommended that isolation (1761-NET-AIC) be provided between the

MicroLogix 1500 and the modem.

Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi-drop Link

When communication is between either your programming software and a

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix 1500

Programmable Controllers via a slave-to-slave connection on a larger multi-drop link, the devices depend on a DF1 Master to give each of them polling permission to transmit in a timely manner. As the number of slaves increases on the link (up to 254), the time between when your programming software or the MicroLogix 1500

Controller is polled also increases. This increase in time may become larger if you are using low baud rates.

As these time periods grow, the following values may need to be changed to avoid loss of communication:

• programming software: increase poll timeout and reply timeout values

• MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controller: increase poll timeout

D-6

Understanding the Communication Protocols

Ownership Timeout

When a program download sequence is started by a software package to download a ladder logic program to a MicroLogix 1500 controller, the software takes “program ownership” of the processor. Program ownership prevents other devices from reading from or writing to the processor while the download is in process. Once the download is completed, the programming software returns the program ownership to the controller, so other devices can communicate with it again.

The controller clears the program ownership if no supported commands are received from the owner within the timeout period. If the program ownership were not cleared after a download sequence interruption, the processor would not accept commands from any other device because it would assume another device still had program ownership.

Important:

If a download sequence is interrupted, due to electromagnetic interference or other events, discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and then restart the program download. The ownership timeout period is 60 seconds.

After the timeout, you can re-establish communications with the processor and try the program download again. The only other way to remove program ownership is to cycle power on the processor.

D-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Using Modems with MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers

The types of modems that you can use with MicroLogix 1500 controllers include dialup phone modems, leased-line modems, radio modems and line drivers.

For point-to-point Full-Duplex modem connections that do not require any modem handshaking signals to operate, use DF1 Full-Duplex protocol. For point-to-point

Full-Duplex modem connections that require RTS/CTS handshaking, use DF1 Full-

Duplex protocol.

For multi-drop modem connections, or for point-to-point modem connections that require RTS/CTS handshaking, use DF1 Half-Duplex slave protocol. In this case, one

(and only one) of the other devices must be configured for DF1 Half-Duplex master protocol.

Important:

Never attempt to use DH485 protocol through modems under any circumstance.

Note:

All MicroLogix 1500 controllers support RTS/CTS modem handshaking when configured for DF1 Full-Duplex protocol with the control line parameter set to Full-Duplex Modem Handshaking or DF1 Half-Duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to “Half-Duplex Modem”.

No other modem handshaking lines (i.e. Data Set Ready, Carrier Detect and

Data Terminal Ready) are supported by any MicroLogix 1500 controllers.

Dial-Up Phone Modems

Dial-up phone line modems support point-to-point Full-Duplex communications.

Normally a MicroLogix 1500 controller, on the receiving end of the dial-up connection, will be configured for DF1 Full-Duplex protocol with the control line parameter set for Full-Duplex modem. The modem connected to the MicroLogix

1500 controller must support auto-answer. The MicroLogix 1500 has no means to cause its modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call, so this must be done from the site of the remote modem.

D-8

Understanding the Communication Protocols

Leased-Line Modems

Leased-line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically leased from the local phone company. The dedicated lines may be in a point-to-point topology supporting Full-Duplex communications between two modems or in a multi-drop topology supporting Half-Duplex communications between three or more modems. In the point-to-point topology, configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Full-Duplex protocol. In the multi-drop topology, configure the MicroLogix

1500 controllers for DF1 Half-Duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to “Half-Duplex Modem”.

Radio Modems

Radio modems may be implemented in a point-to-point topology supporting either

Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex communications, or in a multi-drop topology supporting

Half-Duplex communications between three or more modems. In the point-to-point topology using Full-Duplex radio modems, configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Full-Duplex protocol. In the point-to-point topology using Half-

Duplex radio modems, or multi-drop topology using Half-Duplex radio modems, configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Half-Duplex slave protocol. If these radio modems require RTS/CTS handshaking, configure the control line parameter to “Half-Duplex Modem”.

Line Drivers

Line drivers, also called short-haul “modems”, do not actually modulate the serial data, but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances (up to several miles). Allen-Bradley’s AIC+ Advanced

Interface Converter is a line driver that converts an RS-232 electrical signal into an

RS485 electrical signal, increasing the signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet.

In a point-to-point line driver topology, configure the MicroLogix 1500 controller for

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol. In a multi-drop line driver topology, configure the

MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Half-Duplex slave protocol. If the line drivers that are used require RTS/CTS handshaking, configure the Control Line parameter to

Half-Duplex Modem.

D-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

DH485 Communication Protocol

The information in this section describes the DH485 network functions, network architecture, and performance characteristics. It will also help you plan and operate the MicroLogix 1500 on a DH485 network.

DH485 Network Description

The DH485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires. DH485 protocol uses RS-485 Half-Duplex as its physical interface. (RS-485 is a definition of electrical characteristics; it is not a protocol.) RS-485 uses devices that are capable of co-existing on a common data circuit, thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices.

The DH485 network offers:

• interconnection of 32 devices

• multi-master capability

• token passing access control

• the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network

• maximum network length of 1219 m (4000 ft)

The DH485 protocol supports two classes of devices: initiators and responders. All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers. To determine which initiator has the right to transmit, a token passing algorithm is used.

The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the

DH485 network.

DH485 Token Rotation

A node holding the token can send a message onto the network. Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions (based on the Token Hold Factor) each time it receives the token. After a node sends a message, it passes the token to the next device.

The allowable range of node addresses 0 to 31. There must be at least one initiator on the network (such as a MicroLogix 1000 or 1500 controller, or an SLC 5/02™ or higher processor).

D-10

Understanding the Communication Protocols

DH485 Configuration Parameters

When the MicroLogix 1500 communications are configured for DH485, the following parameters can be changed:

Table 25-3: DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters

Parameter Options

Baud Rate 9600, 19.2K

Node Address

Token Hold Factor

Max Node Address

1 to 31 decimal

1 to 4

1 to 31

1

2

Default

19.2K

31

See “Software Considerations” on page D-15 for tips on setting the parameters listed

above.

Devices that use the DH485 Network

In addition to the MicroLogix 1500 controllers, the devices shown in the following table also support the DH485 network.

Table 25-4: Allen-Bradley Devices that Support DH485 Communication

Catalog Number

Bulletin 1761

Controllers

Bulletin 1747

Processors

1746-BAS

1785-KA5

2760-RB

Description Installation Function Publication

MicroLogix 1000 These controllers support DH485 communications.

SLC 500 Processors SLC Chassis These processors support a variety of I/O requirements and functionality.

BASIC Module

Series C or later

1761-6.3

1747-6.2

SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices. Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels

(2 RS232 and 1 DH485) to printers, modems, or the

DH485 network for data collection.

1746-6.1

1746-6.2

1746-6.3

DH

+

TM

/DH485

Gateway

(1771) PLC

Chassis

Provides communication between stations on the PLC-

5 r

(DH

+

) and SLC 500 (DH485) networks. Enables communication and data transfer from PLC

®

to SLC

500 on DH485 network. Also enables programming software programming or data acquisition across DH+ to DH485.

1785-6.5.5

1785-1.21

Flexible Interface

Module

(1771) PLC

Chassis

Provides an interface for SLC 500 (using protocol cartridge 2760-SFC3) to other A-B PLCs and devices.

Three configurable channels are available to interface with Bar Code, Vision, RF, Dataliner™, and PLC systems.

2760-ND001

D-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table 25-4: Allen-Bradley Devices that Support DH485 Communication

Catalog Number

1784-PCMK

1747-PT1

Description

1784-KTX, -KTXD PC DH485 IM

Installation

IBM XT/AT

Computer Bus

Function

Provides DH485 using RSLinx

PCMCIA IM PCMCIA slot in computer and

Interchange

Provides DH485 using RSLinx

Hand-Held Terminal NA

DTAM, DTAM Plus, and DTAM Micro

Operator Interfaces

Provides hand-held programming, monitoring, configuring, and troubleshooting capabilities for SLC

500 processors.

Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors.

1747-DTAM,

2707-L8P1, -L8P2,

-L40P1, -L40P2,

-V40P1, -V40P2, -

V40P2N, -M232P3, and -M485P3

2711-K5A2, -B5A2,

-K5A5, -B5A5,

-K5A1, -B5A1,

-K9A2, -T9A2,

-K9A5, -T9A5,

-K9A1, and -T9A1

PanelView 550 and

PanelView 900

Operator Terminals

Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors.

NA = Not Applicable

Publication

1784-6.5.22

1784-6.5.19

1747-NP002

1747-ND013

2707-800,

2707-803

2711-802,

2711-816

D-12

Understanding the Communication Protocols

Important DH485 Network Planning Considerations

Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware. Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system performance:

• amount of electrical noise, temperature, and humidity in the network environment

• number of devices on the network

• connection and grounding quality in installation

• amount of communication traffic on the network

• type of process being controlled

• network configuration

The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections.

Hardware Considerations

You need to decide the length of the communication cable, where you route it, and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed.

When the communication cable is installed, you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future.

The following sections will help you understand and plan the network.

Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable

The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m (4000 ft). This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node on the network.

Planning Cable Routes

Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference:

• Keep the communication cable at least 1.52 m (5 ft) from any electric motors, transformers, rectifiers, generators, arc welders, induction furnaces, or sources of microwave radiation.

• If you must run the cable across power feed lines, run the cable at right angles to the lines.

D-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

• If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.15 m (6 in.) from ac power lines of less than 20A, 0.30 m (1 ft) from lines greater than 20A, but only up to 100k VA, and

0.60 m (2 ft) from lines of 100k VA or more.

• If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.08 m (3 in.) from ac power lines of less than 20A,

0.15 m (6 in.) from lines greater than 20A, but only up to 100k VA, and 0.30 m (1 ft) from lines of 100k VA or more.

Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference. If you route the cable through conduit, follow these additional recommendations:

™

Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference. You can use aluminum conduit in non-critical areas.

™

Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit.

Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector (use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid) to hold both sections at the same potential.

™

Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground.

™

Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable.

™

Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit. The conduit should contain only serial communication cables.

™

Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications.

For more information on planning cable routes, see Industrial Automation Wiring and

Grounding Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1.

D-14

Understanding the Communication Protocols

Software Considerations

Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network. The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance:

• number of nodes on the network

• addresses of those nodes

• baud rate

The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance (speed). See your programming software’s user manual for more information.

Number of Nodes

The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes. Unnecessary nodes (such as a second programming terminal that is not being used) slow the data transfer rate. The maximum number of nodes on the network is

32.

Setting Node Addresses

The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order. Initiators, such as personal computers, should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network. The valid range for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers is 1-31 (controllers cannot be node 0). The default setting is 1. The node address is stored in the controller Communications

Status file (CS0:5/0 to CS0:5/7).

Setting Controller Baud Rate

The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate, which is 19200. This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix 1500 device on the DH485 network. All devices must be at the same baud rate. This rate is stored in the controller

Communications Status file (CS0:5/8 to CS0:5/15).

D-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Setting Maximum Node Address

Once you have an established network set up, and are confident that you will not be adding more devices, you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers. It should be set to the highest node address being used.

Important:

All devices should be set to the same maximum node address.

Example DH485 Connections

The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix

1500 controllers to the DH485 network using the Advanced Interface Converter

(AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC). For more information on the AIC+, see the

Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions,

Publication 1761-5.11.

DH485 Network with a MicroLogix 1500 Controller

MicroLogix

1500

1761-CBL-AM00 or

1761-CBL-HM02 connection from port 1 or port 2 to MicroLogix

+24V dc user supply

1761-CBL-AP00 or

1761-CBL-PM02

1761-CBL-AP00 or

1761-CBL-PM02 connection from port 1 or port 2 to PC

1747-CP3 or

1761-CBL-AC00

+24V dc user supply

D-16

Typical 3-Node Network

PanelView 550

Understanding the Communication Protocols

MicroLogix 1500

1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02

1761-CBL-AS09 or 1761-CBL-AS03

RJ45 port

1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00

D-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Networked Operator Interface Device and MicroLogix 1500 Controller

PanelView 550

AIC+

RS-232 Port

NULL modem adapter

1761-CBL-AP00 or

1761-CBL-PM02 connection from NULL modem adapter to AIC+ connection from

PC to AIC+

1761-CBL-AP00 or

1761-CBL-PM02

AIC+

1747-CP3 or

1761-CBL-AC00

+24V dc user supply

1747-CP3 or 1761-

CBL-AC00

+24V dc user supply

AIC+

1747-AIC

+24V dc user supply

1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02

SLC 5/03 processor

MicroLogix 1500

D-18

Understanding the Communication Protocols

MicroLogix 1500 Remote Packet Support

MicroLogix 1500 controllers can respond and initiate with device’s communications

(or commands) that do not originate on the local DH485 network. This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH485 and DH+ networks.

The example below shows how to send messages from a PLC device or a PC on the

DH+ network to a MicroLogix 1500 controller on the DH485 network. This method uses an SLC 5/04 processor bridge connection.

When using this method:

• PLC-5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix 1500 controllers.

• MicroLogix 1500 controllers can respond to MSG instructions received. The

MicroLogix 1500 controllers can initiate MSG instructions to devices on the DH+ network.

• PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix 1500 controllers.

• PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix 1500 controllers.

PLC-5

PLC-5

SLC 5/04

MicroLogix 1500

MicroLogix 1500

DH+ Network

DH485 Network

SLC 5/03

MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1000

D-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

D-20

System Loading and Heat Dissipation

E

System Loading and

Heat Dissipation

System Loading Limitations

When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I/O, an electrical load is placed on the base unit power supply. This section shows how to calculate the load and validate that the system will not exceed the capacity of the base unit power supply.

The following example is provided to illustrate system loading validation. The system validation procedure accounts for the amount of 5V dc and 24V dc current consumed

by controller, expansion I/O, and user supplied equipment. Use the “System Loading

Worksheet” on page E-4 to validate your specific configuration.

Current consumed by the Base Units, Memory Modules, Real Time Clock Modules, and the Right End Cap Terminator (for systems utilizing Compact I/O expansion) has already been factored into the calculations. A system is valid if the current and power requirements are satisfied.

Note:

A Right End Cap Terminator (catalog number 1769-ECR) is needed for any system using Compact expansion I/O.

E-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

System Loading Example Calculations

Current Loading

Table 25-5: Calculating the Current for MicroLogix Accessories

Catalog Number

Device Current Requirements at 5V dc (mA)

1764-LSP

1764-DAT

1

300

350

1761-NET-AIC

1

when powered by the base unit communications port, selector switch in the up position 0

at 24V dc (mA)

0

0

120

Subtotal 1:

Calculated Current at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA)

300 0

350 0

0

650

120

120

1. These are optional accessories. Current is consumed only if the accessory is installed.

Table 25-6: Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O

Catalog Number

1769-IA16

1769-IM12

1769-IQ16

1769-OA8

1769-OB16

1769-OV16

1769-OW8

1769-IQ6XOW4

1769-IF4

1769-OF2

1 n

Number of Modules

1

1

2

1

A

Device Current Requirements at 5V dc (mA)

115

100

115

145

200

200

125

105

100

100

B at 24V dc (mA)

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

50

100

150

n x A n x B

Calculated Current at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA)

115

200

250

105

0

0

200

50

E-2

Total Modules

(8 maximum): 5 Subtotal 2:

1. Refer to your Compact I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table.

670 250

System Loading and Heat Dissipation

Validating the System

The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations. The systems are valid because:

Calculated Current Values < Maximum Allowable Current Values

Calculated System Loading < Maximum Allowable System Loading

Table 25-7: Validating Systems using 1764-24AWA and 1764-28BXB Base Units

Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values

Current:

Current (Subtotal 1 + Subtotal 2 from page E-2.):

2250 mA at 5V dc

System Loading:

400 mA at 24V dc 650 mA + 670 mA = 1320 mA at 5V dc 120 mA + 250 mA = 370 mA at 24V dc

System Loading:

16 Watts

= (1320 mA x 5V) + (370 mA x 24V)

= (6600 mW) + (8880 mW)

= 15,480 mW

= 15.5 Watts

Table 25-8: Validating Systems using 1764-24BWA Base Unit

Maximum Allowable Values

Current for Devices Connected to the +24V dc User Supply:

Calculated Values

Sum of all current sensors and/or 1761-NET-AIC connected to the +24V dc user supply (AIC+ selector switch in the down position

1

):

400 mA at 24V dc 150 mA at 24V dc (example sensor value)

Current for MicroLogix Accessories and

Expansion I/O:

2250 mA at 5V dc

Current Values (Subtotal 1 + Subtotal 2 from page E-2.):

400 mA at 24V dc 650 mA + 670 mA = 1320 mA at 5V dc 120 mA + 250 mA = 370 mA at 24V dc

System Loading:

22 Watts

System Loading:

= (150 mA x 24V) + (1320 mA x 5V) + (370 mA x 24V)

= (3600 mW) + (6600 mW) + (8880 mW)

= 19,080 mW

= 19.1 Watts

1. No current is consumed from the controller when the AIC+ is powered by an external source.

E-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

System Loading Worksheet

The tables below are provided for system loading validation. See “System Loading

Example Calculations” on page E-2 for an illustration of system loading validation.

Current Loading

Table 25-9: Calculating the Current for MicroLogix Accessories

Catalog Number

Device Current Requirements at 5V dc (mA)

1764-LSP

1764-DAT

1

300

350

1761-NET-AIC

1

when powered by the base unit communications port, selector switch in the up position 0

at 24V dc (mA)

0

0

120

Subtotal 1:

Calculated Current at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA)

1. These are optional accessories. Current is consumed only if the accessory is installed.

Table 25-10: Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O

Catalog Number

1769-IA16

1769-IM12

1769-IQ16

1769-OA8

1769-OB16

1769-OV16

1769-OW8

1769-IQ6XOW4

1769-IF4

1769-OF2

1 n

Number of Modules

1

1

2

1

A

Device Current Requirements at 5V dc (mA)

115

100

115

145

200

200

125

105

100

100

B at 24V dc (mA)

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

50

100

150

n x A n x B

Calculated Current at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA)

Total Modules

(8 maximum): 5 Subtotal 2:

1. Refer to your Compact I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table.

E-4

System Loading and Heat Dissipation

Validating the System

The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations. The systems are valid because:

Calculated Current Values < Maximum Allowable Current Values

Calculated System Loading < Maximum Allowable System Loading

Table 25-11: Validating Systems using 1764-24AWA and 1764-28BXB Base Units

Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values

Current:

Current (Subtotal 1 + Subtotal 2 from page E-2.):

2250 mA at 5V dc

System Loading:

400 mA at 24V dc

System Loading:

16 Watts

Table 25-12: Validating Systems using 1764-24BWA Base Unit

Maximum Allowable Values

Current for Devices Connected to the +24V dc User Supply:

Calculated Values

Sum of all current sensors and/or 1761-NET-AIC connected to the +24V dc user supply (AIC+ selector switch in the down position

1

): mA at 24V dc

400 mA at 24V dc

Current for MicroLogix Accessories and

Expansion I/O:

2250 mA at 5V dc 400 mA at 24V dc

System Loading:

Current Values (Subtotal 1 + Subtotal 2 from page E-2.):

mA at 5 V dc mA at 24V dc

22 Watts

System Loading:

= ( ________ mA x 24V) + ( ________ mA x 5V) + ( ________ mA x 24V)

= __________ mW + __________ mW + __________ mW

= __________ mW

= __________ W

1. No current is consumed from the controller when the AIC+ is powered by an external source.

E-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Calculating Heat Dissipation

Catalog Number

1764-24AWA

1764-24BWA

1764-28BXB

1764-LSP

1764-DAT

1764-MM1, -RTC, -MM1/RTC

1769-IA16

1769-IM12

1769-IQ16

1769-OA8

1769-OB16

1769-OV16

1769-OW8

1769-IQ6XOW4

1769-IF4

1769-OF2

Use this procedure when you need to determine the heat dissipation for installation in an enclosure. Use the following table. For System Loading, take the value from the

table on page E-5:

Equation or Constant

18W + (0.3 x System Loading)

20W + (0.3 x System Loading)

20W + (0.3 x System Loading)

1.5W

1.75W

0

3.30W x number of modules

3.65W x number of modules

3.55W x number of modules

2.12W x number of modules

2.11W x number of modules

2.06W x number of modules

2.83W x number of modules

2.75W x number of modules

Heat Dissipation

Calculation

18W + (0.3 x ______ W)

20W + (0.3 x ______ W)

20W + (0.3 x ______ W)

3.30W x __________

3.65W x __________

3.55W x __________

2.12W x __________

2.11W x __________

2.06W x __________

2.83W x __________

2.75W x __________

Sub-Total

Add Sub-Totals to determine Heat Dissipation

E-6

Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time

F

Memory Usage and

Instruction Execution Time

This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1500 programming instructions. The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution time for each instruction. Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided.

Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time

Table F-1 on page F-2 lists the execution times and memory usage for the

programming instructions. These values depend on whether you are using word or

long word as the data format.

F-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table F-1: MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions

Programming Instruction

Add

And

Bit Shift Left

Bit Shift Right

Clear

File Copy

Count Down

Count Up

Decode 4-to-1 of 16

Divide

Encode 1-of-16 to 4

Equal

FIFO Load

FIFO Unload

Fill File

Instruction

Mnemonic

ADD

AND

BSL

BSR

CLR

COP

CTD

CTU

DCD

DIV

ENC

EQU

FFL

FFU

FLL

Convert from BCD

Greater Than or Equal To

Greater Than

High Speed Load

Immediate Input with Mask IIM

Interrupt Subroutine

FRD

GEQ

GRT

HSL

INT

Immediate Output with Mask IOM

Jump

Jump to Subroutine

JMP

JSR

Label

Less Than or Equal To

Less Than

LIFO Load

LIFO Unload

Limit

Master Control Reset

LBL

LEQ

LES

0.16

1.02

1.02

LFL

LFU

LIM

9.50

9.50

5.79

MCR (Start)

0.66

MCR (End)

0.87

0.00

0.00

0.16

0.00

0.00

0.00

Word

Execution Time in µs Memory

False True

Usage in

Words

0.00

0.00

2.12

2.00

0.00

29+1.08/word

0.00

29+1.14/word

3.25

2.75

3.75

3.75

0.00

0.00

8.30

8.40

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.94

1.18

16+0.7/word

8.30

7.80

1.68

9.95

6.90

1.30

9.50

20.00

9.50

18+0.727/word

0.00

13+0.43/word

0.00

0.94

0.94

12.61

1.30

1.30

41.85

22.06

0.16

19.44

0.39

6.43

0.16

1.30

1.22

20.00

20.80

6.43

0.66

0.87

1.00

2.00

2.38

2.38

0.00

5.49 1.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

1.88

2.00

0.00

32.92 3.50

1.50

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

1.25

1.41

2.27 2.63

3.38

3.38

2.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

1.50

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

1.25

1.25

7.25

3.00

0.25

3.00

0.50

1.50

0.50

1.25

1.25

3.38

3.38

2.25

1.00

1.50

False

0.00

0.00

9.50

9.50

0.00

13.7+0.85/Lword 2.50

2.27

2.27

0.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

2.27

2.27

9.50

9.50

11.59

Long Word

Execution Time in µs

True

10.82

8.20

23.00

20+1.39/Lword

2.59

2.59

42.95

2.59

2.59

24.00

24.00

12.41

Memory

Usage in

Words

3.50

3.00

3.88

3.38

2.88

2.38

7.75

2.88

2.88

3.88

3.38

4.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

F-2

Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time

Table F-1: MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions

Instruction

Mnemonic

MEQ

Word

Execution Time in µs Memory

Usage in

False True Words

1.97

2.07

1.75

Long Word

Execution Time in µs

False

2.58

True

3.37

Programming Instruction

Masked Comparison for

Equal

Move

Message, Steady State

Message, False-to-True

Transition for Reads

Message, False-to-True

Transition for Writes

Multiply

Masked Move

Negate

Not Equal

Not

One Shot

Or

One Shot Falling

One Shot Rising

Output Enable

Output Latch

Output Unlatch

Proportional Integral

Derivative

Pulse Train Output

Pulse Width Modulation

Reset Accumulator

I/O Refresh

Reset

Return

Retentive Timer On

Subroutine

Scale

Scale with Parameters

Sequencer Compare

Sequencer Load

MOV

MSG

MUL

MVM

NEG

NEQ

NOT

ONS

OR

OSF

OSR

OTE

OTL

OTU

PID

PTO

PWM

RAC

REF

RES

RET

RTO

SBR

SCL

SCP

SQC

SQL

0.00

6.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.94

0.00

1.85

0.00

3.01

2.43

0.98

0.00

0.00

9.65

2.15

8.00

150.00

200+1.3/word

5.88

7.05

2.35

1.30

2.20

1.38

2.00

1.88

2.71

1.49

1.06

1.02

263.19

2.50

2.88

2.00

2.00

3.00

1.25

2.50

2.20

0.00

1.80

7.99

2.50

2.50

3.50

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

2.75

0.00

8.19 3.00

5.38

5.38

1.63

0.63

0.63

2.38

21.40

21.63

75.11

110.50

1.88

1.88

Word addressing level does not apply.

0.00

see p. F-8

0.50

0.00

4.94

1.00

0.00

1.85

0.16

0.00

0.00

6.80

6.80

0.44

15.73

0.16

9.30

28.44

21.30

19.20

0.25

3.38

0.25

2.50

3.75

3.88

3.38

0.00

7.18

Memory

Usage in

Words

3.50

2.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

0.00

0.00

0.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

0.00

28.55

10.58

10.18

3.50

3.00

3.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

0.00

6.80

6.80

17.61

45.59

22.80

21.10

2.00

6.00

4.38

3.88

F-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table F-1: MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions

Programming Instruction

Sequencer Output

Square Root

Selectable Timed Interrupt

Start

Subtract

Suspend

Service Communications

Temporary End

Convert to BCD

Off-Delay Timer

On-Delay Timer

User Interrupt Disable

User Interrupt Enable

User Interrupt Flush

Examine if Closed

Examine if Open

Exclusive Or

Instruction

Mnemonic

SQO

SQR

STS

SUB

SUS

SVC

TND

TOD

TOF

TON

UID

UIE

UIF

XIC

XIO

XOR

Word

Execution Time in µs Memory

Usage in

False True Words

6.80

20.20

3.88

0.00

0.00

22.51

62.73

1.50

1.00

Long Word

Execution Time in µs

False

6.80

0.00

True

23.40

26.58

Memory

Usage in

Words

4.38

2.50

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

0.00

3.06

0.00

0.66

0.00

135+300/word

0.00

0.00

12.32

2.16

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.63

0.63

0.00

0.33

14.64

1.85

15.49

0.59

0.66

9.79

0.51

0.51

2.67

3.25

1.50

1.00

0.50

1.75

3.88

3.88

0.88

0.88

0.88

1.00

1.00

2.75

0.00

Long Word addressing level does not apply.

0.00

11.22

8.81

3.50

3.00

F-4

Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time

Indirect Addressing

The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the Micrologix 1500 processor. The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address.

For the address forms in the following table, you can interchange the following file types:

• Input (I) and Output (O)

• Bit (B), Integer (N)

• Timer (T), Counter (C), and Control (R)

Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses

For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address(es), look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction.

[*] indicates that an indirect reference is substituted.

Table F-2: MicroLogix 1500 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing

Address Form Operand Time (µs)

L8:[*]

L[*]:1

L[*]:[*]

T4:[*]

T[*]:1

T[*]:[*]

O:1.[*]

O:[*].0

O:[*].[*]

B3:[*]

B[*]:1

B[*]:[*]

T4:[*].ACC

T[*]:1.ACC

T[*]:[*].ACC

O:1.[*]/2

O:[*].0/2

5.18

21.18

21.26

6.04

21.82

21.74

5.15

13.24

13.71

5.15

21.58

22.04

6.02

21.49

22.20

4.98

12.83

F-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Table F-2: MicroLogix 1500 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing

Address Form Operand Time (µs)

L8:1/[*]

L8:[*]/[*]

L[*]:1/[*]

L[*]:[*]/[*]

T4:[*]/DN

T[*]:1/DN

T[*]:[*]/DN

T4:[*].ACC/2

T[*]:1.ACC/2

T[*]:[*].ACC/2

T4:1/[*]

T4:[*]/[*]

T[*]:1/[*]

T[*]:[*]/[*]

T4:1.ACC/[*]

T4:[*].ACC/[*]

T[*]:1.ACC/[*]

T[*]:[*].ACC/[*]

O:[*].[*]/2

O:1.0/[*]

O:1.[*]/[*]

O:[*].0/[*]

O:[*].[*]/[*]

B3:[*]/2

B[*]:1/2

B[*]:[*]/2

B3:1/[*]

B3:[*]/[*]

B[*]:1/[*]

B[*]:[*]/[N7:3]

L8:[*]/2

L[*]:1/2

L[*]:[*]/2

6.21

7.78

23.49

23.73

6.21

8.17

23.49

24.51

6.29

7.38

23.73

23.41

5.14

20.99

21.45

5.89

20.98

22.39

21.85

6.29

7.23

23.73

23.58

4.87

20.98

21.85

13.38

6.29

7.23

15.24

15.10

4.98

21.21

F-6

Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time

Execution Time Example – Word Level Instruction Using and Indirect Address

ADD Instruction Addressing

Source A: N7:[*]

Source B: T4:[*].ACC

Destination: N[*]:[*]

ADD Instruction Times

ADD Instruction: 2.12 µs

Source A: 5.15

µ s

Source B: 6.02

µ s

Destination: 22.04

µ s

Total = 35.33

µ s

Execution Time Example – Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address

XIC B3/[*]

XIC: 0.51

µ s + 5.15

µ s = 5.66

µ s True case

XIC: 0.63

µ s + 5.15

µ s = 5.78

µ s False case

F-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Scan Time Worksheet

Calculate the scan time for you control program using the worksheet below.

Input Scan (sum of below)

Overhead (if expansion I/O is used)

Expansion Input Words X 3 µs (or X 7.5 µs if Forcing is used)

Number of modules with Input words X 10 µs

= 53 µs

=

=

Input Scan Sub-Total =

Program Scan

Add execution times of all instructions in your program when executed true =

Program Scan Sub-Total =

Output Scan (sum of below)

Overhead (if expansion I/O used)

Expansion Output Words X 2 µs (or X 6.5 µs if Forcing is used)

= 29 µs

=

Output Scan Sub-Total =

Communications Overhead

1

Worst Case

Add this number if your system includes a 1764-DAT

Housekeeping Overhead

= 1100 µs

Typical Case = 400 µs

Communications Overhead Sub-Total =

Add this number if your system includes a 1764-RTC or 1764-MM1RTC.

= 80 µs =

= 530 µs

Sum of All =

Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table X

Total Scan Time =

=

= 300 µs

1.

Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller. This will not occur every scan.

Communications Multiplier Table

Protocol

DF1 Full Duplex

DF1 Half Duplex

DH485

Shut Down

38.4K

1.45

1.16

N/A

1.00

Multiplier at Various Baud Rates

19.2K

1.19

1.07

1.07

1.00

1. Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring

9.6K

1.09

1.04

1.04

1.00

Inactive

1

1.06

1.00

N/A

1.00

F-8

System Status File

G

System Status File

The status file lets you monitor how your controller works and lets you direct how you want it to work. This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information.

Important:

Do not write to reserved words in the status file. If you intend writing to status file data, it is imperative that you first understand the function fully.

Status File Overview

The status file (S:) contains the following words:

S:15L

S:15H

S:22

S:29

S:30

S:31

S:33

Address

S:0

S:1

S:2

S:3H

S:4

S:5

S:6

S:7

S:8

S:9

S:10

S:13, S:14

Function

Arithmetic Flags

Controller Mode

Controller Alternate Mode

Watchdog Scan Time

Free Running Clock

Minor Error Bits

Major Error

Suspend Code

Suspend File

Active Nodes Channel 0 (Nodes 0 to 15)

Active Node Channel 0 (Nodes 16 to 31)

Math Register

Node Address

Baud Rate

Maximum Scan Time

User Fault File

STI Setpoint

STI File Number

Channel 0 Communications

G-15

G-15

G-15

G-16

G-16

G-16

Page

G-3

G-4

G-9

G-11

G-12

G-12

G-17

G-17

G-17

G-18

G-18

G-18

G-19

G-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

S:59

S:60

S:61

S:62

S:63

S:64L

S:64H

S:35

S:36/10

S:37

Address

S:38

S:39

S:40

S:41

S:42

S:53

S:57

S:58

Function

Last 100 µSec Scan Time

Data File Overwrite Protection Lost

RTC Year

RTC Month

RTC Day of Month

RTC Hours

RTC Minutes

RTC Seconds

RTC Day of Week

OS Catalog Number

OS Series

OS FRN

Controller Catalog Number

Controller Series

Controller Revision

User Program Functionality Type

Compiler Revision - Build Number

Compiler Revision - Release

G-22

G-22

G-23

G-23

G-23

G-24

G-24

G-24

G-24

G-24

G-25

G-25

G-25

Page

G-21

G-21

G-21

G-22

G-22

G-2

System Status File

Status File Details

Arithmetic Flags

The arithmetic flags are assessed by the processor following the execution of any math, logical, or move instruction. The state of these bits remains in effect until the next math, logical, or move instruction in the program is executed.

Carry Flag

Address

S:0/0

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This bit is set (1) if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated. Otherwise the bit remains cleared (0). When a STI, High Speed Counter, Event Interrupt, or User Fault

Routine interrupts normal execution of your program, the original value of S:0/0 is restored when execution resumes.

OverFlow Flag

Address

S:0/1

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This bit is set (1) when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in the destination. Otherwise the bit remains cleared (0). Whenever this bit is set (1), the overflow trap bit S:5/0 is also set (1). When an STI, High Speed Counter, Event

Interrupt, or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program, the original value of S:0/1 is restored when execution resumes.

Zero Flag

Address

S:0/2

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This bit is set (1) when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is zero. Otherwise the bit remains cleared (0). When an STI, High Speed

Counter, Event Interrupt, or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program, the original value of S:0/2 is restored when execution resumes.

G-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Sign Flag

Address

S:0/3

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This bit is set (1) when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is negative. Otherwise the bit remains cleared (0). When a STI, High

Speed Counter, Event Interrupt, or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program, the original value of S:0/3 is restored when execution resumes.

Controller Mode

User Application Mode

Address

S:1/0 to S:1/4

Data Format

binary

Bits 0-4 function as follows:

Range

0 to 1 1110

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1

1

1

0

0

0

S:1/0 to S:1/4

S:1/4 S:1/3 S:1/2 S:1/1 S:1/0

0 0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

Mode

ID Controller Mode

0 remote download in progress

1 remote program mode

3 remote suspend mode

(operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction)

6 remote run mode

7 remote test continuous mode

8 remote test single scan mode

16 download in progress

17 program mode

27 suspend mode

(operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction)

30 run mode

G-4

System Status File

Forces Enabled

Address

S:1/5

Data Format

binary

Range

1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This bit is set (1) by the controller to indicate that forces are enabled.

Forces Installed

Address

S:1/6

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This bit is set (1) by the controller to indicate that 1 or more inputs or outputs are forced. When this bit is clear a force condition is not present within the controller.

Fault Override At Power-Up

Address

S:1/8

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

When set (1), causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit (S:1/13) at power-up. The power-up mode is determined by the controller mode switch and the

Power-Up Mode Behavior Selection bit (S:1/12).

See also: “Fault Override” on page 8-7.

Startup Protection Fault

Address

S:1/9

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

When set (1) and the controller powers up in the RUN or REM RUN mode, the controller executes the User Fault Routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program. You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit (S:1/13) to resume operation. If the User Fault Routine does not clear bit S:1/13, the controller faults and does not enter an executing mode. Program the User Fault Routine logic accordingly.

Note:

When executing the startup protection fault routine, S:6 (major error fault code) contains the value 0016H.

G-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program

Address

S:1/10

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

For this option to work, you must set (1) this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module. When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied, the controller downloads the memory module program when the control program is corrupt or a default program exists in the controller.

Note:

If you clear the controller memory, the controller will load the default program.

The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power-Up Mode Behavior Selection bit (S:1/12).

See also: “Load on Error” on page 8-8.

Load Memory Module Always

Address

S:1/11

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

For this option to work, you must set (1) this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module. When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied, the controller downloads the memory module program.

The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power-Up Mode Behavior Selection bit (S:1/12).

See also: “Load Always” on page 8-8.

G-6

System Status File

Power-Up Mode Behavior

Address

S:1/12

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

If Power-Up Mode Behavior is clear (0 = Last State), the mode at power-up is dependent upon the:

• position of the mode switch,

• state of the Major Error Halted flag (S:1/13)

• mode at the previous power down

If Power Up Mode Behavior is set (1 = Run), the mode at power-up is dependent upon the:

• position of the mode switch

• state of the Major Error Halted flag (S:1/13)

Important:

If you want the controller to power-up and enter the Run mode, regardless of any previous fault conditions, you must also set the

Fault Override bit (S:1/8) so that the Major Error Halted flag is cleared before determining the power up mode.

The following table shows the Power-Up Mode under various conditions

Mode Switch Position at Power-Up

Program

Major Error

Halted

False

True

Power-Up Mode

Behavior

Don’t Care

Mode at Last Power-Down Power-Up Mode

Don’t Care

Program

Program w/Fault

REM Download, Download, REM Program, Program or Any

Test mode

REM Program

Last State

Remote

False

True

Run

Don’t Care

REM Suspend or Suspend

REM Run or Run

Don’t Care

Don’t Care

REM Suspend

REM Run

REM Run

REM Program w/Fault

Suspend

Run

False

Last State

Run

REM Suspend or Suspend

Any Mode except

REM Suspend or Suspend

Don’t Care

Run

Run

True Don’t Care Don’t Care

Run w/Fault

1

1.

Run w/Fault is a fault condition, just as if the controller were in the Program /w Fault mode (outputs are reset and the controller program is not being executed). However, the controller will enter Run mode as soon as the Major Error Halted flag is cleared.

See also: “Mode Behavior” on page 8-8.

G-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Major Error Halted

Address

S:1/13

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

The controller sets (1) this bit when a major error is encountered. The controller enters a fault condition and word S:6 contains the Fault Code that can be used to diagnose the condition. Any time bit S:1/13 is set, the controller:

• turns all outputs off and flashes the FAULT LED,

• or, enters the User Fault Routine allowing the control program to attempt recovery from the fault condition. If the User Fault Routine is able to clear S:1/13 and the fault condition, the controller continues to execute the control program. If the fault cannot be cleared, the outputs are cleared and the controller exits its executing mode and the FAULT LED flashes.

!

ATTENTION: If you clear the Major Error Halted bit (S:1/13) when the controller mode switch is in the RUN position, the controller immediately enters the RUN mode.

Future Access (OEM Lock)

Address

S:1/14

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

When this bit is set (1), it indicates that the programming device must have an exact copy of the controller program.

See “Allow Future Access Setting (OEM Lock)” on page 6-11 for more information.

G-8

System Status File

First Pass

Address

S:1/15

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

When the controller sets (1) this bit, it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress (following entry into an executing mode). The controller clears this bit after the first scan.

Note:

The First Pass bit (S:1/15) is set during execution of the start-up protection fault routine. Refer to S:1/9 for more information.

Controller Alternate Mode

STI Pending

Address

1

S:2/0

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated at STI:0/UIP. See “Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt

(STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information.

STI Enabled

Address

1

S:2/1

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated at STI:0/TIE. See “Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt

(STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information.

G-9

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

STI Executing

Address

1

S:2/2

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated at STI:0/UIX. See “Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt

(STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information.

Memory Module Program Compare

Address

S:2/9

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read only

When this bit is set (1) in the controller, its user program and the memory module user program must match for controller to enter an executing mode.

If the user program does not match the memory module program, or if the memory module is not present, the controller faults with error code 0017H on any attempt to enter an executing mode.

An RTC module does not support program compare. If program compare is enabled and an RTC-only module is installed, the controller does not enter an executing mode.

See also: “Load Program Compare” on page 8-8.

G-10

System Status File

Math Overflow Selection

Address

S:2/14

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

Set (1) this bit when you intend to use 32-bit addition and subtraction. When S:2/14 is set, and the result of an ADD, SUB, MUL, or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address (underflow or overflow),

• the overflow bit S:0/1 is set,

• the overflow trap bit S:5/0 is set,

• and the destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 or

32 bits of the result.

The default condition of S:2/14 is cleared (0). When S:2/14 is cleared (0), and the result of an ADD, SUB, MUL, or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address (underflow or overflow),

• the overflow bit S:0/1 is set,

• the overflow trap bit S:5/0 is set,

• the destination address contains +32,767 (word) or +2,147,483,647 (long word) if the result is positive; or -32,768 (word) or -2,147,483,648 (long word) if the result is negative.

To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection, program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S:2/14 to ensure the new math overflow operation. Program an unconditional OTU instruction at address S:2/14 to ensure the original math overflow operation.

Watchdog Scan Time

Address

S:3H

Data Format

Byte

Range

2 to 255

Type

control

User Program Access

read/write

This byte value contains the number of 10 ms intervals allowed to occur during a program cycle. The timing accuracy is from -10 ms to +0 ms. This means that a value of 2 results in a timeout between 10 and 20 ms.

If the program scan time value equals the watchdog value, a watchdog major error is generated (code 0022H).

G-11

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Free Running Clock

Address

S:4

Data Format

binary

Range

0 to FFFF

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

Minor Error Bits

Overflow Trap Bit

This register contains a free running counter that is incremented every 100 µs. This word is cleared (0) upon entering an executing mode.

Address

S:5/0

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

If this bit is ever set (1) upon execution of the END or TND instruction, a major error

(0020H) is generated. To avoid this type of major error from occurring, examine the state of this bit following a math instruction (ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, NEG, SCL,

TOD, or FRD), take appropriate action, and then clear bit S:5/0 using an OTU instruction with S:5/0.

Control Register Error

Address

S:5/2

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

The LFU, LFL, FFU, FFL, BSL, BSR, SQO, SQC, and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error. When bit S:5/2 is set (1), it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set.

If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction, major error

(0020H) is generated. To avoid this type of major error from occurring, examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction, take appropriate action, and then clear bit S:5/2 using an OTU instruction with S:5/2.

G-12

System Status File

Major Error While Executing User Fault Routine

Address

S:5/3

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

When set (1), the major error code (S:6) represents the major error that occurred while processing the User Fault Routine due to another major error.

Memory Module Boot

Address

S:5/8

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

When this bit is set (1) by the controller, it indicates that a memory module program has been transferred due to S:1/10 (Load Memory Module on Error or Default

Program) or S:1/11 (Load Memory Module Always) being set in an attached memory module user program. This bit is not cleared (0) by the controller.

Your program can examine the state of this bit on the first scan (using bit S:1/15) on entry into an Executing mode to determine if the memory module user program has been transferred after a power-up occurred. This information is useful when you have an application that contains retentive data and a memory module has bit S:1/10 or bit

S:1/11 set.

Memory Module Password Mismatch

Address

S:5/9

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

At power-up, if Load Always is set, and the controller and memory module passwords do not match, the Memory Module Password Mismatch bit is set (1).

See “Password Protection” on page 6-9 for more information.

G-13

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

STI Lost

Address

1

S:5/10

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated at STI:0/UIL. See “Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt

(STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information.

Processor Battery Low

Address

S:5/11

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This bit is set (1) when the battery is low.

Important:

Install a replacement battery immediately. See “Lithium Battery

(1747-BA)” on page B-2 for more information.

Input Filter Selection Modified

Address

S:5/13

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This bit is set (1) whenever the discrete input filter selection in the control program is not compatible with the hardware.

G-14

System Status File

Major Error

Address

S:6

Data Format

word

Range

0 to FFFF

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This register displays a value which can be used to determine what caused a fault to

occur. See “Troubleshooting Your System” on page C-1 to learn more about

troubleshooting faults.

Suspend Code

Address

S:7

Data Format

word

Range

-32,768 to

+32,767

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

When the controller executes an Suspend (SUS) instruction, the SUS code is written to this location, S:7. This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the

Suspend mode. The controller does not clear this value.

Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting, or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors.

Suspend File

Address

S:8

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 255

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

When the controller executes an Suspend (SUS) instruction, the SUS file is written to this location, S:8. This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the

Suspend mode. The controller does not clear this value.

Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting, or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors.

G-15

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Active Nodes Channel 0 (Nodes 0 to 15)

Address

1

S:9

Data Format

word

Range

0 to FFFF

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File. See “Active Node Table

Block” on page 6-16 for more information.

Active Node Channel 0 (Nodes 16 to 31)

Address

1

S:10

Data Format

word

Range

0 to FFFF

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File. See “Active Node Table

Block” on page 6-16 for more information.

Math Register

Address

S:13

S:14

Data Format

word word

Range

-32,768 to

+32,767

-32,768 to

+32,767

Type

status status

User Program Access

read/write read/write

These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL, DIV, FRD, and TOD math instructions. The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL, DIV, FRD, or TOD instruction is executed in the user program.

An explanation of how the math register operates is included with the instruction definitions.

G-16

System Status File

Node Address

Address

1

S:15 (low byte)

Data Format

byte

Range

0 to 255

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File. See “Channel 0

General Channel Status Block” on page 6-14 for more information.

Baud Rate

Address

1

S:15 (high byte)

Data Format

byte

Range

0 to 255

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File. See “Channel 0

General Channel Status Block” on page 6-14 for more information.

Maximum Scan Time

Address

S:22

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 32,767

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program cycles.

This value indicates, in 100 us increments, the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller The controller compares each scan value to the value contained in S:22. If the controller determines that the last scan value is larger than the previous, the larger value is stored in S:22.

Resolution of the maximum observed scan time value is -100 µs to +0 µs. For example, the value 9 indicates that 800 to 900 us was observed as the longest program cycle.

Interrogate this value if you need to determine the longest scan time of your program.

G-17

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

User Fault File

Address

S:29

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 255

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register is used to control which subroutine executes when a User Fault is generated.

STI Setpoint

Address

1

S:30

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 65535

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

STI File Number

This address is duplicated at STI:0/SPM. See “Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt

(STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information.

Address

1

S:31

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 65535

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated at STI:0/PFN. See “Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt

(STI) Function File” on page 23-13 for more information.

G-18

System Status File

Channel 0 Communications

Incoming Command Pending

Address

1

S:33/0

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0:4/0. See

“Channel 0 General Channel Status Block” on page 6-14 for more information.

Message Reply Pending

Address

1

S:33/1

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0:4/1. See

“Channel 0 General Channel Status Block” on page 6-14 for more information.

Outgoing Message Command Pending

Address

1

S:33/2

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0:4/2. See

“Channel 0 General Channel Status Block” on page 6-14 for more information.

G-19

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Communications Mode Selection

Address

1

S:33/3

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0:4/3. See

“Channel 0 General Channel Status Block” on page 6-14 for more information.

Communications Active

Address

1

S:33/4

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0:4/4. See

“Channel 0 General Channel Status Block” on page 6-14 for more information.

Scan Toggle Bit

Address

S:33/9

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

The controller changes the status of this bit at the end of each scan. It is reset upon entry into an executing mode.

G-20

System Status File

Last 100 µSec Scan Time

Address

S:35

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 32,767

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

This register indicates the elapsed time for the last program cycle of the controller (in

100 µs increments).

Data File Overwrite Protection Lost

Address

S:36/10

Data Format

binary

Range

0 or 1

Type

status

User Program Access

read/write

When clear (0), this bit indicates that at the time of the last program transfer to the controller, protected data files in the controller were not overwritten, or there were no protected data files in the program being downloaded.

When set (1), this bit indicates that the default data has been loaded. See “User

Program Transfer Requirements” on page 6-8 for more information.

See “Setting Download File Protection” on page 6-6 for more information.

RTC Year

Address

1

S:37

Data Format

word

Range

1998 to 2097

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

See “Real Time Clock Function File” on page 8-2 for more information.

G-21

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

RTC Month

Address

1

S:38

Data Format

word

Range

1 to 12

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

See “Real Time Clock Function File” on page 8-2 for more information.

RTC Day of Month

Address

1

S:39

Data Format

word

Range

1 to 31

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

See “Real Time Clock Function File” on page 8-2 for more information.

RTC Hours

Address

1

S:40

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 23

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

See “Real Time Clock Function File” on page 8-2 for more information.

RTC Minutes

Address

1

S:41

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 59

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

See “Real Time Clock Function File” on page 8-2 for more information.

G-22

System Status File

RTC Seconds

Address

1

S:42

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 59

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

See “Real Time Clock Function File” on page 8-2 for more information.

RTC Day of Week

Address

1

S:53

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 6

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

1. This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic. It cannot be accessed via communications (such as a Message instruction from another device).

See “Real Time Clock Function File” on page 8-2 for more information.

OS Catalog Number

Address

S:57

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 32,767

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register identifies the Catalog Number for the Operating System in the controller.

G-23

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

OS Series

Address

S:58

Data Format

ASCII

Range

A to Z

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register identifies the Series letter for the Operating System in the controller.

OS FRN

Address

S:59

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 32,767

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register identifies the FRN of the Operating System in the controller.

Controller Catalog Number

Address

S:60

Data Format

ASCII

Range

“A” to “ZZ”

Type

status

This register identifies the Catalog Number for the controller.

Controller Series

User Program Access

read only

Address

S:61

Data Format

ASCII

Range

A to Z

This register identifies the Series of the controller.

Controller Revision

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

Address

S:62

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 32,767

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register identifies the revision (Boot FRN) of the controller.

G-24

System Status File

User Program Functionality Type

Address

S:63

Data Format

word

Range

0 to 32,767

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register identifies the level of functionality of the user program in the controller.

Compiler Revision - Build Number

Address

S:64 (low byte)

Data Format

byte

Range

0 to 255

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register identifies the Build Number of the compiler which created the program in the controller.

Compiler Revision - Release

Address

S:64 (high byte)

Data Format

byte

Range

0 to 255

Type

status

User Program Access

read only

This register identifies the Release of the compiler which created the program in the controller.

G-25

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

G-26

Glossary

Glossary

The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the Allen-Bradley

Industrial Automation Glossary, Publication Number AG-7.1, for a complete guide to

Allen-Bradley technical terms.

address: A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For example,

I:1/0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location word1, bit 0.

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter: a device that provides a communication link between various networked devices. (Catalog Number 1761-NET-AIC.)

application: 1) A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller. 2)

The use of computer- or processor-based routines for specific purposes.

backup data: Data downloaded with the program.

baud rate: The speed of communication between devices. All devices must communicate at the same baud rate on a network.

bit: The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 (ON) or a 0

(OFF).

block diagrams: A schematic drawing.

Boolean operators: Logical operators such as AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, and

Exclusive-OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits. Can have an output response be true or false.

branch: A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program.

communication scan: A part of the controller’s operating cycle. Communication with other devices, such as software running on a personal computer, takes place.

controller: A device, such as a programmable controller, used to monitor input devices and control output devices.

controller overhead: An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set-up purposes.

control profile: The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions.

glossary-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

counter: 1) An electro-mechanical relay-type device that counts the occurrence of some event. May be pulses developed from operations such as switch closures, interruptions of light beams, or other discrete events.

2) In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters. The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up or down whenever the counted event occurs.

CPU (Central Processing Unit): The decision-making and data storage section of a programmable controller.

data table: The part of the processor memory that contains I/O values and files where data is monitored, manipulated, and changed for control purposes.

DIN rail: Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus (DIN) standards, a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your controller.

download: Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another device.

DTE (Data Terminal Equipment): Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data, or both.

EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

encoder: 1) A rotary device that transmits position information. 2) A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution.

executing mode: Any run or test mode.

false: The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung.

FIFO (First-In-First-Out): The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file.

file: A collection of information organized into one group.

full-duplex: A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously (contrast with half-duplex).

half-duplex: A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time.

glossary-2

Glossary

hard disk: A storage area in a personal computer that may be used to save processor files and reports for future use.

high byte: Bits 8-15 of a word.

input device: A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies signals through input circuits to the controller.

inrush current: The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized.

instruction: A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the processor. A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions.

The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false. In turn, the controller sets the output instructions to true or false.

instruction set: The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller.

I/O (Inputs and Outputs): Consists of input and output devices that provide and/or receive data from the controller.

jump: Change in normal sequence of program execution, by executing an instruction that alters the program counter (sometimes called a branch). In ladder programs a

JUMP (JMP) instruction causes execution to jump to a labeled rung.

ladder logic: A program written in a format resembling a ladder-like diagram. The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices.

least significant bit (LSB): The digit (or bit) in a binary word (code) that carries the smallest value of weight.

LED (Light Emitting Diode): Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs.

LIFO (Last-In-First-Out): The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file.

low byte: Bits 0-7 of a word.

logic: A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that can be either true or false. General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions.

glossary-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Master Control Relay (MCR): A mandatory hardwired relay that can be de-energized by any series-connected emergency stop switch. Whenever the MCR is de-energized, its contacts open to de-energize all application I/O devices.

mnemonic: A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information.

modem: Modulator/demodulator. Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line.

modes: Selected methods of operation. Example: run, test, or program.

negative logic: The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the voltage level normally associated with logic 1 (for example, 0 = +5V, 1 = 0V). Positive is more conventional (for example, 1 = +5V, 0 = 0V).

network: A series of stations (nodes) connected by some type of communication medium. A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links.

nominal input current: The current at nominal input voltage.

normally closed: Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de-energized or the switch is deactivated; they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated. In ladder programming, a symbol that will allow logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is logic “0” when evaluated.

normally open: Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de-energized or the switch is deactivated. (They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated.) In ladder programming, a symbol that will allow logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is logic “1” when evaluated.

off-delay time: The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller. The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any filter adjustment applied.

offline: Describes devices not under direct communication.

offset: The steady-state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point.

glossary-4

Glossary

off-state leakage current: When an ideal mechanical switch is opened (off-state) no current flows through the switch. Practical semiconductor switches, and the transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches, allow a small current to flow when the switch is in the off state. This current is referred to as the offstate leakage current. To ensure reliable operation, the off-state leakage current rating of a switch should be less than the minimum operating current rating of the load that is connected to the switch.

on-delay time: The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller.

one-shot: A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan.

online: Describes devices under direct communication. For example, when RSLogix

500 is monitoring the program file in a controller.

operating voltage: For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied voltage.

output device: A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that receives data from the controller.

processor: A Central Processing Unit. (See CPU.)

processor file: The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices. Only one processor file may be stored in the controller at a time.

program file: The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic program.

program mode: When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs are de-energized.

program scan: A part of the controller’s operating cycle. During the scan the ladder program is executed and the Output data file is updated based on the program and the

Input data file.

programming device: Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams.

protocol: The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network.

read: To acquire data from a storage place. For example, the processor READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder program.

glossary-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

relay: An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits.

relay logic: A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays.

restore: To download (transfer) a program from a personal computer to a controller.

reserved bit: A status file location that the user should not read or write to.

retentive data: Information associated with data files (timers, counters, inputs, and outputs) in a program that is preserved through power cycles.

RS-232: An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits. A single-ended serial communication interface.

run mode: This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the ladder program, monitors input devices, energizes output devices, and acts on enabled I/O forces.

rung: Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs. A rung contains input and output instructions. During Run mode, the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false.

If a path of true logic exists, the outputs are made true. If all paths are false, the outputs are made false.

save: To upload (transfer) a program stored in memory from a controller to a personal computer; OR to save a program to a computer hard disk.

scan time: The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program. The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and each instruction’s status during the scan.

sinking: A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and controller

I/O circuit — typically, a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground, low, or negative side of power supply.

sourcing: A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and controller

I/O circuit — typically, a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the source, high, or positive side of power supply.

status: The condition of a circuit or system, represented as logic 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).

terminal: A point on an I/O module that external I/O devices, such as a push button or pilot light, are wired to.

glossary-6

Glossary

throughput: The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding output turns on.

true: The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung.

upload: Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device.

watchdog timer: A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle. If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period, it will cause a fault.

workspace: The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage.

write: To copy data to a storage device. For example, the processor WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output modules.

glossary-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual glossary-8

Index

Index

A

ADD, 15-4

address, glossary-1

AIC+

applying power to, 4-18 attaching to the network, 4-18

connecting, 4-12

isolated modem, 4-5

installing, 4-18

recommended user supplied components, 4-17

selecting cable, 4-13

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter, glossary-1

Allen-Bradley

contacting for assistance, C-14

AllenBradley

contacting for assistance, P-3

AllenBradley Support, P-3

AND, 17-3

application, glossary-1

attach and lock module, 2-25

B

backup data, glossary-1

Base Comms Door, B-7 base comms door, B-7

base terminal door, B-6, B-6

base unit panel mounting, 2-17

base units

hardware overview, 1-2

baud rate, glossary-1 bit, glossary-1

bit key, 7-4

Bit Mode, 7-12

block diagrams, glossary-1

Boolean operators, glossary-1 branch, glossary-1

BSL, 19-5

BSR, 19-7

C

cables

hardware overview, 1-5

planning routes for DH485 connections, D-13

selection guide for the AIC+, 4-13

selection guide for the DeviceNet network, 4-20

calling Allen-Bradley for assistance, C-

14

CE mark, 2-2

channel configuration

DF1 full-duplex, D-2

CIF table footnote, 25-8

clearing faults, C-5

CLR, 15-6

Common Techniques Used in this

Manual, P-3

communication

DeviceNet, 4-20

Communication Instructions, 25-1

communication protocols

DF1 fullduplex, D-2

DF1 halfduplex, D-4

DH485, D-10

communication scan, glossary-1

compact I/O

attach and lock module, 2-25 installing, 2-25

Compare Instructions, 1

component descriptions, 1-2

accessories

cables, 1-5 programming, 1-5

base units, 1-2

Index-1

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

data access tool, 1-3

end cap, 1-4 expansion I/O, 1-4

memory modules/real-time clock,

1-3 processor, 1-3

components

installing, 2-18

Connecting the DF1 Protocol, 4-3

connecting the system, 4-1

AIC+, 4-12

DeviceNet network, 4-20

DF1 fullduplex protocol, 4-3

DH485 network, 4-8

Connecting to a DH–485 Network, 4-8

contacting AllenBradley for assistance,

P-3

contactors (bulletin 100), surge suppressors for, 3-6

control profile, glossary-1 controller, glossary-1

determining faults, C-2

fault messages, C-6

features, 1-1

grounding, 3-7

installation, 2-1

mounting, 2-14

preventing excessive heat, 2-8

status file, G-1

troubleshooting, C-2

controller error recovery model, C-4

controller faults, C-2 controller LED status, C-2

controller operation

normal, C-3

controller overhead, glossary-1

Conversion Instructions, 16-1

Convert from BCD (FRD)

example, 16-8

Convert to BCD (TOD)

changes to the math register, 16-11

example, 16-12

COP, 19-2

counter, glossary-2

CPU (Central Processing Unit), glossary-2

CTD, 13-10

CTU, 13-10

D

DAT

Communication Errors, 7-15

configuration, 7-6

Controller Faults Displayed, 7-14

display, 7-11

Error Conditions, 7-15

Internal Errors, 7-15

keypad, 7-4

power-up operation, 7-5

DAT Feature/Function Table, 7-4

DAT Function File, 7-6

data access tool

hardware overview, 1-3

installing, 2-21

data table, glossary-2

DCD, 16-3

DeviceNet Communications, 4-20

DeviceNet network

connecting, 4-20 selecting cable, 4-20

DF1 fullduplex protocol

configuration parameters, D-2

connecting, 4-3

description, D-2

example system configuration, D-3

using a modem, 4-4, D-8

DF1 Half-Duplex protocol

configuration parameters, D-5

DF1 halfduplex protocol

description, D-4

DH485 communication protocol

configuration parameters, D-11

DH485 network

Index-2

Index

configuration parameters, D-15

connecting, 4-8

description, D-10

devices that use the network, D-11

example system configuration, D-

16

installation, 4-8

planning considerations, D-13

protocol, D-10 token rotation, D-10

DIN rail, glossary-2

mounting, 2-15

removing your base unit, 2-16

disconnecting main power, 2-5

DIV, 15-5

download, glossary-2

DTE (Data Terminal Equipment), glossary-2

E

Electronics Industries Association (EIA),

D-1

electrostatic discharge

preventing, 2-18

EMC Directive, 2-2

emergency-stop switches, 2-10

EMI, glossary-2

ENC, 16-4

encoder, glossary-2

END, 21-5

end cap

hardware overview, 1-4

ENTER key, 7-4

EQU, 3

error recovery model, C-4

error table, C-3

errors

controller, C-3 hardware, C-3

identifying, C-5

ESC key, 7-4

European Union Directive compliance,

2-2

executing mode, glossary-2

expansion I/O

hardware overview, 1-4

F

F1 Functions, 7-13

F1 key, 7-4

F2 Functions, 7-13

F2 key, 7-4

false, glossary-2

Fault Messages, C-6

fault recovery procedure, C-5 fault routine, C-5

fault routines, 23-6

faults

automatically clearing, C-5 identifying, C-5 manually clearing using the fault routine, C-5

FET output specifications

1764-28BXB, A-5

FFL, 19-9

FFU, 19-12

FIFO (First-In-First-Out), glossary-2 file, glossary-2

File Instructions, 19-1

FLL, 19-3

FRD, 16-6

FRD Source Operand, 16-7

full-duplex, glossary-2

G

general specifications, A-2

GEQ, 5

grounding the controller, 3-7

GRT, 4

Index-3

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

H

half-duplex, glossary-2

hard disk, glossary-3

hardware

features, 1-1

heat protection, 2-8

high byte, glossary-3

HSL, 9-29

I

I/O (Inputs and Outputs), glossary-3

identifying controller faults, C-5

IIM, 22-2

Input and Output Instructions, 10-1, 22-

1

input device, glossary-3

input specifications, A-2

input states on power down, 2-7

inrush current, glossary-3

installing

your controller, 2-1

installing controller components, 2-18

compact I/O, 2-25

data access tool, 2-21

memory module/real-time clock, 2-

23

processor, 2-19

installing your base unit

on DIN rail, 2-16

using mounting screws, 2-17

instruction, glossary-3

Instruction Descriptions, 11-2

instruction set, glossary-3

INT, 23-7

integer key, 7-4

Integer Mode, 7-12

IOM, 22-4

isolated link coupler

installing, 4-9

isolation transformers

power considerations, 2-6

J

JMP, 21-2

JSR, 21-3

jump, glossary-3

K

keypad, 7-4

L

ladder logic, glossary-3

LBL, 21-2

least significant bit (LSB), glossary-3

LED (Light Emitting Diode), glossary-3

LEDs

error with controller, C-3

normal controller operation, C-2 status, C-2

LEQ, 5

LES, 4

LFL, 19-15

LFU, 19-18

LIFO (Last-In-First-Out), glossary-3

LIM, 8

lithium battery (1747-BA)

disposing, B-5

handling, B-2

installing, B-4

manufacturer, B-5

storing, B-2

transporting, B-3

local data types footnote, 25-29

logic, glossary-3

Logical Instructions, 17-1

Logical Instructions - Status Updates,

15-3, 17-2

low byte, glossary-3

Index-4

Index

M

manuals

related, P-2

master control relay, 2-8

Master Control Relay (MCR), glossary-

4

master control relay circuit

periodic tests, 2-6

Math Instructions, 15-1

MCR, 21-6

memory module

data file protection, 8-4 program compare, 8-4 program/data backup, 8-4

removal/installation under power,

8-1, 8-5

Memory Module Information File, 8-5

fault override, 8-7

functionality type, 8-6

load always, 8-8 load on error, 8-8 mode behavior, 8-8

module present, 8-7

program compare, 8-8

write protect, 8-7

memory module/real-time clock

installing, 2-23

Memory Usage and Instruction

Execution Time, F-1, G-1

MEQ, 6

mnemonic, glossary-4 modem, glossary-4

modem cable

constructing your own, 4-5

modems

dialup phone, D-8

leasedline, D-9 line drivers, D-9 radio, D-9

using with MicroLogix controllers,

D-8

modes, glossary-4

monitoring controller operation

fault recovery procedure, C-5

motor starters (bulletin 509)

surge suppressors, 3-6

motor starters (bulletin 709)

surge suppressors, 3-6

mounting

the controller, 2-14

using DIN rail, 2-15

MOV, 18-2

Move Instructions, 18-1

MUL, 15-5

MVM, 18-4

N

NEG, 15-6

negative logic, glossary-4

NEQ, 3

network, glossary-4 nominal input current, glossary-4 normally closed, glossary-4 normally open, glossary-4

NOT, 17-6

null modem cable, 4-6

O

offline, glossary-4 offset, glossary-4

off-state leakage current, glossary-5 one-shot, glossary-5 online, glossary-5

ONS, 12-7

operating voltage, glossary-5

OR, 17-4

OSF, 12-8

OSR, 12-8

OTE, 12-4

OTL, 12-5

OTU, 12-5

Index-5

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

output device, glossary-5

output specifications, A-4

1764-28BXB FET, A-5

ownership timeout, D-7

P

panel mounting

base unit, 2-17

planning considerations for a network,

D-13

power considerations

input states on power down, 2-7

isolation transformers, 2-6

loss of power source, 2-7 other line conditions, 2-7

overview, 2-6 power supply inrush, 2-6

power distribution, 2-5

Power Save Timeout, 7-6, 7-10

power source

loss of, 2-7

Power Supply Inrush, 2-6

power supply inrush

power considerations, 2-6

preventing excessive heat, 2-8

proceessor

hardware overview, 1-3

Process Control Instruction, 24-1

processor, glossary-5

installing, 2-18

Processor Access Door, B-6 processor access door, B-6

Processor Comms Door, B-7

processor file, glossary-5

Program Control Instructions, 21-1

program faults

determining, C-2

program file, glossary-5 program mode, glossary-5 program scan, glossary-5 programming device, glossary-5

programming the controller

overview, 1-5

Proportional Integral Derivative instruction (PID)

application notes, 24-22

PID tuning, 24-26

runtime errors, 24-19

the PID concept, 24-1

the PID equation, 24-2

PROTECTED indicator light, 7-4, 7-11

protocol, glossary-5

PTO, 10-1

publications

related, P-2

Purpose of this Manual, P-1

PWM, 10-20

Q

quadrature encoder, 9-22

R

RAC, 9-31

read, glossary-5

real time clock

battery low indicator bit, 8-3 disabling, 8-3

Real Time Clock Function File, 8-2

REF, 22-6

related publications, P-2

relay, glossary-6

relay contact rating table, A-4

relay logic, glossary-6

relays

surge suppressors for, 3-6

Relay-Type (Bit) Instructions, 12-1

remote packet support, D-19

replacement battery, B-2

disposing, B-5

handling, B-2

installing, B-4

storing, B-2

Index-6

Index

transporting, B-3

replacement doors, B-6

base comms door, B-7

base terminal door, B-6 processor access door, B-6

trim pots/mode switch cover door,

B-7

replacement kits, B-1 replacement parts, B-1

base comms door, B-7

base terminal door, B-6 processor access door, B-6

terminal blocks, B-8

trim pots/mode switch cover door,

B-7

Replacement Terminal Blocks, B-8 replacement terminal blocks, B-8

RES, 13-11

reserved bit, glossary-6

response times for high-speed dc inputs, A-3

response times for normal dc inputs, A-

4

restore, glossary-6

RET, 21-4

retentive data, glossary-6

RS–232, glossary-6

RS-232 communication interface, D-1

RTO, 13-6

run mode, glossary-6 rung, glossary-6

S

safety circuits, 2-5

safety considerations

disconnecting main power, 2-5

periodic tests of master control relay circuit, 2-6

power distribution, 2-5 safety circuits, 2-5

save, glossary-6

SBR, 21-3

scan time, glossary-6

SCL, 15-7

SCP, 15-8

Sequencer Instructions, 20-1

sinking, glossary-6

sinking and sourcing circuits, 3-8

sinking wiring diagram

1764-24BWA, 3-10

1764-28BXB, 3-12

sourcing, glossary-6

sourcing wiring diagram

1764-24BWA, 3-11

1764-28BXB, 3-13

spade lug wiring, 3-3

specifications, A-1

general, A-2 input, A-2

output, A-4 relay contact rating table, A-4

response times for high-speed dc inputs, A-3

response times for normal dc inputs,

A-4

working voltage (1764-24AWA), A-

6

working voltage (1764-24BWA), A-

7

working voltage (1764-28BXB), A-8

SQC, 20-2

SQL, 20-10

SQO, 20-6

SQR, 15-10

status, glossary-6

status file

overview, G-1

STS, 23-8

SUB, 15-4

surge suppressors

for contactor, 3-6 for motor starters, 3-6

for relays, 3-6

Index-7

MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual

recommended, 3-6

using, 3-4

SUS, 21-4

system configuration

DH485 connection examples, D-16

system connection, 4-1

T

Target Bit File, 7-6, 7-8

Target Integer File, 7-6

terminal, glossary-6

throughput, glossary-7

Timer and Counter Instructions, 13-1

TND, 21-5

TOD, 16-10

TOD Destination Operand, 16-11

TOF, 13-5

TON, 13-4

Transient Pulse Function, 3-15

Trim Pot Information Function File, 7-2 trim pots, 7-1–7-2 adjustment, 7-2 error conditions, 7-2

location, 7-1

trim pots/mode switch cover door, B-7

troubleshooting

automatically clearing faults, C-5

contacting Allen-Bradley for assistance, C-14

contacting AllenBradley for assistance, P-3

controller error recovery model, C-4

determining controller faults, C-2

identifying controller faults, C-5 manually clearing faults, C-5

understanding the controller LED status, C-2

using the fault routine, C-5

true, glossary-7

U

UID, 23-9

UIE, 23-10

UIF, 23-12

upload, glossary-7

User Interrupt Instructions, 23-1

Using Expansion I/O, 5-1

Using Logical Instructions, 17-1

W

wire requirements, 3-1

wiring

spade lug, 3-3

wiring diagrams, 3-8

wiring recommendation, 3-2

wiring your controller, 3-1

Working Screen Operation, 7-14

working voltage (1764-24AWA)

specifications, A-6

working voltage (1764-24BWA)

specifications, A-7

working voltage (1764-28BXB)

specifications, A-8

workspace, glossary-7 write, glossary-7

X

XIC, 12-2

XIO, 12-2

XOR, 17-5

Index-8

Publication 1764-6.1 - February 1999

© (1999) Rockwell International Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A.

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents